nuclear engineering - ingegneria nucleare

“Advanced Detection Systems for Nuclear Technologies II” is aimed at providing, through a strongly experimental approach, an advanced knowledge of detection systems and measurement techniques exploited in industrial, medical and research applications typical of nuclear technologies. This course is dedicated to the application of the concepts acquired in the framework of “Advanced Detection Systems for Nuclear Technologies I” to various detection systems, as coincidence techniques (particle discrimination, gamma spectrometry, neutron detection etc.), two-dimensional and three-dimensional imaging (radiography and tomography), digital signal processing techniques based on dedicated simulation software. Laboratory sessions are foreseen.

In the framework of the “Advanced Detection Systems for Nuclear Technologies II” course, the student:

• will learn the basics of digital signal processing;
• will know examples of techniques for time coincidence;
• will know the procedure for analyzing radioactive samples through high-resolution gamma spectrometry;
• will know two-dimensional and three-dimensional imaging techniques;
• will be able to apply the acquired knowledge to various detection systems and techniques in the framework of nuclear technologies;
• will be able to compare experimental data and simulation outcomes in a critical way.

Digital signal processing and digital techniques. Signal transformation from the continuous time to the discrete time domain. The sampling theorem. The Nyquist frequency and the aliasing phenomenon. The Shannon interpolation formula.
Introduction to the digital signal processing-based instruments. The ideal ADC characteristic. The quantization error and the dithering technique. The real ADC characteristic. The sample and hold device: sampling stage and hold stage.
The nuclear and electronic spectroscopy chain associated to a radiation spectrometer: the electronic calibration procedure.
Pulse height analysis and digital multi channel analyzer: the traditional analog approach and the digital approach applied to a thermal neutron detector. Dedicated acquisition software.
Timing coincidence techniques. Examples of application of coincidence techniques for 2D mapping and for particle discrimination by means of a scatter plot measured with a double-stage detector.
Detection systems for high-resolution gamma spectrometry. Efficiency calculation and quantification of activity concentration of unknown radioactive samples.
X-ray imaging: principles and main applications in digital radiography and computed tomography. Outline on sensors for X-ray cameras: CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) and CCD (Charge-Coupled Device). Quantum efficiency and dynamic range. Lens coupling efficiency: derivation and application. Read-out noise and dark noise of a CCD.
Five laboratories will be offered aiming at gaining experience with both computational and experimental characterization of advanced detection systems.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation consists in an oral examination. It is aimed at verifying:
the knowledge of the course topics, focusing on the understanding of the main aspects of the digital signal processing applied to radiation detection systems;
the capability of carrying out autonomously a laboratory session by applying the acquired knowledge to a detection system in the framework of nuclear technologies (by optimizing the acquisition parameters of the selected detector and of the nuclear and electronic spectroscopy chain);
the capability of elaborating and discussing experimental results collected during the laboratory activities;
the ability of discussing and communicating results in a professional way with a proper scientific terminology.

Meccanica quantistica: richiami sul dualismo onda/particella, le funzioni d'onda. L'equazione di Schrödinger dipendente dal tempo, metodi operatoriali, elementi di teoria della misura, momento angolare orbitale e di spin, funzioni d'onda per molte particelle, dinamica semiclassica, metodi approssimati.
Fisica atomica: l'atomo di idrogeno, l'atomo di elio, gli atomi a molti elettroni: il campo medio.
Fisica molecolare: approssimazione adiabatica, orbitali molecolari, transizioni roto-vibrazionali e vibroniche.

L'insegnamento ha l’obiettivo di fornire una conoscenza introduttiva ma non elementare della fisica nucleare. In particolare, ci si propone di sviluppare i fondamenti alla base della comprensione della struttura e delle proprietà del nucleo atomico, chiarendo i limiti entro i quali questo sia possibile in relazione alle caratteristiche dell'interazione tra i suoi costituenti fondamentali, i nucleoni. Per questo motivo si inizia, dopo aver introdotto alcuni complementi matematico-fisici necessari, dallo studio della interazione nucleare forte tra due nucleoni. Una parte essenziale é poi costituita dalla presentazione di alcuni dei modelli teorici per la descrizione del nucleo. Infine, si tratteranno i decadimenti radioattivi (in particolare il beta e l'interazione debole) e le reazioni nucleari, con particolare attenzione agli aspetti fisici di maggiore interesse per le applicazioni ingegneristiche.

Lo studente:

• riconosce, distingue e sa analizzare nelle loro parti i principali aspetti fenomenologici della fisica nucleare e gli strumenti fisico-matematici necessari per lo studio delle proprietà fisiche dei nuclei
• conosce e sa analizzare i fondamenti fisici e la descrizione teorica dell'interazione nucleare forte tra nucleoni, dei principali modelli di struttura del nucleo e dei principali fenomeni dinamici della fisica nucleare, con particolare riferimento ai decadimenti radioattivi e alle reazioni nucleari
• è in grado di selezionare ed applicare correttamente opportuni metodi della fisica teorica al fine di descrivere efficacemente le proprietà fisiche fondamentali dei nuclei, anche mediante lo svolgimento di semplici derivazioni e stime numeriche ottenute attraverso il corretto utilizzo dei sistemi di unità di misura e il valore delle grandezze fisiche fondamentali nei fenomeni nucleari
• è in grado di esporre gli argomenti trattati utilizzando un linguaggio e una terminologia corretta ed appropriata dal punto di vista scientifico

Fenomenologia del nucleo atomico. Aspetti essenziali delle proprietà del nucleo: composizione, proprietà dei nucleoni e della materia nucleare: dimensioni, densità, massa, momento angolare, momenti nucleari di multiplo elettromagnetico. Esistenza di stati nucleari instabili e eccitati. Interazioni tra nuclei.
Richiami e complementi matematico-fisici necessari per lo sviluppo dell’insegnamento. Funzioni, sviluppi in serie e equazioni notevoli della fisica matematica. Aspetti generali della dinamica di una particella in campi di forze centrali. Descrizione del momento angolare e dello spin in sistemi quantistici ( argomento sviluppato in modalità flipped, mediante uso di tool didattico EVOLI ). Complementi di relatività speciale ( argomento sviluppato in modalità flipped, mediante uso di tool didattico EVOLI ). Teoria quantistica della diffusione elastica e anelastica. Metodi per la descrizione di sistemi quantistici a molti corpi: metodo di Hartree e Hartree-Fock, seconda quantizzazione, trasformazioni canoniche e quasiparticelle.
Elementi di meccanica quantistica relativistica e teoria dei campi. Motivazioni per l’insegnamento. Introduzione alla descrizione quantistica del campo elettromagnetico libero e della sua interazione con la materia. Generalizzazione al caso di altri campi: equazioni d’onda relativistiche. Equazione di Klein-Gordon: potenziale di Yukawa, mesoni, antiparticelle. Equazione di Dirac: proprietà delle particelle con spin 1/2 (elettrone, nucleone, particelle di massa nulla; argomento sviluppato in modalità flipped, mediante uso di tool didattico EVOLI ).
Interazione nucleare forte. Determinazione della struttura generale della forza nucleare forte da argomenti di simmetria: termini centrali, tensoriali, da interazione spin-orbita, di scambio. Studio delle proprietà della forza nucleare forte dall'interazione nucleone-nucleone. Stati legati: il deutone. Scattering nucleone-nucleone. Invarianza di carica e spin isotopico. Modello di Yukawa: interazione nucleare forte per scambio di mesoni. *Determinazione perturbativa del potenziale nucleare dall'interazione tra corrente nucleonica e campo pionico.
Modelli di struttura del nucleo. Aspetti generali: approccio di particella singola e fenomeni collettivi. Modello a goccia di liquido e formula di Weisacker per le masse nucleari. Modello a nucleoni liberi. Modello a shell: soluzione per campi di forze notevoli e determinazione dei numeri magici. Ruolo dell'interazione residua di pairing nella struttura dei nuclei. *Effetti collettivi: vibrazioni, rotazioni, superconduttività nuclare.
Emissione gamma. Teoria quantistica della emissione di radiazione elettromagnetica da distribuzioni di cariche e correnti nella approssimazione di dipolo. Applicazione alle proprietà generali della emissione per diseccitazione gamma. Regole di selezione ed emissione di ordine superiore. Conversione interna.
Decadimento alfa ed emissione di nucleoni/nuclei. Cenni alla fenomenologia del decadimento alfa e della emissione di nucleoni. Descrizione teorica in termini di attraversamento di una barriera di potenziale classicamente proibita. Soluzione in casi semplificati e teoria generale di Gamow per il caso di barriere tridimensionali di forma realistica. Fissione spontanea.
Interazione debole e decadimento beta. Cenni alla fenomenologia del decadimento beta. Descrizione teorica: aspetti cinematici generali, teoria di Fermi del decadimento beta, interazione debole, struttura generale della probabilità di emissione beta, proprietà generali dell'elemento di matrice di transizione. *Derivazione dell'elemento di matrice di transizione nell'approssimazione non relativistica, cenni alla generalizzazione relativistica.
Reazioni nucleari. Applicazione della teoria generale della diffusione anelastica allo studio delle reazioni nucleari. Formule generali per la sezione d'urto di reazione. *Reazioni nucleari dirette. Modello del nucleo composto. Risonanze nucleari: Formule di Breit-Wigner. Fissione nucleare. Fusione nucleare.
*Cenni alla fisica delle particelle elementari e delle interazioni fondamentali.
Gli argomenti preceduti da un asterisco verranno sviluppati sulla base delle conoscenze pregresse e degli interessi degli studenti, e in relazione al tempo a disposizione.
Agli studenti interessati ad approfondire aspetti legati alla fisica delle particelle e delle interazioni fondamentali si segnala l'insegnamento Laboratorio di fisica delle particelle (cod. 052602), per la frequenza del quale è necessario aver seguito un insegnamento equivalente a Fisica del nucleo.

Prova orale obbligatoria
L'esame consiste in una prova finale orale.
La prova orale valuterà la capacità di:

• cogliere ed interpretare il significato fisico delle metodologie matematiche utilizzate per la descrizione della fisica nucleare e di applicarle alla descrizione di: interazione nucleare forte tra nucleoni, modelli nucleari, decadimenti radioattivi, reazioni nucleari
• ricavare stime numeriche semplificate anche attraverso l’utilizzo corretto dei sistemi di unità di misura e il valore delle grandezze fisiche fondamentali nei fenomeni nucleari.
• descrivere gli argomenti in modo appropriato dal punto di vista del linguaggio e della terminologia scientifica adottati.
  Dopo la conclusione della prova orale, agli studenti verrà richiesto di cimentarsi in un esercizio di autovalutazione dell'esame svolto, con lo scopo di poter ricevere riscontro anche sulla capacità di individuare gli elementi oggettivi emersi dall'esame e, sulla base di questi, tradurli nella valutazione quantitativa prevista. Questa fase non ha nessun impatto sulla valutazione dell'esame, ma vuole rappresentare una opportunità per gli studenti di testare il livello di consapevolezza raggiunto per sfruttare gli elementi emersi dall'esame svolto nel modo più efficace.

K.S. Krane, Introductory nuclear physics, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1988, ISBN: 0-471-80553-X
Note: Testo di livello introduttivo
B. L. Cohen, Concepts of nuclear physics, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 1988, ISBN: 00-7099-248-5
Note: Testo di livello introduttivo
Jean-Louis Basdevant, Michel Spiro, James Rich, Fundamentals In Nuclear Physics, Editore: Springer (e-book disponibile su risorse elettroniche POLIMI), Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 978-0-387-25095-3
Note: Testo di livello intermedio
Carlos A. Bertulani, Nuclear Physics in a Nutshell, Editore: Princeton University Press, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 9780691125053
Note: Testo di livello intermedio
E. Segrè, Nuclei e particelle, Editore: Zanichelli, Anno edizione: 1981, ISBN: 88-08-05628-7
Note: Testo di livello intermedio
S.G. Nilsson, I. Ragnarsson, Shapes and shells in nuclear structure, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 0-521-01966-4
Note: Testo di livello intermedio con numerosi esercizi e soluzioni
J. M. Blatt & V. F. Weisskopf, Theoretical Nuclear Physics, Editore: Dover, Anno edizione: 1991, ISBN: 0-486-66827-4
Note: Testo di livello avanzato
A. G. Sitenko & V. K. Tartakovskij, Lezioni di teoria del nucleo, Editore: Mir, Anno edizione: 1981
Note: Testo di livello avanzato

Obiettivo dell’insegnamento è fornire agli studenti i fondamenti della Fisica dello Stato Solido, al livello della laurea magistrale.
La prima parte ha come obiettivo lo studio dei solidi che possiedono un ordine a lungo raggio (cristalli), le loro proprietà strutturali (simmetria) e la loro struttura elettronica statica. Dopo un'introduzione alla cristallografia, i principali metodi sperimentali utilizzati per determinare la struttura geometrica dei cristalli vengono discussi, unitamente alla relativa teoria. La meccanica quantistica viene quindi utilizzata per determinare la struttura elettronica a bande, sia introducendo le proprietà generali degli stati elettronici in un potenziale periodico, sia presentando i principali metodi approssimati per il calcolo dei livelli energetici. Successivamente, l'effetto di un campo esterno statico viene studiato mediante alcuni concetti cruciali come: densità degli stati, Hamiltoniano equivalente, massa efficace, dinamica semiclassica e rappresentazione elettrone-buca.
Nella seconda parte si vogliono fornire agli studenti i principi basilari per la soluzione approssimata dell'equazione di Schroedinger a molti corpi per un cristallo a temperatura finita, includendo le vibrazioni reticolari: le approssimazioni di Born-Oppenheimer e di campo medio. La dinamica reticolare classica viene introdotta (costanti di forza interatomica e matrice dinamica, onde reticolari con le loro frequenze e polarizzazioni), e quindi quantizzata presentando i nuovi concetti di fononi acustici e ottici. Su questa base proprietà termodinamiche come il calore specifico e la dilatazione termica sono interpretabili a livello microscopico. Sono introdotte le proprietà ottiche macroscopiche dei solidi e, sempre utilizzando la meccanica quantistica, le proprietà ottiche dei cristalli vengono poi derivate dal trattamento microscopico delle transizioni elettroniche. Infine, le proprietà di trasporto (conducibilità termica ed elettrica e le loro dipendenze dalla temperatura) sono introdotte e spiegate in termini di cinetica fisica.
Tutti gli argomenti vengono illustrati anche mediante esempi.

Dopo aver seguito l’insegnamento e superato l’esame lo studente:

• descrive i principi matematici e fisici necessari per comprendere cosa sia un corpo solido, in particolare un cristallo, e conosce la struttura geometrica dei cristalli più importanti (DdD1);
• descrive le principali quantità che definiscono lo stato cristallino, così come i modelli teorici e i metodi sperimentali adatti a descriverlo e a determinarne la struttura, con particolare riferimento ai reticoli periodici perfetti 'congelati', con una base di atomi (DdD1);
• è in grado di argomentare sulle principali proprietà elettroniche statiche (struttura a bande) di specifici cristalli, comprendendo i fondamenti della descrizione quantistica di un elettrone in un potenziale periodico, e i principali metodi approssimati per il calcolo della struttura a bande (DdD1);
• è in grado di utilizzare i modelli teorici di cui sopra per sviluppare la descrizione del moto accelerato di un elettrone in un cristallo specifico, soggetto a un campo esterno statico, utilizzando la rappresentazione elettrone-buca (DdD2);
• descrive i modelli teorici necessari per risolvere in modo approssimato l'equazione di Schrodinger a molti corpi per un cristallo, includendo le vibrazioni dei nuclei (DdD1);
• descrive i fondamenti della dinamica reticolare, sia classica sia quantistica (onde reticolari e fononi) (DdD1);
• è in grado di applicare la meccanica quantistica per comprendere e prevedere le proprietà macroscopiche, termodinamiche e ottiche, di cristalli specifici (DdD2);
• è in grado di applicare la meccanica quantistica e la cinetica fisica per comprendere e prevedere le proprietà macroscopiche di trasporto (conducibilità elettrica e termica) di cristalli specifici (DdD2);
• possiede una conoscenza dei valori delle grandezze fisiche principali della Fisica dello Stato Solido, anche con riferimento ad esempi di cristalli specifici (DdD1).

• Proprietà fenomenologiche e definizione di materiali solidi
• Corpi solidi: ordine e simmetria; cristalli semplici: reticoli e ordine traslazionale; reticolo reciproco; cristalli complessi: reticolo e base; legame cristallino; osservabili tensoriali
• Teoria dello scattering: ampiezza di scattering di particelle quantistiche: approssimazione di Born; scattering elastico - legge di Bragg, diffrazione di raggi X
• L'equazione di Schrodinger per un cristallo: approssimazioni di Born-Oppenheimer e di campo medio
• Stati elettronici: teorema di Bloch, riduzione alla prima zona di Brillouin e condizioni periodiche al contorno; modello a elettroni liberi (energia di Fermi e densità di stati); struttura a bande: approssimazione di elettroni quasi liberi; struttura a bande: approssimazioni di legame forte e LCAO; metodo generale per il calcolo della densità di stati
• Dinamica dell'elettrone in campi esterni: Hamiltoniano equivalente; teorema della massa efficace; livelli di impurezza; dinamica semiclassica in un cristallo ideale; corrente elettrica e oscillazioni di Bloch; elettroni e buche (lacune); eccitoni
• Teorema adiabatico e moti vibrazionali
• Dinamica reticolare: Calore specifico reticolare: modello di Einstein; cristalli semplici 1-D: onde reticolari e fononi acustici; catene lineari con due atomi per cella: modi acustici e modi ottici; dinamica reticolare 3-D in generale: tensore delle costanti di forza interatomiche e matrice dinamica; fononi in un cristallo complesso 3-D; modello di Debye del calore specifico; dilatazione termica e processi anarmonici; polaritoni
• Proprietà ottiche: Descrizione macroscopica della dispersione e dell'assorbimento dei fotoni; relazioni di Kramers e Kronig per la suscettività dielettrica dipendente dalla frequenza; modello di Drude-Lorentz, proprietà ottiche dei metalli; trattazione quantistica dell'assorbimento di fotoni; proprietà ottiche dei semiconduttori a gap diretto; il caso del gap indiretto; proprietà ottiche dei polaritoni
• Fenomeni di trasporto: Leggi di Ohm e di Fourier locali; andamento sperimentale della conducibilità elettrica e termica in funzione della temperatura; cinetica fisica e equazione di Boltzmann; teoria microscopica della conducibilità elettrica e termica dei metalli; teoria microscopica della conducibilità termica degli isolanti (scattering fonone-fonone)

Prova orale obbligatoria
La valutazione consiste in un esame orale. Suo obiettivo è la verifica della conoscenza e della comprensione degli argomenti del corso, ed anche della capacità di applicare criticamente questa conoscenza generale per sviluppare la descrizione di: principali quantità che descrivono cristalli specifici; modelli teorici della struttura a bande per cristalli specifici; risposta ideale degli elettroni di un cristallo a campi esterni statici; disaccoppiamento approssimato elettroni-fononi; proprietà vibrazionali (fononi); proprietà termodinamiche e ottiche di cristalli specifici; proprietà di trasporto di cristalli specifici.
Lo studente deve essere in grado di descrivere chiaramente e discutere criticamente gli argomenti, con le relative ipotesi, le criticità, il significato fisico e l'approccio matematico (non sono strettamente richieste derivazioni complete, ma ovviamente la loro conoscenza può contribuire al voto finale; tuttavia la comprensione della fisica alla base dell'approccio matematico è considerata l'aspetto fondamentale).
Viene anche valutata la conoscenza di: sistemi di unità di misura, valori delle grandezze fisiche principali della Fisica dello Stato Solido, struttura dei cristalli più importanti e loro principali proprietà.

Carlo E. Bottani, Lecture Notes, Anno edizione: 2020
Note: disponibile sul sito BEEP del corso
C.Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 8th Edition, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2004
N.W. Ashcroft and N.D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, Editore: HRW International, Anno edizione: 1981
J.M. Ziman, Principles of the theory of solids (2-nd edition), Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1995
F. Bassani, U.M. Grassano, Fisica dello Stato Solido, Editore: Bollati Boringhieri, Anno edizione: 2000
H. Ibach. H. Luth, Solid-State Physics, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2009

L'insegnamento ha lo scopo di fornire le conoscenze di base e quelle avanzate della moderna fisica dei reattori nucleari nonché le sue applicazioni ingegneristiche. E' composto da due parti. La prima contiene una sintetica introduzione all'equazione del trasporto di neutroni, le reazioni indotte da neutroni, la fissione nucleare, la teoria del rallentamento dei neutroni, la teoria della diffusione, calcolo dello spettro veloce e termico, costanti di gruppo veloci e termiche, cinetica puntiforme e la produzione dei veleni neutronici. Nella seconda parte sono illustrate sia la dinamica del reattore nucleare che la teoria delle perturbazioni. L'insegnamento presenta inoltre i diversi sistemi energetici basati sul processo di fissione nucleare e per una migliore comprensione della fisica e del funzionamento dei reattori sono proposti diversi esercizi/progetti, svolti principalmente in laboratorio informatico.

The course is offered in a 10-CFU version (Introduction to Nuclear Engineering A+B) as well as in a 5-CFU version (Introduction to Nuclear Engineering A), while part B has the pre-requisite of the contents of part A or equivalent. The present detailed program defines aims, educational outcomes and syllabus for each part of the course.
INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR ENGINEERING - A (5 ECTS)
The aim of the part A of the course is to provide a fundamental knowledge about the role played by nuclear energy in the World as well as the main features of nuclear engineering for energy applications, by addressing three key aspects: nuclear technology, nuclear fuel and fuel cycle and nuclear economics.
The goal of understanding the importance of nuclear energy will be pursued via an historical approach to its development, up to a general overview of the current status of deployment and relevance of nuclear in the energy share across the World.
The goal of knowing the main features of nuclear for energy applications will be open by a short and simplified introduction to the key physical aspects of fission chain reaction, to pave the way for a suitable understanding of the technology choices addressed in developing nuclear reactors.
The goal will be then pursued by analyzing i) the environmental impact of nuclear energy, ii) the key features of its fuel elements and the related fuel cycle, iii) the most adopted nuclear power plant technology (Pressurised Water Reactors - PWR) and iv) the fundamental drivers of nuclear costs in electricity production. The topics i) and ii) will be addressed with a FLIPPED CLASSROOM approach.
A visit to a nuclear plant facility or nuclear company is planned within Part A.
INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR ENGINEERING - B (5 ECTS)
The aim of the part B of the course is to advance and complement the fundamental knowledge about nuclear engineering for energy applications (with respect to part A), by addressing other nuclear power plant technologies, including new generation reactors and space applications ( this part could be addressed with a FLIPPED CLASSROOM + MOOC approach ), as well as the main features of nuclear safety systems and related thermalhydraulics ( this part will be addressed with a design project – Working Groups approach ).
The goal will be pursued by analyzing the main technological features of the gas cooled, graphite moderated reactors (GCRs), the boiling water reactors (BWRs), the pressurised heavy water moderated reactors (PHWRs) as well as the liquid metal fast neutron reactors (LMFRs). Also the new generation reactors will be investigated: Generation III/III+, Generation IV reactor technologies and Small Modular Reactors.
The goal of deepening the understanding of the main safety systems and the primary system of a nuclear reactor, will be pursued via project works and Working Groups approach, by analysing and modelling new generation reactors and their key components and systems (e.g. EHRS, SGs, Containment, etc.), with a specific attention to passive safety systems and two-phase flow basics.
Seminars from international experts and visit to nuclear facilities (in Italy or abroad) are usually planned in Part B.

INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR ENGINEERING - A
The student:
knows and understands the importance of nuclear energy in the international scenario;
knows and understands the main features of the most adopted nuclear technology (PWR);
is able to describe the main physical and engineering drivers behind the nuclear reactor technology choices as well as the main aspects of the process;
is able to describe the main nuclear fuel and fuel cycle features and the main drivers in nuclear economics, being able also to perform simplified calculations on nuclear electricity production costs.
INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR ENGINEERING - B
The student:
knows and understands the main features of different nuclear technologies (BWR, GCR, PHWR, LMFR);
knows and understands the main drivers in nuclear technology development and innovation, as well as the main features of the new generation reactors (Gen III, Gen IV);
is able to describe the main technological, safety and economic features of Small Modular Reactors;
is able to calculate the key thermalhydraulic parameters of a primary system and a safety system/component;
is able to describe the key principles, criteria, strategies and systems of nuclear safety.

INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR ENGINEERING - A
Basic elements of Nuclear Energy and Engineering. Historical hints of the nuclear technology and industry development: inception of the nuclear sector, military and civilian use of nuclear energy; current international status and relevance of nuclear energy in the World.
Reactor physics concepts. Key elements to understand nuclear reactor technology basics: neutron moderation, fission chain reaction and criticality, 4 factors and 6 factors formulae, reactivity, control and neutronic feedbacks, basic nuclear properties of materials for reactor fuel – moderator – coolant.
Nuclear energy and environment. Main features of nuclear energy impact on the environment and ecosystem, in terms of lifecycle CO2 emissions, land and water use, etc. ( This part will be addressed with a FLIPPED CLASSROOM approach )
Nuclear fuel cycle. Main features of fuel cycle front-end and back-end steps, from mining to waste disposal: mining, conversion, fuel enrichment methods, fuel fabrication, fuel operation, spent fuel storage, transportation and treatment, nuclear fuel/waste management and repositories; nuclear power plant decommissioning: process and costs. ( This part will be addressed with a FLIPPED CLASSROOM approach )
Nuclear engineering for energy production-I. Key elements of Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR) technology: layout, primary system (reactor pressure vessel, internals, pressurizer, pump, steam generators), control rods, fuel elements, secondary system, PWR operation.
Nuclear system economics. Specific features of electricity production costs of nuclear power plants vs. fossil-fired power stations, simplified calculation of kWh costs, critical aspects of nuclear construction time and cost.
Visit to Nuclear Power Plant or Nuclear Facility or Nuclear Company.
INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR ENGINEERING - B
Nuclear engineering for energy production-II. Other nuclear reactor technologies: layout and key elements, components, systems of

• graphite moderated, gas cooled reactors (GCRs),
• boiling water reactors (BWRs),
• pressurised heavy water reactors (PHWRs),
• liquid metal, fast neutron reactors (LMFRs),
• new generation reactors: Generation III/III+, Generation IV
  Nuclear power plant safety. Principles and goals of nuclear safety, main criteria, defense-in-depth approach, redundancy, main safety systems and components in a nuclear power plant, active safety vs. passive safety approach.
  New Generation Reactors: Small Modular Reactors (SMR). Critical analysis of SMR technology ( This part could be addressed with a FLIPPED CLASSROOM + MOOC approach ).
  Basic Thermal-hydraulics for Nuclear Power Plants. Single- and Two-phase flow balance equations, flow regimes, critical flow conditions and heat flux, applied to nuclear reactor components (fuel rods and steam generators). ( This part will be addressed with a design project – Working Groups approach )
  Excel or Matlab model:
  Steam Generator (OTSG or U-tube nat. circ.)
  passive Emergency Heat Removal System (EHRS)
  iPWR-SMR natural circulation (Core + riser + SG + downcomer)
  Micro reactor for space applications
  Seminars from international experts and visit to nuclear facilities (in Italy or abroad).

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation consists in a written examination and in an oral examination, for both part A and part B.
Written examination: 1 numerical exercise plus 1 written question for Part A; 1 numerical exercise plus 1 written question for Part B.
The written examination aims at assessing the ability of the student to solve simple numerical problems, mainly devoted to isotopic mixtures, energy balances and nuclear economics (cost evaluation), as well as at verifying the knowledge of the course topics.
The oral examination aims at evaluating and further discussing the written examination performed by the student, as well as at assessing his/her capability in describing and justifying nuclear technology solutions, from an engineering point of view.

Carlo Lombardi, NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
Note: english version: available on BEEP portal, course web site
Slides used to complement all the lectures + other edu-material (videos, exercises, etc.) https://beep.metid.polimi.it/
Note: POLIMI BeeP Portal; Language: English
Carlo Lombardi, IMPIANTI NUCLEARI, Editore: PoliPress, Anno edizione: 2009, ISBN: 9788873980551
Note: Language: Italian
Ronald Allen Knief, Nuclear Engineering: Theory and Technology of Commercial Nuclear Power, Editore: American Nuclear Society, Anno edizione: 2008
Note: Language: English; 2nd edition
De Sanctis, E., Monti, S., Ripani, M., Energy from Nuclear Fission: An Introduction, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-3-319-30651-3
Raymond L. Murray, Nuclear Energy: An Introduction to the Concepts, Systems, and Applications of Nuclear Processes, Editore: Butterworth-Heinemann, Anno edizione: 2014
Note: Language: English; 7th edition

L'insegnamento intende approfondire tematiche proprie della fisica nucleare secondo un approccio finalizzato alla descrizione dei processi dinamici di decadimento radioattivo e reazione nucleare, all'introduzione e comprensione delle quantità fisiche d'interesse, alla classificazione e rappresentazione dei radionuclidi, alla dimostrazione sperimentale di alcune proprietà e comportamenti descritti in ambito teorico. L'insegnamento prevede inoltre l'introduzione di concetti fondamentali nell'ambito della fisica delle radiazioni ionizzanti, in particolare della dosimetria delle radiazioni, mediante la definizione delle quantità fisiche più significative e lo studio del loro impiego nella caratterizzazione e valutazione della sicurezza di campi di radiazione. In generale l'insegnamento si caratterizza per l'ampio spazio dedicato ad attività sperimentale.

Obiettivo dell’insegnamento è introdurre alcuni strumenti e teorie matematiche tra i più usati nelle applicazioni fisico-ingegneristiche dell’analisi matematica, dando allo studente, che verosimilmente ha già visto impiegare certi strumenti matematici negli insegnamenti applicati, una maggiore comprensione e consapevolezza dei fondamenti e delle giustificazioni dei medesimi. Si forniranno perciò elementi della teoria classica delle funzioni derivabili di variabile complessa, della moderna teoria della misura e dell'integrazione, delle trasformate integrali, dei sistemi ortogonali in spazi di Hilbert, con qualche applicazione significativa a problemi differenziali di particolare interesse fisico.

Le lezioni e le esercitazioni consentiranno allo studente di:
conoscere e comprendere le nozioni di base su spazi vettoriali metrici, normati, di Banach, sulla convergenza di successioni in spazi normati, le idee fondamentali della teoria delle funzioni derivabili di variabile complessa (in particolare il metodo dei residui, con le sue applicazioni al calcolo di integrali nel campo complesso e reale); i concetti e risultati fondamentali della teoria dell'integrazione di Lebesgue, della teoria della trasformata di Fourier nel contesto di L 1, L 2 della teoria della trasformata di Laplace; le idee fondamentali sulla geometria negli spazi di Hilbert, sui sistemi ortonormali completi e sulle relazioni tra questi e la risoluzione per separazione di variabili di problemi ai limiti per le equazioni differenziali della fisica matematica; conoscere e comprendere alcune delle applicazioni fisiche e ingegneristiche significative dei concetti matematici introdotti nell’insegnamento;
applicare conoscenza e comprensione all'impostazione e l'esecuzione corretta di calcoli simbolici che coinvolgono gli strumenti introdotti nell’insegnamento: calcolare integrali nel campo complesso, con vari metodi, e integrali nel campo reale, coi metodi dei residui; calcolare l’armonica coniugata di un’assegnata funzione armonica; studiare e classificare le singolarità isolate di una funzione olomorfa; utilizzare il metodo della trasformata di Laplace per risolvere equazioni differenziali, integrali o integrodifferenziali; calcolare e utilizzare operativamente la trasformata di Fourier di una funzione L 1, L 2; ortonormalizzare in un opportuno spazio di Hilbert un insieme assegnato di funzioni, eseguire proiezioni e approssimazioni in spazi di Hilbert.
Il docente si attende che lo studente sappia esporre definizioni, enunciati e dimostrazioni di teoremi in modo logicamente corretto, utilizzando il linguaggio matematico, sia verbale che simbolico, in modo coerente e preciso, e sappia risolvere gli esercizi giustificando i procedimenti seguiti in base alla teoria.

Generalità sugli spazi vettoriali normati, spazi di funzioni. Spazi di funzioni continue. Completezza. Spazi di Banach. Nozioni di convergenza per successioni e serie di funzioni. Teoremi fondamentali sulla convergenza uniforme.
Topologia nel campo complesso. Funzioni complesse di variabile complessa, concetto di derivabilità e olomorfia. Condizioni di Cauchy-Riemann. Relazioni con la teoria delle funzioni armoniche. Serie di potenze nel campo complesso e loro proprietà, funzioni trascendenti elementari. Integrazione nel campo complesso, teoremi integrali di Cauchy e conseguenze. Analiticità delle funzioni olomorfe. Proprietà delle funzioni analitiche, principio di identità e conseguenze. Singolarità isolate di una funzione olomorfa, loro studio mediante serie bilatere. Residui, teorema dei residui e applicazioni al calcolo di integrali.
Elementi di teoria della misura e dell'integrazione di Lebesgue. Misura esterna di Lebesgue. Insiemi misurabili, misura di Lebesgue. Funzioni misurabili, funzioni semplici. Integrale di Lebesgue e sue proprietà. Teoremi di convergenza monotona e dominata. Spazi di funzioni integrabili. Integrazione per successioni e serie. Integrali doppi, teorema di Fubini-Tonelli. Spazi L p. Convoluzione.
Spazi di Hilbert, funzioni speciali e applicazioni. Generalità sugli spazi vettoriali con prodotto interno. Ortogonalità. Spazi di Hilbert, proiezioni, decomposizione ortogonale, sistemi ortonormali, serie di Fourier generalizzata in uno spazio di Hilbert, rispetto a un sistema ortonormale completo. Applicazioni alle serie di Fourier usuali. Funzionali lineari limitati su uno spazio di Hilbert, Teorema di Riesz. Operatori lineari limitati, operatori lineari continui. Spettro e risolvente di un'operatore lineare. Aggiunto di un'operatore: caso limitato e caso illimitato. Operatori autoaggiunti. Problemi di Sturm-Liouville regolari. Proprietà di autofunzioni e autovalori. Problemi di Sturm-Liouville singolari notevoli e polinomi ortogonali: equazione e polinomi di Legendre, Laguerre, Hermite. Applicazioni: l'oscillatore armonico quantistico.
Trasformata di Fourier e applicazioni. Teoria L 1 della trasformata di Fourier: definizione, proprietà operatoriali, trasformata e derivate, trasformata e convoluzione. Teorema di inversione per la trasformata di Fourier. Calcolo di trasformate di funzioni razionali col metodo dei residui. Teoria L 2 della trasformata di Fourier: la classe S di Schwartz delle funzioni a decrescenza rapida; proprietà della trasformata di Fourier sullo spazio S. Utilizzo delle proprietà della trasformata su S per definire la trasformata di Fourier di funzioni L 2. La trasformata di Fourier è un'isometria di L 2 su sé stesso.
Trasformata di Laplace e applicazioni. Generalità sulla trasformata di Laplace, calcolo di trasformate di funzioni elementari; relazione con la trasformata di Fourier; proprietà operatoriali della trasformata: trasformata della primitiva, delle derivate, della convoluzione; formula dell's-shift; formula del t-shift. Metodi elementari di inversione della trasformata di Laplace basati sull'uso a ritroso delle tabelle di trasformate e proprietà operatoriali. Applicazioni della trasformata di Laplace a: problema di Cauchy per equazioni differenziali lineari a coefficienti costanti, non omogenee; circuiti RC e LRC in serie.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
L’esame consiste in una prova scritta, contenente sia esercizi da svolgere, sugli argomenti del programma, sia domande teoriche: definizioni, enunciati di teoremi e loro dimostrazioni, presentazione di esempi e contresempi, sugli argomenti del programma. Sono previsti quattro appelli d'esame, nelle date stabilite dal calendario accademico (una in gennaio-febbraio, due in giugno-luglio, una a settembre). Sono anche previste due prove in itinere (una nell'interruzione di metà insegnamento e l'altra in gennaio-febbraio), la partecipazione alle quali è facoltativa. Le prove in itinere hanno la stessa struttura degli scritti degli appelli (consistono cioè sia di domande teoriche che di esercizi), ma riguardano solo la metà del programma corrispondente. L’esito positivo in entrambe queste prove determina il superamento dell’esame, con un voto in trentesimi dato dalla media aritmetica dei voti delle due prove in itinere. All'atto della seconda prova in itinere, gli studenti che non abbiano superato la prima, o che intendano rifiutare il voto conseguito in essa, o che non si siano presentati ad essa, potranno sostenere l'esame completo. In ciascuna prova, il peso degli esercizi e della teoria è, di norma, 1/3 e 2/3 rispettivamente.
Lo studente può rifiutare il voto sufficiente ricevuto nell’esame a un appello, o il voto di media ottenuto mediante le due prove in itinere, e sostenere nuovamente l’esame in un appello successivo.
In sede di esame lo studente dovrà saper rispondere a domande teoriche sul programma d'esame, mostrando la conoscenza e la comprensione delle definizioni dei concetti introdotti nell’insegnamento e delle motivazioni per cui sono stati introdotti; la conoscenza e la comprensione degli enunciati dei teoremi e delle loro dimostrazioni; la capacità di produrre esempi e contresempi che illustrino la validità o non validità delle implicazioni tra certe proprietà; la comprensione dei significati fisici di concetti e procedimenti illustrati nell’insegnamento; la capacità di riprodurre certe argomentazioni presentate nell’insegnamento con cui si risolvono equazioni della fisica matematica o se ne dimostrano certe proprietà; la padronanza nell'uso corretto e preciso del linguaggio e del simbolismo matematico.
In secondo luogo, lo studente dovrà mostrare di saper risolvere esercizi sugli argomenti del programma dell’insegnamento, in particolare:
calcolare l’armonica coniugata di un’assegnata funzione armonica;
calcolare integrali di linea nel campo complesso, utilizzando i vari risultati e metodi visti nel’insegnamento
utilizzare il metodo dei residui per calcolare integrali nel campo complesso e reale, in particolare in vista del calcolo di trasformate di Fourier;
studiare l'esistenza o meno della trasformata di Fourier di un'assegnata funzione (in base alle teorie L 1 e L 2 ), prevederne le proprietà e calcolarla;
utilizzare il metodo della trasformata di Laplace per risolvere un'equazione differenziale, integrodifferenziale, o integrale, dei tipi incontrati nell’insegnamento;
Nella risoluzione degli esercizi il docente si attende una comprensione critica, in grado di distinguere le diverse situazioni, seguire la via più semplice e naturale e compiere scelte consapevoli, giustificando i procedimenti seguiti.
Il docente si riserva la facoltà di convocare per una discussione orale studenti per i quali vi siano dubbi sullo svolgimento della prova scritta.

Marco Bramanti, Metodi di Analisi Matematica per l'Ingegneria, Editore: Esculapio, Anno edizione: 2017
Note: Il testo contiene sia la teoria che esercizi svolti.

Multiphase flow and heat transfer have a wide range of applications in nearly all aspects of engineering and science fields, particularly in energy engineering, mechanical engineering, chemical and petrochemical engineering and nuclear engineering. With the rapid development of the related technologies, research is growing very fast.
The course aims at providing an advanced knowledge of the fundamental physics of multiphase systems in order to develop tools for analysis and design of the most relevant energy technologies.

Attending the lectures will enable the student to:
Learn the fundamental quantities of a multiphase system and understand the relationships among them in order to achieve a thorough description of the system.
Learn to write the balance equations for mass, momentum and energy and understand the most common formulations useful to study the transport processes for multiphase systems.
Learn analysis and design methods for industrial apparatuses where fluiddynamic and thermal processes of multiphase systems take place, such as transportation pipelines, boilers, condensers, fluidized beds, etc.
The above mentioned learning and understanding skills will be applied to the analysis of Case Studies including:
Calculation of pressure drop and pumping power for two-phase gas-liquid, liquid-liquid, solid-gas flows.
Calculation of the heat transfer coefficient for evaporating/condensing flows.
Thermal design of a variety of evaporators and condensers for both power and HVAC plants.
Basic design of fixed and fludized beds.
Performance evaluation of phase change materials for energy storage.
To promote autonomy, during most of the exercise hours the students will be required to work independently or in team under the teacher's guidance.
The experimental laboratory aims at:
Learning to run an experimental facility in order to measure the pressure drop and the heat transfer coefficient for gas-liquid/liquid-liquid flows under a variety of experimental conditions.
Understanding the experimental results by means of suitable data processing.

Subject 1. Introduction to Multiphase Flow.
Scope. Multiphase flow notation. Flow patterns. Conservation of mass. Continuum equations for conservation of momentum. Averaging. Equations for conservation of energy.
Subject 2. Two-phase adiabatic flow.
Basic equations of two-phase flow. Homogeneous model. Separated flow model. Drift flux model. Empirical treatments.
Case studies. Pressure loss evaluation in pipe flow.
Subject 3. Vapour-Liquid Systems.
Boiling heat transfer. Nucleation and bubble dynamics. Pool boiling. Critical Heat Flux. Convective boiling: flow regimes, onset of subcooled nucleate boiling, partial subcooled boiling, fully developed subcooled boiling, saturated forced convective boiling, dryout versus departure from nucleate boiling.
Case studies. Thermo-hydraulic design of Once-Through Boilers.
Condensation. Liquid formation and droplet growth. Film condensation on planar vertical and inclined surfaces, on horizontal and vertical tubes and tube bundles. Influence of the interfacial shear. Condensation within vertical and horizontal tubes. Drop-wise condensation.
Case studies. Thermo-hydraulic design of Steam Power Plant and Process Condensers.
Subject 4. Gas-Solid (Particle) Systems.
Classification of Gas-Solid Flows. Dynamics: gas-particle and particle-particle interactions, mass and momentum transport, convective heat transfer.
Case studies. Fluidized Beds: flow regimes, velocity and pressure, heat and mass transfer. Pneumatic conveying: flow regimes, classification of bulk solids, phase diagram, dilute versus dense phase conveying, saltation velocity, pressure drop in dilute and dense phase systems.
Subject 5. Liquid-Solid Systems.
Solidification and Melting. One-dimensional Stefan problem. Phase change with convection. Phase Change Materials for energy storage.
Case Studies. Freezing time of a liquid in a tube. Freezing in pipelines cooled by surrounding ambient air.
LABORATORY ACTIVITIES. Students will be involved in the experimental activities of the Multiphase Flow Laboratory at the Department of Energy, aiming at: major understanding of theoretical modelling through experimental validation; design and setup of suitable test sections; planning and execution of experimental runs, processing of empirical data. According to the availability of the facilities, attention will be turned to either liquid-liquid-gas adiabatic flows or forced convective boiling/condensation heat transfer.
SEMINARS. Specialists coming from both research and industrial contexts will present the most recent advancements in multiphase flow physics and technologies.
5 ECTS course for Nuclear Engineering. The contents are limited to Subjects 1 to 3 (Boiling).

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation carried out at the end of the course during the dedicated exam sessions is based on the following formats:
Basic exam. Mandatory final test (20 multiple choice questions) aimed at assessing a level of knowledge and understanding ranging from sufficient to good: the minimum score to pass the final test is 18/30 (12 correct answers) and the maximum score is 25/30 (20 correct answers).
Optional oral exam. The oral exam specifically requires the knowledge of all the demonstrations of the models presented in the course and a detailed review of the literature discussed in the lectures. The oral exam is intended to assess:
(+) The degree of knowledge and understanding of the Subjects detailed in the Contents section.
(+) The ability to address the Case Studies reported in the Contents section.
The final score will result from the arithmetic average of the evaluation of the oral exam and the score of the mandatory final test. Hence, the maximum achievable score is 28/30.
Optional homework. The students that opted for the oral exam can perform an optional homework, which consists of writing a technical paper about an experimental activity or a review paper on selected subjects collected from the main scientific databases.
Paper writing verifies the student's ability in collecting and analyzing the relevant literature in order to evaluate, compare and discuss his own achievements in the frame of the updated state of the art.
The paper will be evaluated by a board of reviewers and a score will be assigned as follows: D - unacceptable: 0 additional points; C - sufficient: 1 additional point; B - good: 2 additonal points; A - excellent: 3 additional points.
In summary:
(+) The minumum score is 18/30 and can be achieved by answering correctly to 12 out of 20 questions in the Basic exam.
(+) The maximum achievable score depends on the exam format, as follows:
(o) Basic exam: 25/30 achieved by answering correctly to 20 out of 20 questions.
(o) Optional oral exam: 28/30 achieved as the rounded average between 25/30 (Basic exam evaluation) and 30/30 (maximum oral exam evaluation).
(o) Optional homework: 30/30 cum Laude achieved as the sum of 28/30 from the Optional oral exam and the homework score of A (+ 3 points), leading to 31/30.

Miscellaneous teaching material https://webeep.polimi.it/login/index.php
Clayton T. Crowe, Multiphase Flow Handbook, Editore: CRC Taylor & Francis, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 0-8493-1280-9 http://www.crcnetbase.com/isbn/9780849312809
Note: Chapters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Greg F. Naterer, Heat Transfer in Single and Multiphase Systems, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2003, ISBN: 0-8493-1032-6 http://www.crcnetbase.com/isbn/9780849310324
Note: Chapters 5, 6, 7, 8

The course provides students with the physical foundations required to understand, critically assess and select nuclear techniques for advanced materials characterization.
Emphasis is placed on understanding the physical principles governing each technique, the type of information that can be extracted, the achievable sensitivity and spatial resolution, and the strengths and limitations of each method. Particular attention is devoted to the comparison of complementary techniques and, where appropriate, to their relationship with widely used non-nuclear characterization methods, in order to highlight the specific information uniquely provided by nuclear techniques.
Complementary classes of techniques based on nuclear reactions, ion beams, neutrons, hyperfine interactions and positron annihilation are presented, highlighting the information provided by each method, their capabilities and their limitations in materials characterization.
An introductory review of the nuclear physics concepts required for the subsequent topics is included, making the course accessible to students from different educational backgrounds.
The final part of the course adopts an active learning approach based on Blended Learning, in which students critically analyse recent scientific papers illustrating advanced applications of the techniques discussed during the lectures.

The student
knows the physical principles underlying the main nuclear techniques for materials characterization and the type of information provided by each technique (DdD1);
knows the capabilities, limitations and complementarity of the different techniques, including their sensitivity, spatial or depth resolution, and typical fields of application (DdD1);
is able to select and critically compare the most appropriate technique, or combination of techniques, for a given materials characterization problem (DdD2);
is able to interpret the scientific literature employing nuclear techniques for materials characterization and discuss their applications using appropriate scientific terminology (DdD2).

Module 1 – Introduction to materials characterization and nuclear techniques
Role of materials characterization techniques in materials science
Information accessible through different characterization methods (elemental composition, depth profiling, crystal structure, local atomic environment, point defects)
Overview of nuclear techniques for materials characterization and their complementarity with other characterization methods
Module 2 – Physical foundations
Review of the physical concepts underlying the techniques presented in the course:
collisions
multipole expansion of electromagnetic fields and interaction of multipoles with electromagnetic fields
magnetic dipoles in magnetic fields
X-ray emission: continuous and characteristic X-ray spectra
interaction of X-rays and gamma rays with matter: scattering and absorption
For students without previous background in nuclear physics, the introductory lectures also provide the fundamental concepts of nuclear structure, radioactivity and nuclear reactions needed for the subsequent modules.
Module 3 — Photon-based techniques
Physical principles of X-ray emission
X-ray Fluorescence (XRF)
Particle-Induced X-ray Emission (PIXE)
Comparison between XRF and PIXE
Information provided, capabilities, limitations, detection limits and typical applications
Module 4 — Ion Beam Analysis techniques
Rutherford Backscattering Spectrometry (RBS)
Elastic Recoil Detection Analysis (ERDA)
Nuclear Reaction Analysis (NRA)
Particle-Induced Gamma-ray Emission (PIGE)
Integration of complementary Ion Beam Analysis techniques
Information provided, capabilities, limitations, depth resolution and typical applications
Module 5 – Neutron-based techniques
Neutron Activation Analysis (NAA)
Neutron diffraction
Inelastic neutron scattering
Comparison with X-ray diffraction
Information provided, capabilities, limitations and typical applications in structural and dynamical characterization of materials
Module 6 – Nuclear spectroscopies and positron-based techniques
Hyperfine interactions
Mössbauer spectroscopy
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR)
Positron Annihilation Spectroscopy (PAS): positron lifetime spectroscopy; Doppler broadening spectroscopy.
Comparison of complementary techniques
Information provided, capabilities, limitations and typical applications for the characterization of local atomic environments, vacancy-type defects and free volume
Module 7 – Applications and case studies (Blended Learning and active learning)
Critical analysis and discussion of recent scientific papers
Student presentations
Selection and critical comparison of techniques for specific materials characterization problems
Integration of complementary characterization techniques

Prova orale obbligatoria
Assessment consists of an oral examination aimed at evaluating the student's understanding of the physical principles underlying the techniques presented in the course, their capabilities and limitations, and their applicability to specific materials characterization problems.
Students are expected to discuss and compare different nuclear techniques for materials characterization, justify the choice of the most appropriate experimental approach for a given investigation, and critically interpret examples drawn from the scientific literature.
Students participating in the Blended Learning activities through the presentation of a scientific paper will have this activity taken into account in the overall assessment.

H.R. Verma, Atomic and Nuclear Analytical Methods: XRF, Mössbauer, XPS, NAA and Ion-Beam Spectroscopic Techniques, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 3-540-30277-8
Note: Covers several nuclear techniques. - Available as E-book at Politecnico library
editor-in-chief: John C. Lindon, Encyclopedia of Spectroscopy and Spectrometry, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2000, ISBN: 978-0-12-226680-5
Note: Note: Available as E-book at Politecnico library

METODI NUMERICI PER L'INGEGNERIA
Analisi numerica di modelli matematici descritti da Equazioni alle Derivate Parziali (stazionarie e
tempo dipendenti). Approssimazione a differenze finite e ad elementi finiti per la
discretizzazione spazio-temporale. Il metodo degli Elementi Finiti: costruzione, analisi, aspetti
algoritmici. Problemi di diffusione e trasporto: discretizzazioni stabilizzate con termini diffusivi
per problemi di strato limite. Problemi di propagazione e di conservazione: metodi alle differenze finite e agli elementi finiti.
Laboratorio di calcolo. Verifica in aula informatizzata delle proprieta dei metodi proposti a
lezione. Cenno a tecniche di implementazione e strutturazione di codici a elementi finiti.

The goal of the course is to enable students to understand the physics of nuclear radiations (electromagnetic radiations, elementary particles, atoms and ions) in the interaction with materials at the atomic level. The effects of such radiations as well as irradiation mechanisms are presented an discussed. The course mainly focuses on the modification of materials in terms of mechanical properties modifications, but the variation of chemical magnetic properties is also discussed, Such a knowledge is a required basis for the design of engineering components which operate under irradiation. Nuclear energy is among the energy sources with the lowest carbon footprint. The best exploitation of materials, including the awareness of the modifications they can undergo during operation, contributes to the efficiency and the safety of nuclear plants.

Lectures and exercise sessions will allow students to:
Understand the most relevant macroscopic properties of various types of materials exploited in nuclear systems, with an emphasis on the materials adopted in nuclear power plants (e.g. structural metals, coolants and materials exploited to control the fission reaction).
Know and discuss of the microscopic mechanisms related to the modification of materials at the atomic level when exposed to radiation fields.
Identify the phenomenological effects of irradiation on materials with special emphasis on structural materials.
Interpret the behavior of irradiated materials, and discuss the dependence of their evolution on parameters like temperature, radiation field, etc.

Topic 1: Reminders of science and technology of materials, solid state physics and of physical metallurgy.
The crystalline structures, and the defects in crystals: vacancies, interstitials, dislocations, grain boundaries;
Diffusion and self-diffusion in solids;
Plastic deformation and creep: characters, interpretation by micro-mechanisms (dislocation glide, dislocation climb, interaction with point defects, diffusion of point defects).
Topic 2: Irradiation.
Reminders about collision phenomena, elastic and inelastic;
Neutron irradiation: nuclear reactions, scattering; irradiation by charged particles (electrons, ions): basic concepts;
Irradiation by fast neutrons: primary knocked atom, collisional cascades; the 'displacement per atom' (dpa) concept, its evaluation;
Focusing and channeling phenomena.
Topic 3: Simulation of radiation damage by Montecarlo codes like SRIM.
Topic 4: Evolution of the microstructure of irradiated metals.
Mobility of point defects, depending on temperature; the evolution of a defect population: annihilation, aggregation (dislocation loops, voids, bubbles), interaction with sinks, irradiation enhanced diffusion;
Macroscopic effects: irradiation enhanced creep, irradiation induced creep, swelling, growth, embrittlement, enhanced segregation.
Topic 5: Basic properties of ceramic nuclear fuels.
Uranium and plutonium dioxides: properties, effects of temperature (sinterization) and of thermal gradients (restructuring). Hints to other fuels.
Topic 6: Chemical phenomena in reactors
Corrosion mechanisms in presence of water; the corrosion of zirconium in water reactors;
Corrosion of steels in lead reactors;
Water radiolysis in water reactors: the countermeasures, the treatments of 'water chemistry'.
Topic 7: Superconductors in nuclear systems.
Basic phenomena concerning superconductivity; critical temperature, critical current, critical magnetic field. Exploitation of superconductivity to build magnets;
‘Conventional’ superconductors: NbTi and Nb 3 Sn; hints to High T c superconductors

Prova orale obbligatoria
The assessment is performed by an oral examination, which tests the knowledge and understanding of the various phenomena occurring in irradiated materials, and of their relevance towards the ability of manufactured components to fulfil their duties. Both the macroscopic aspects of the material properties and the microscopic mechanisms underlying them are considered.

Donald R. Olander, Fundamental Aspects of Nuclear Reactor Fuel Elements, Editore: Technical Information Center - U.S. Department of Energy, Anno edizione: 1976
Note: Old text, still very useful. Retrievable only as.pdf file
Gary S. Was, Fundamentals of Radiation Materials Science, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 978-3-540-49471-3
Note: This is a broad treatise, containing also several detailed treatments which are not required for this course. Due to the huge number of misprints, the book can be used only together with the errata.
R.J.M. Konings, Comprehensive Nuclear Materials, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2012

The course is offered in a 10-CFU version (PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS), a two 5-CFU courses version (PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES and PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS), and a 8-CFU version (PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS B). The following detailed program defines goals, learning outcomes and topics for each 5-CFU course.
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
The objective of the course is to provide students with an understanding of the Deterministic (D) and Probabilistic (P) Safety Analysis (SA), and the system analysis methods and computational techniques needed for their assessment. These will be presented with respect to practical cases of nuclear systems.
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS
The goal of this course is to provide students with the knowledge on Artificial Intelligence (AI) and advanced simulation methods used for Computational Risk Assessment (CRA).

PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
The Expected Learning Outcomes (ELO) are as follows.
The student knows:
ELO PSA1 - the potential scenarios of nuclear accidents and the methods for their deterministic (DSA) and probabilistic analysis (PSA)
ELO PSA2 - the methodological tools at the basis of the probabilistic risk analysis
The student understands:
ELO PSA3 - strengths and weaknesses of DSA and PSA, and the potential and challenges of Computational Risk Analysis (CRA)
The student is able to:
ELO PSA4 - apply the methods and tools for the probabilistic risk analysis of nuclear and energy equipment and systems.
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS
The Expected Learning Outcomes (ELO) are as follows.
The student knows:
ELO CRA1 - the methods for uncertainty and sensitivity analysis of nuclear accidents models and codes used for Computational Risk Analysis (CRA)
ELO CRA2 - how to implement AI algorithms for CRA
The student is able to:
ELO CRA3 - apply AI algorithms for CRA
The student can communicate:
ELO CRA4 - the results of the application of AI algorithms for CRA of nuclear and energy equipment and systems

PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
Part 1A Deterministic Safety Analysis (DSA)
DSA safety concepts (defense-in-depth, multiple barriers, Design Basis Accidents (DBAs) and Beyond DBAs (BDBAs)) and the technological implications on the nuclear power plants design
Strengths and weaknesses of DSA
Part 2A Probabilistic Safety Analysis (PSA)
Level 1,2,3 PSA: methods and tools for modeling of nuclear accidents
Identification and quantification of accident sequences (Failure Mode and Criticality Analysis, Hazard Operability Analysis, Fault and Event Tree Analyses, Bow-tie, and Bayesian Belief Networks); Importance Measures; Dependent Failures; Risk curves and matrices; Risk analysis as a tool in support of regulatory licensing and operating requirements
Strengths and weaknesses of PSA
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS
Part 1B Computational Risk Analysis (CRA)
Dynamic accidental scenarios generation:
Multi-Valued Logic (MVL) for modeling the accidental scenarios
Continuous Event Tree (CET) and Continuous Cell-to-Cell Mapping Technique (CCCMT)
Dynamic Event Tree (DET) and Monte Carlo Dynamic Event Tree (MCDET)
Dynamic accidental scenarios simulation:
Uncertainty and sensitivity analysis of Thermal-Hydraulics codes (Code Scaling, Applicability, and Uncertainty (CSAU), Automated Statistical Treatment of Uncertainty Method (ASTRUM)), global variance-based and distribution-based measures (flipped))
Risk-informed safety margin quantification (Order Statistics (OS))
Artificial Intelligence methods (Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs)) for accidental scenarios simulation
Dynamic accidental scenarios post-processing:
Artificial Intelligence methods (clustering algorithms) for system failure domain identification
Artificial Intelligence methods (evolutionary algorithms and clustering algorithms) for prime implicants and near misses scenarios identification

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The evaluation consists of a final written exam (covering Part 1A and 2A) and an oral exam (covering Part 1A, 2A and 1B), and of hands-on exercises continuosly evaluated during the course.
The oral exam (50% of the final grade) is aimed at verifying the student:
ability to expose and discuss the mathematical formalism of the AI and advanced simulation methods presented during the course (ELO CRA1-2)
understanding of the need (and opportunity) tackled (and offered) by AI and advanced simulation method for the safety and maintenance of industrial plants and energy systems (ELO CRA3)
ability to communicate knowledge clearly and unambiguously (ELO CRA4)

Enrico Zio, Computational methods for reliability and risk analysis, Editore: World Scientific, Anno edizione: 2009
Enrico Zio, Piero Baraldi, Francesco Cadini, Basics of Reliability and Risk Analysis: Worked Out Problems and Solutions, Editore: World Scientific
Enrico Zio, An Introduction to the Basics of Reliability and Risk Analysis, Editore: World Scientific
IAEA-TECDOC-1200, Applications of probabilistic safety assessment (PSA) for nuclear power plants, Anno edizione: 2001
NUREG/CR-6901, Current State of Reliability Modeling Methodologies for Digital Systems and Their Acceptance Criteria for Nuclear Power Plant Assessments, Anno edizione: 2006
Francesco Di Maio, Enrico Zio, Curtis Smith, Valentin Rychkov, Integrated Deterministic and Probabilistic Safety Analysis for Safety Assessment of Nuclear Power Plants, Editore: Science and Technology of Nuclear Installations (special issue), Anno edizione: 2015
Enrico Zio, Integrated deterministic and probabilistic safety assessment: Concepts, challenges, research directions, Editore: Nuclear Engineering and Design, Anno edizione: 2014, Fascicolo: 280
Mohammad Modarres, Inn Seock Kim, Deterministic and Probabilistic Safety Analysis - Handbook of Nuclear Engineering, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2010

The teaching aims at giving the student a complete knowledge of the common techniques of detection of nuclear radiation, with focus on nuclear installations, scientific research, radiation protection, environmental monitoring of natural and artificial radionuclides, technological and medical applications and in general for nuclear engineering.
These topics are taught with the degree of detail required for a professional use. Several lab sessions let the student experience the practical application of the most important concepts taught in class. Part of the labs are delivered in the flipped classroom modality for a better involvement of the students in data analysis and results presentation.
The teaching ends with lectures or seminars on nuclear measurements held by external lecturers chosen from the non-academic world (research institutes, medical centers, industry, environmental agencies, or radiation protection practitioners) to let the students get a proper point of view about the applications of the techniques learnt during the course. The choice of the lecturers can be tuned according to the interest that the students show during the course.

Expected learning is described according to the Dublin Descriptors (DD): “DD1 Knowing, DD2 applying, DD3 evaluating, DD4 communicating, DD5 learning to learn”
This teaching will allow the students to:
a) DD1 be aware of the statistic underlaying the nuclear measurements and can correctly manage nuclear counts.
b) DD1 know the commonly expected sources of ionising radiation and the interaction of radiation in matter with a special attention to material used in radiation detection.
c) DD1 have a full overview of the different kind of detectors and be aware of pros and cons of different techniques.
d) DD2 get confident with the instrumentation and practically apply concepts learnt in lecture sessions
e) DD3 select the correct instrument with respect to the specific measurement situation.
f) DD2 elaborate experimental data.
g) DD4 get good communication skill, good property of language and scientific terminology.

1) Statistical analysis and data handling. Bernoulli, Poisson and Gauss distributions. Meaning of the interval of confidence. Chi^2 rest and its application to nuclear measurements. t.Student test. Time distribution of Poisson events. Type A and B evaluation of experimental uncertainties. Central limit theorem. Model of measurement and uncertainty propagation. Characteristic limits, probability of false positive and false negative. Currie equation.
2) Radiation interaction with matter. Interaction of hadrons, derivation of the Bethe equation, stopping power and LET. Interaction of electrons and positron with matter, electronic interaction and bremsstrahlung, Cerenkov effect, annihilation of positron. Interaction of electromagnetic radiation, photoelectric effect, Compton scattering, pair production and photoneutron generation. The topic is taught with special attention to the difference between energy deposition in the active volume of nuclear detectors and energy of the ionizing particle.
3) Radiation sources. Alpha beta and gamma sources, x ray sources, cosmic radiation and neutron sources.
4) General principle of radiation detection: operating modes of a nuclear detector, pulse mode, current mode and Campbelling mode. Energy resolution, FWHM, statistical resolution and Fano factor, detector efficiency. Dead time losses in paralyzable and non paralyzable detectors. General scheme of a counting chain.
5) Gas detectors. Charge mobility and I-V characteristic of an ion chamber operating in current mode under steady irradiation. Factors affecting the charge collection, columnar and volume recombination. Guard rings. Current ion chamber as devices measuring the exposure under electronic equilibrium conditions. Compensation for environmental conditions. Operational quantities and procedures of calibration I terms of these quantities. Ion chamber operated in pulse mode, generation of the signal and need of the Frisch grid. Energy resolution. Proportional counters, Townsends avalanche and statistic of the multiplication. Formation of the signal in proportional counters and ballistic deficit. Diethorn equation. Design and application. proportional counters with a special design, GEM, micromegas and multi-wires proportional counters. Geiger Muller counters, GM discharge and counting plateau. Filling gas, internal and external quenching.
6) Scintillation detectors: Organic scintillators, physical scintillation mechanism, binary and tertiary scintillators. Liquid and plastic scintillator. Scintillation efficiency, light output and Birks equation. Time response. Inorganic scintillators. Scintillators mounting and light collection. Gas and glass scintillation. Photomultipliers and Silicon photomultipliers (SIPM) description and comparison of the two techniques. Hybrid photon detectors. Photon spectrometry with inorganic scintillators.
7) Handling of logic and digital signal: Description of different nuclear modules. Charge preamplifier and long tail pulses, shaping and amplification of the signal. Series and parallel noise sources. Single channel and multichannel analyser. Time pick-off and time to amplitude converters, time spectrometry. Resolution of the time spectrometry, time jitter and time amplitude walk. Bipolar shaping for time spectrometry
8) Semiconductor detectors: bandgap and intrinsic carrier density. Charge diffusion and mobility. Semiconductor doping a nd junction. Electric characteristic of the depletion zone. Reverse polarization and fully depleted detectors. Surface barrier detectors. Reverse current as sum of leakage, thermally stimulated and minority carriers current. Pulse rise time. Application of silicon detectors: charged particle spectrometry, telescope detector, personal dosimeter. Direct Ion Storage detectors. HPGE detectors, planar and coaxial geometry. Energy resolution, statistic, noise and incomplete charge collection. Effect of trapping and de-trapping. Comparison HPGE and Inorganic (NaI(Tl)). Techniques for Compton reduction. Energy and efficiency calibration. Lithium drifted silicon detectors for soft x ray spectrometry. Semiconductors other than Si and Ge. Silicon drift detectors. Timepix technology coupled with semiconductor detectors.
9) Neutron Detections. Neutron sources. Interactions of neutrons in matter, cross section. Elastic and inelastic scattering and adsorption cross section. Energy distribution of recoil nucleus in elastic scattering. Most important nuclear reaction used for neutron detection. B-10 Li-6 and He-3 based detectors for thermal neutrons. Detectors based on neutron activation. Fission chamber. Detection of fast neutrons based on thermalization. Bonner sphere spectrometer and rem counter. Extended range BSS and rem counter. Unfolding. Detection of fast neutrons with organic scintillators. Capture gated detectors, Response of a He-3 proportional counter to fast neutrons. TOF
10) Nuclear reactor instrumentation. General characteristics of the instrumentation for the control of a nuclear reactor. BF3 proportional counters, compensated ion chamber, fission chambers operated in Campbelling mode, self powered detectors. Organization of the instrumentation for PWR and BWR.
' in -core ' and ' out-of -core ' detectors. Examples of organization of the detection system in a power plant.
11) Passive detectors: personal dosimeters (TLD, RPL, OSL and film badge) for gamma and neutron personal dosimetry exploiting albedo neutrons. Superheated drop detectors for neutron dosimetry and spectrometry. Track detectors for radon and fast neutron detection.
Other specific topics:
1) Radon measurements: During the first lesson of the course, some passive radon detectors based on PADC sensors are distributed to the students. The teachers spend about 1 h for a brief introduction to the radon issue and for a quick explanation of the measuring technique. The detectors will be collected at the end of the course.
2) External lecturers: At the end of the course at least three external lecturers are invited. The aim is to let the students have a feeling about the world of nuclear measurements. Thus the lecturers are chosen among nuclear measurements practitioners form: Research institutions, medical centers, environmental agencies of private companies.
3) Laboratories sessions: The course includes six lab sessions, 3 hours each, focusing on the following topics:
Lab1: Plateau of a GM counter, measurement of the dead time, measurement of the decay constants of a mixture of two radionuclides. Teaching modules involved: 1), 5). Allocated time 3h
Lab2: Measurement of the attenuation of beta particles in matter. Backscattering of beta particles. Self absorption of beta particles. Teaching modules involved: 1), 2),3), 5). Allocated time 3h
Lab3: Ion chamber operated in pulse mode, current mode and Campbelling mode. Teaching modules involved: 1), 2,) 3), 4), 5), 10). Allocated time 3h
Lab4: Organic and inorganic scintillators, photon spectrometry, radionuclide identification. Teaching modules involved: 2,) 3), 4), 6), 7). Allocated time 3h
Lab5: He-3 and BF3 proportional counters, activation detectors. Teaching modules involved: 2,) 3), 5), 7), 9), 10). Allocated time 3h
Lab6 Visit to the laboratory of radiation metrology, analysis of radon detectors distributed at the beginning of the course, use of a hpge. Teaching modules involved: 1,) 3), 5), 8), 11). Allocated time 3h
4 ) Homework, mainly related to topic 1), will be assigned during the course. Estimated student time to solve the homework 3h. The homework solution will be discussed in flipped classroom. Allocated time: 3h in flipped mode
5) Flipped classroom: Data analysis on labs 1,2,3,4,5 and homework results are delivered in Blended Learning & Flipped Classroom as follows:
1) The text of the labs/homework is given to the students in advance, but after most of the teaching modules involved have been explained in class. Expected time for the student to be prepared for the lab 2h/lab total 10h. Expected time for the student to solve the homwork.3h
2) Students attend the lab (groups of 4 – 5 people each) and take the experimental data under the supervision of the teacher and his coworkers. Allocated time 3h/lab total15h
3) Students process the experimental data at home, preparing a presentation of the results. Expected time for the student to process data: 3h/lab total 15h
4) flipped classroom are devoted to a critical discussion of data analysis/homework solution. During these lectures each group will present their own results and the teacher will manage to engage every single student in the discussion. This approach is supposed to trigger a peer learning process. Allocated time: 3h/flipped classroom, total 15h.
Total time for laboratories and flipped classroom 36h + estimated 30h for individual work at home.
DIGITAL TWIN The experimental lab can host a maximum of 20 people (without Covid restriction) divided in 5 experimental positions. Each of the six laboratories session is repeated 8 times per week. In this way there is the possibility provide the experimental experience up to 160 students. In case of more students registered, a presence rotation will be organized. The experimental laboratories will be broadcasted on the platform supplied by the Politecnico to provide the students in remote a virtual lab experience as close as possible to the physical one.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The student is asked to sit an oral exam. The exam will be divided in three parts
Part 1. Question is chosen by the student about a measuring technique. This question is used to verify the points a), b) and e) of the expected learning.
Part 2. The student is asked to present one/two of the experiments carried out during the lab, using the presentations prepared during the course. This part of the exam is used to double check the points a) and part of the topic d) of the expected learning and the applying knowledge and understanding.
Part 3. The examiner presents a measurement problem and the student is asked to describe a possible solution. This part of the exam is used to check the point c), to fully check the point d) and to double check the point b) of the expected learning and to check the knowledge and understanding of the topics dealt by the external lecturers.

Glenn F. Knoll, Radiaqtion detection and Measurements, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-0-470-13148-0
Note: Il testo copre quasi interamente gli argomenti trattati

Argomenti propedeutici di chimica e radiochimica per applicazioni tecnologiche. Proprietà nucleari e intorno chimico. Radionuclidi. Impieghi di radiotraccianti. Metodi radiochimici di analisi. Sorgenti per l'irraggiamento. Radiolisi. Dosimetria chimica. Irraggiamento industriale. Argomenti propedeutici di chimica e radiochimica per l'ingegneria nucleare. Ciclo e ritrattamento del combustibile. Partitioning-Transmutation-Confinement. Processi idrometallurgici. Processi alternativi. Analisi, trattamento e confinamento di Waste Nucleare.

L'obiettivo del corso e' trasferire agli studenti i principi base della radioprotezione. Pertanto e' necessario descrivere le grandezze fisiche utilizzate e le relative unita' di misura. Poiche' tutti gli effetti della radiazione sull'uomo sono riconducibili alle interazioni tra radiazione e materia, verranno descritti i principali meccanismi d'interazione e la loro importanza relativa, in funzione del materiale, del tipo di radiazione e della sua energia. Quindi saranno illustrati gli strumenti e i dosimetri piu' impiegati in radioprotezione e i principi fisici alla base del loro funzionamento. Di seguito saranno poi descritte le tecniche impiegate per ridurre le esposizioni dei lavoratori e infine verra' fatto cenno alla vigente normativa nazionale.

Salvaguardie Nucleari per la non-proliferazione e tecniche di misura non distruttive (ispezioni IAEA ed Euratom). Problemi di presenza di materiale radioattivo in cicli produttivi dell'industria convenzionale. Sistemi di controllo, conseguenze incidentali, valutazione dei rischi. Presenza di NORM nelle materie prime e di radon in aria in ambienti lavorativi. Tecniche di smantellamento degli impianti nucleari e problematiche associate. Protezione dalle radiazioni non ionizzanti.

Industrial engineering requires a systematic approach to design and management of complex systems. With a particular focus on energy and nuclear sectors, the course illustrates analytical methods, computational techniques, and artificial intelligence algorithms serving a dual purpose for complex industrial systems: evaluating their Reliability, Availability, and Maintainability (RAM), and supporting the achievement of these performance targets during system design, operation and maintenance (corrective, scheduled, condition-based, predictive, and prescriptive) by fault detection, diagnosis, and prognosis.
To this purpose, Probabilistic methods, Markov Processes, Monte Carlo Simulation, Principal Component Analysis, Auto-Associative Kernel Regression, Neural Networks, Deep Learning, Convolutional Neural Networks, Reinforcement Learning, Particle Filtering are illustrated.
The course is offered in:
a 10-CFU version for nuclear engineering students named “RELIABILITY, AVAILABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY (RAM): ANALYTICAL METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS”. The expected learning outcome and the topics of this version of the course are the union of those of Parts I, II and III in the following sections.
in a 8-CFU version for energy engineering students named “RELIABILITY, SAFETY AND RISK ANALYSIS C”. The expected learning outcome and the topics of this version of the course are the union of those of Parts I and II in the following sections.
in a 5-CFU version named “ Reliability, Availability and Maintainability (RAM): analytical methods and computational techniques ”. The expected learning outcome and the topics of this version of the course are the union of those of parts I and III
in a 5-CFU version named “ Reliability, Availability and Maintainability (RAM): artificial intelligence algorithms ”. The expected learning outcome and the topics of this version of the course are the union of those of parts II and III

PART I (ALL STUDENTS)
The student knows:
ELO I1 - the basics of probability theory, system analysis and simulation methods for reliability and availability evaluation;
ELO I2 - the basics of maintainability engineering.
The student is able to:
ELO I3 - estimate reliability, availability and maintainability of industrial equipment and systems;
PART II (ALL STUDENTS)
The student knows:
ELO II1: AI methods for condition-based and predictive maintenance
ELO II2 - AI methods for fault detection, diagnostics and prognostics, condition-based and predictive maintenance
The student is able to:
ELO II3 - strategically plan maintenance in industrial plants and energy systems
ELO II4 - implement AI methods for fault detection, diagnostics and prognostics
The student can communicate:
ELO II5 - the results of the application of AI methods to fault detection, diagnostics and prognostics, condition-based and predictive maintenance
PART III (NUCLEAR ENGINEERING STUDENTS)
The student knows:
ELO III1 – the specific challenges related to maintenance planning in complex systems such as nuclear installations.
The student is able to:
ELO III2 - develop stochastic simulation methods for estimating system reliability, availability and maintainability;

PART I (4 CREDITS)
Basics of probability theory for applications to reliability analysis and risk assessment (ELO I1);
Estimation of reliability parameters from field data (ELO I3);
Reliability of simple systems: series, parallel, redundancies, standby (ELO I3);
Reliability and availability of complex systems subject to realistic procedures of inspection, maintenance, repair, renewal (ELO I3);
PART 2 (4 CREDITS)
Maintenance approaches: Unscheduled (corrective) vs scheduled (Planned, On Condition, Predictive and Prescriptive (ELOII1);
Maintenance Strategic planning: Reliability centered maintenance and risk-based maintenance (ELOII3);
Fault detection: Principal Component Analysis and Autoencoders (ELOII2 and ELOII4);
Fault Diagnostics: K Nearest Neighbor, Deep Neural Networks, Convolutional Neural Networks (ELOII2 and ELOII4);
Fault Prognostics: Proportional Hazard Models (PHM)), Long-Short Time Memory (LSTM) networks, advanced simulation methods (particle filtering) - (ELOII2-ELOII4 ).
PART FOR THE NUCLEAR ENGINEERING STUDENTS (2 credits)
Monte Carlo simulation methods for reliability and availability analysis: stochastic simulation framework; random sampling; estimation of reliability and availability of complex systems (ELO III1);
Prescriptive Maintenance: Reinforcement Learning (ELO III2).
Case studies taken from the oil & gas, power production and nuclear industries will be illustrated and quantitative exercise classes will be carried out in support to the comprehension of the material covered in class.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists in: a) the development of a project, b) a scientific talk to be given in front of the class, c) a written exam and d) an oral exam if required by the student.
a) The project consists in the development of a stochastic simulation code for the estimation of the reliability and availability of complex systems or for condition-based maintenance of nuclear and energy equipment and systems (ELOs III1 and II5). This part of the exam will contribute to 20% of the final grade.
b) the scientific talk will be on an advanced topic on risk and reliability assessment, which will be assigned by the instructor. It will evaluate the student ability of communicate knowledge clearly and unambiguously (ELOII5). This part of the exam will contribute to 20% of the final grade.
Parts a) and b) will be developed by the students in multidisciplinary team formed by a nuclear and an energy engineering student.
c) The written exam will contribute to 60% of the final grade and will evaluate the student abilities in:

• applying the techniques for quantifying the RAM of nuclear and energy equipment and systems (ELO I3)
• understanding the probabilistic framework for RAM assessment, the basics of probability theory and stochastic methods for RAM (ELOs I1, I2, II1, II3 and III1)
• discussing the mathematical formalism of the AI methods presented during the course (ELOs II1 and II2)
• understanding of the opportunities offered by AI for RAM and PHM of industrial plants and energy systems (ELO CRA3)
  Students attending the 5 CFU versions of the course will be verified on the corresponding ELOs.

Enrico Zio, An Introduction to the Basics of Reliability and Risk Analysis,, Editore: Editore: World Scientific
Enrico Zio, Computational methods for reliability and risk analysis, Editore: World Scientific
Enrico Zio, Piero Baraldi, Francesco Cadini, Basics of Reliability and Risk Analysis: Worked Out Problems and Solutions,, Editore: World Scientific
Note: Exercises, useful for preparing the written parts of the exam
Enrico Zio, The Monte Carlo Simulation Method for System Reliability and Risk Analysis,, Editore: springer
Note: For the specific part on Monte Carlo methods, in part I of the course

The course is offered in a 10-ECTS version (Solid State Physics), to which two 5-ECTS courses (Solid State Physics A and Solid State Physics B) are associated and offered jointly. The present detailed program defines aims, educational outcomes and syllabus for every joint course.
Solid State Physics (10 ECTS)
The course goals are the union of those of part A and part B as follows:
Solid State Physics A (5 ECTS)
The course aims at giving students the fundamentals of solid state physics at a graduate level. Long range order solids (crystals), their structural properties (symmetry) and static electronic structure are of main concern. After an introduction to crystallography, the main experimental tools used to determine the geometric structure of crystals are discussed together with the related theory. Then quantum mechanics is used to find the electronic band structure both introducing the general properties of electronic states in a periodic potential and presenting the main approximate methods to calculate the energy levels. Finally, the effect of an external static field on electrons is studied by means of crucial concepts like: density of states, equivalent Hamiltonian, effective mass, semiclassical dynamics and electron-hole representation. All arguments are illustrated by examples.
Solid State Physics B (5 ECTS)
The course aims at giving students the basic principles for the approximate solution of the many body Schrodinger equation for a crystal at a finite temperature including lattice vibrations: Born-Oppenheimer and mean-field approximations. Classical lattice dynamics is then introduced (interatomic force constants and dynamic matrix, lattice waves with their frequencies and polarization) and eventually quantized presenting the new concepts of acoustic and optic phonons. On this basis, thermodynamic properties like specific heat and thermal dilation are made microscopically understandable. Always using quantum mechanics, the macroscopic optical properties of crystals are derived from a microscopic treatment of electronic transitions. At the end transport properties (electrical and thermal conductivities and their temperature dependence) are introduced and explained in terms of physical kinetics. All arguments are illustrated by examples.

Solid State Physics (10 ECTS)
The expected learning outcomes are both those of part A and of part B, as detailed in the following.
Solid State Physics A (5 ECTS)
After the exam, the student:

• knows the mathematics and the physical principles required to understand what is a solid body and in particular a crystal, together with the geometric structure of the most important crystals (DdD1)
• knows the main quantities defining the crystalline state, together with the theoretical models and experimental methods suitable to describe it and to ascertain its structure, with particular reference to perfect “frozen” periodic lattices with a basis of atoms (DdD1)
• is able to forecast the main static electronic properties (band structure) of specific crystals knowing the fundamentals of the quantum mechanics of one electron in a periodic potential and the main approximate methods to compute the band structure itself, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way (DdD2 - DdD4)
• is able to exploit the above theoretical models to develop the description of the accelerated motion of an electron in a specific crystal subjected also to a static external field using the electron-hole representation (DdD2).
  Solid State Physics B (5 ECTS)
  After the exam, the student:
• knows the theoretical models required to approximately solve the many body Schroedinger equation for a crystal including nuclear vibrations (DdD1)
• knows the fundamentals of both classical and quantum lattice dynamics (lattice waves and phonons) (DdD1)
• is able to apply quantum mechanics to understand and forecast the macroscopic thermodynamic and optical properties of specific crystals, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way (DdD2)
• is able to apply quantum mechanics and physical kinetics to understand and forecast the macroscopic transport properties (electrical and thermal conductivities) of specific crystals, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way (DdD2 - DdD4).
  In addition, the student knows the values or the order of magnitude of the main physical quantities and properties of solid state materials discussed in the course, also with reference to examples of specific crystals.

Solid State Physics (10 ECTS)
The topics of this course are both those of part A and part B as listed in the following.
Solid State Physics A (5 ECTS)

• Introduction: phenomenological properties and definition of solid materials
• Solid bodies: order and symmetry; simple crystals: lattices and translational order; reciprocal lattice; complex crystals: lattice and basis; crystal binding; tensorial observables
• Scattering theory: quantum particle scattering amplitude: Born approximation; elastic scattering; Bragg law; X-Ray Diffraction
  Schrodinger equation of a crystal: Born-Oppenheimer and mean field approximations
• Electronic states: Bloch theorem, reduction to the first Brillouin zone and periodic boundary conditions; free electron model (Fermi energy and density of states); band structure: nearly free electron approximation; band structure: tight binding and LCAO approximations; general method for the computation of the density of states
• Electron dynamics in external fields: equivalent Hamiltonian; effective mass theorem; impurity levels; semiclassical dynamics in an ideal crystal; electrical current and Bloch oscillations, electrons and holes, excitons.
  Solid State Physics B (5 ECTS)
• Adiabatic theorem and vibrational motions
• Lattice dynamics: lattice specific heat: Einstein model; simple 1D crystal: lattice waves and acoustic phonons, linear chain with two atoms per cell: acoustic modes and optical modes; general 3D lattice dynamics: interatomic force constant tensor and dynamic matrix; phonons in a 3D complex crystal; Debye model of specific heat; thermal dilation and anharmonic processes;polaritons
• Optical properties: macroscopic description of dispersion and absorption of photons; Kramers-Kronig relations for the frequency dependent dielectric susceptibility; Drude-Lorentz model; optical properties of metals; quantum treatment of photon absorption; optical properties of direct band gap semiconductors; the case of indirect band gap; optical properties of polaritons
• Transport phenomena: local Ohm law and Fourier law; experimental temperature dependence of electrical and thermal conductivities; physical kinetics and Boltzmann equation; microscopic theories of electrical conductivity and of thermal conductivity of metals; microscopic theory of thermal conductivity of insulators (phonon-phonon scattering).
  Some reminders to required preliminary knowledge and theoretical tools, necessary to address the teaching topics and related to quantum mechanics, analytical mechanics and electromagnetism, will be provided through recorded video lectures; these topics will then be resumed and discussed in the classroom in specific sessions devoted to verifying the students' understanding.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation consists in an oral examination. It aims at verifying both the knowledge and the understanding of the course topics (typically one topic from part A and one from part B) and also the ability to apply critically this general knowledge to develop the description of: (Solid State Physics A) main quantities defining specific crystals, electronic band structure models for specific crystals, response of crystal electrons to external static fields; (Solid State Physics B) vibrational properties, thermodynamic and optical properties of specific crystals, transport properties of specific crystals. The student must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the topics, with the related hypotheses, the physical meaning, the mathematical approach (complete derivations are not strictly required, but of course their knowledge may contribute to the final mark). The knowledge of the systems of units, the value of the fundamentals physical quantities in Solid State Physics, the structure of the most important crystals and their main properties are addressed as well for both part A and B.

C.Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 8th Edition, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2004
N.W. Ashcroft, N.D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, Editore: HRW International, Anno edizione: 1981
H. Ibach, H. Luth, Solid-State Physics, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2009
F. Bassani, U.M. Grassano, Fisica dello Stato Solido, Editore: Bollati Boringhieri, Anno edizione: 2000
J.M. Ziman, Principles of the theory of solids (2-nd edition), Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1995
E. Kaxiras, J.D. Joannopoulos, Quantum Theory of Materials, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2019
Carlo E. Bottani, Lecture Notes, Anno edizione: 2020
Note: available on the BeeP website of the course

The course presents advanced methods for the analysis of dynamical systems and for the synthesis of multi-input, multi-output controllers.
In the first part, the concepts and tools include Lyapunov stability theory for nonlinear systems, small gain theorem for nonlinear systems, structural properties of linear dynamical systems (poles, invariant zeros, principal gains), performance and robustness indices and basic robust control concepts, state feedback via pole placement, output feedback via state observers.
In the second part, particular emphasis is given to Model Predictive Control (MPC) techniques to deal with systems operating under state/input constraints and possibly with nonlinearities and integer decision variables, focusing on formulations that are well adopted in real-world industrial solutions.

Knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 1, DD1)
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
apply Lyapunov stability theory to the analysis of nonlinear systems
evaluate the structural properties of linear dynamical systems, as well as the performance and robustness of linear control systems
understand how the regulator structure affects both static and dynamic performance
design multivariable control systems using pole placement, LQ, LQG
design dynamic, possibly reduced-order, observers via pole placement and Kalman filtering
formulate model predictive control problems in state-space form and using input–output models
Applying knowledge and understanding (DD2)
Through the exercise and lab sessions, students will learn to:
perform stability analysis of dynamical systems and design nonlinear controllers using Lyapunov stability theory
analyze multivariable linear systems in terms of reachability, observability, gain, singular values, poles, and zeros, and understand the proper formulation of control design objectives
select an appropriate regulator structure to achieve the desired control objectives
apply advanced control design methods (pole placement, LQ, LQG, and model predictive control) to multivariable systems and tune the associated parameters
design dynamic observers based on pole placement and Kalman filtering for disturbance estimation and output-feedback control
use software tools to simulate and analyze dynamical systems, design controllers using the methods covered in the course, evaluate closed-loop performance, and assess the sensitivity of the results to design choices and tuning parameters
Making judgements (DD3)
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
carry out a preliminary system analysis, identifying the control and controlled variables and selecting an appropriate control structure
assess the limits of achievable performance and define suitable control specifications
choose the most appropriate control design methodology
critically evaluate the obtained results and their sensitivity to the adopted design choices
Communication skills (DD4)
Through software labs and optional project work, students will learn to communicate clearly, concisely, and effectively the control synthesis problem addressed, the chosen solution method, and the results obtained.
Learning skills (DD5)
Through lab exercises and optional project work, students will learn to tackle real-world problems – both independently and as part of a team – using the advanced control methods covered in the course.

Nonlinear systems: equilibria, stability, Lyapunov theorems. Synthesis of the control law with control Lyapunov functions and the backstepping procedure. Norms and gain of dynamical systems. Small gain theorem.
Multivariable feedback control systems: Structural properties: reachability, observability, poles, and invariant zeros. Nominal and robust stability of multivariable feedback systems. Static and dynamic performance. Schemes with integral action. Pole placement control of single-input/single-output and multivariable systems.
State and disturbance observers: State observers and dynamic output feedback. Disturbance estimation with state observers.
Model Predictive Control (MPC) for linear systems: Unconstrained optimal control, linear quadratic control, optimal filtering and LQG control. Constrained optimal control via MPC; moving horizon estimation.
Industrial formulations of MPC: soft constraints, impulse and step response models, move blocking and input parametrization.
Advanced MPC schemes: MPC for systems with nonlinear dynamics and with integer decision variables.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The final assessment will be a written exam consisting of numerical exercises and theoretical questions.
During the exam the student must prove to be able to design a controller for multivariable systems, and in particular to:
perform a preliminary analysis, specifying the control and controlled variables and the adopted control structure (DD1, DD2)
evaluate the limits to the achievable performance, define the control specifications (DD3)
apply modern control design techniques (DD2)
critically evaluate the achieved results and their sensitivity to the adopted design choices (DD5)
describe the achieved results in a clear and convincing way (DD4)
At the instructor's discretion, students may be required to take an oral examination to confirm their knowledge, if deemed necessary

L. Magni, R. Scattolini, Advanced and Multivariable Control, Editore: Pitagora Editrice, Anno edizione: 2014
H. K. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, Editore: Prentice Hall, Anno edizione: 1996
J.M. Maciejowski, Multivariable Feedback Design, Editore: Addison-Wesley, Anno edizione: 1989
S. Skogestad, I. Postlethwaite, Multivariable Feedback Control, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 1996
T. Glad, L. Ljung, Control Theory, Editore: Taylor & Francis, Anno edizione: 2000

The course aims to provide the students with the necessary tools for the design and assessment of machine element, both under static and fatigue loading. The basics of mechanical design are upgraded in order to include advanced theory of elasticity, design methods for static and fatigue loads (multiaxial and variable amplitude loading) and tools for assessing the influence of defects on static and fatigue strength. Theory of elasticity is extended to make it possible to assess the stress state in typical mechanical components like pressure vessels, welded joints, and shafts.
By means of finite element simulations, the students will acquire the skills for mechanical by means of a "design by analysis" approach.

By the end of the course, students will learn contents and practices according to what defined in the learning objectives.
In terms of acquired knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:
examine and perform the design and assessment of machine components subjected to static and fatigue loading by a "design by analysis approach".
Concerning the ability to apply the acquired knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:
solve practical design applications by using different tools (analytical, numerical and experimental) and critically assess the results.
Through activities of laboratory tests and of Finite Element Method applications, students will also acquire the skills to formulate an assessment, meaning to analyse a problem with different tools to understand their assumptions and limitations, and to analyse and critically discuss the results.
Furthermore, through the assigned case studies, students will gain the ability to autonomously design and assess mechanical components subjected to static and fatigue loadings.
Finally, students will improve their communication skills, being able to write final technical reports.

The course contents are delivered through lectures, exercise courses, lab activities.
The course covers the following topics divided in modules as per the description below:
Module 1:
Structural analysis:
Statically undetermined systems: Force Method.
Euler's column and instability of compressed components;
Finite element modelling: basic formulation, definition of stiffness matrix, main shape functions, selection of element types, load and boundary conditions, evaluation of results;
Axisymmetric problems: disks, thin and thick cylinders loaded by internal and external pressure and centrifugal loads, elastic and elasto-plastic materials;
Structural behaviour of materials and components loaded beyond the elastic limit.
Module 2:
Strength of materials and assessment criteria:
Cyclic response of materials: high cycle fatigue, endurance limit, fatigue strength, multiaxial fatigue, variable amplitude loading, cumulative fatigue damage.
Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics: energy approach (Griffith), stress intensity factor, K IC, strength assessment of crakced elements under static and cyclic loads;
Concepts of durability and life assessment in presence of flaws/defects.
Module 3:
Design of machine elements
Shaft and Shaft Components. Materials, layout, design for stress, deflections, components, fits;
Welding and the Design of Welded Structures. Stresses in Welded Joints, Strength of Welded Joints; fatigue;
Pressure vessels: design, assessment, acceptable defects.
Module 4:
Case studies:
Crane structure
Railway axle design and assessment;
Pressure vessel design and assessment;
Mechanical elements

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Students will pass the course after successfully take written test with exercises and written/oral test with theoretical questions. Both the tests are mandatory.
Written test with exercises
Via this exam, it will be possible to test students’ capability of application of the design tools to practical cases regarding machine components and systems.
Written/oral test with theoretical questions
Via this exam, it will be possible to test students’ knowledge and understanding of the theoretical topics included in the program.
Final Grading
To pass the course, students must successfully pass the tests with a minimum mark for both.

N. E. Dowling, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, Editore: Prentice Hall, Anno edizione: 2013
J.E. Shigley et al., Mechanical Engineering Design, Editore: Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2011
A.C. Ugural and S. K. Fenster, Advanced Mechanics of Materials and Applied Elasticity https://webeep.polimi.it/
Lecture notes of the teacher available on Polimi WeBeep https://webeep.polimi.it/

The course is thought for students attending an MSc in Engineering who want to deepen the numerical treatment of coupled problems arising in different engineering applications. The course is divided into two parts: in the first one (5 CFU), numerical methods to address general coupled problems arising in practical scenarios will be introduced and analyzed; in the second part (3 CFU), the general methods introduced in the first part will be applied to a specific context, namely the numerical modeling of the cardiovascular system, which is characterized by several coupling of different nature. This will allow to introduce the students towards projects inspired by the clinical needs. Thus, this course presents a modular structure, so that an MSc could possibly introduce only one of these two moduli among its courses.
The students will be addressed during the course towards new and advanced numerical strategies to handle complex coupled problems that could arise in different engineering contexts.
In order to have practical answers of the new numerical strategies introduced in this course, several laboratories with the computer will be considered, where the students will utilize some of the new numerical technique in a Finite Elements library.
The learning process will involve lectures on the theory and computer laboratories about the application of examples of
numerical methods.
The course could be performed also in a short version by 5 CFU called "053464 - ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS FOR COUPLED PROBLEMS". The present description accounts for both the courses (the extended and the short one).

For both the version of the course (extended and short), the lectures and the laboratories will provide students with the knowledge and understanding of

• Numerical techniques for homogeneous and heterogeneous problems based on domain decomposition;
• Numerical approximation of the coupling between a fluid and a structure;
  Limited to the extended version of the course, the lectures and the laboratories will provide students also with the knowledge and understanding of
• Numerical treatment of the coupling between geometrically heterogeneous models;
• The electro-mechanical coupled problem in the heart
• Fluid-structure interaction with immersed structures
  Moreover, both for the extended and the short courses, the ability to apply the previous knowledge to some examples on the calculator will be stimulated. In particular the student is required to
• be able to run executables introduced during laboratories;
• critically discuss the results of the numerical experiments above in prespective of the theory;
  The instructor expects a broad comprehension of the subjects which should not be limited to the statement of theoretical results.
  Instead, the acquired knowledge should enable students to express critical judgment.
  The students are expected to express their answers in a mathematically rigorous and clear way.

In what follow, the topics of the courses will be presented. Part I is common (extended and short version of the course), whereas part II refers only to the extended course
PART I (5 CFU) (Extended and short course)
I Numerical techniques for heterogeneous problems based on domain decomposition
I.1 Domain Decomposition methods and formulation of the problem
I.2 Interface equation
I.3 Weak formulations and Finite Elements approximations
I.4 Extensions to the Hooke and Stokes equations
I.5 Heterogeneous Domain Decomposition: examples
II Numerical approximation of the coupling between a fluid and a structure
II.1 Introduction to the cardiovascular system and examples of applications
II.2 Preprocessing: Image reconstruction and mesh generation
II.3 A brief review of the numerical approximation of the elasto-dynamics and Navier-Stokes equations
II.4 Position of the coupled problem
II.5 Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian formulation
II.6 The treatment of the geometric coupling
II.7 Numerical algorithm based on partitioned schemes. Added mass effect
II.8 Monolithic strategies and preconditioning
PART 2 (3 CFU) (Extended course)
III Numerical treatment of the coupling between geometrically heterogeneous models
III.1 Numerical treatment of defective boundary conditions
III.2 The 1D model for blood dynamics
III.3 OD models and outflow conditions
III.4 Geometric multiscale models: 3D-1D and 3D-0D coupling
IV Application to the heart function
IV.1 Brief introduction to cardiac physiology
IV.2 The electrical propagation and the Bidomain equations
IV.3 Numerical strategies for electro-physiology
IV.4 The mechanical contraction and electro-mechanical coupled problem
IV.5 Electro-mechanical coupling models
IV.6 Numerical strategies for the Electro-mechanical coupling
IV.7 Valve modeling
IV.8 Towards an integrated heart functioning modeling

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists only in an oral discussion and is designed to test the student on the knowledge and understanding of the numerical techniques introduced to address the presented problems and of the examples provided.
The instructor expects a broad comprehension of the subjects which should not be limited to the statement of theoretical results.
Instead, the acquired knowledge should enable students to express critical judgment.
The students are expected to express their answers in a mathematically rigorous and clear way.
It is also possible to undertake an optional project, agreed upon with the instructor, on topics relevant to the course, for a maximum of 3 points.

Alfio Quarteroni and Alberto Valli, Domain Decomposition Methods for Partial Differential Equations, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 1999
Quarteroni A., Veneziani A., Vergara C., Geometric multiscale modeling of the cardiovascular system, between theory and practice/Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2016, Fascicolo: 302
Quarteroni A., Manzoni A., Vergara C., The Cardiovascular System: Mathematical Modeling, Numerical Algorithms, Clinical Applications/Acta Numerica, Anno edizione: 2017, Fascicolo: 26

The course aims to provide concepts of scientific computing and C++ programming. It addresses procedural, object-oriented, and generic programming techniques; parallel computing with message passing (MPI) and shared memory (OpenMP) paradigms; compiling, debugging, testing, and profiling computer code; program organization; data structures; design patterns; and numerical algorithms.
The student will also acquire knowledge of tools for code development (git, makefiles) and for interfacing C++ with other programming languages (python, R) largely used in the scientific computing and machine learning community. Students are also provided with an extensive set of examples, freely downloadable from a git repository, that they can use and modify to autonomously test their acquired capabilities.
The course is offered in a 10-credit version and in an 8 CFU version. The present detailed program defines the aims, educational outcomes, and syllabi for both versions. The main difference between the two versions is in the evaluation procedure, where the 10-credit course necessarily implies the development of a project.
The course is organized in lectures given in lecture rooms, which also include the description of practical examples, exercise sessions carried out using the computer, where the students have to implement and test autonomously, but with the aid of a teaching assistant, small programs where they can apply the techniques introduced at the lectures, and auto evaluation activities consisting of developing autonomously some simple computer codes for scientific computing problems and discussing them with the lecturers. This latter activity is evaluated and can contribute to the final evaluation

The expected learning outcomes are:
Knowledge and understanding:
Learn and understand the main programming techniques and design patterns instrumental to the development of scientific codes;
Learn and understand the practical implementation of some numerical techniques adopted in scientific computing;
Learn and understand how to develop scientific code in a scalar and in a parallel environment;
Learn tools for program development, like git and makefiles, which are common in computer programming practices.
Learn and understand how to write efficient scientific code and the main techniques for debugging and profiling.
Applying knowledge and understanding:
Apply the acquired techniques to practical contexts;
Motivate the choice of the adopted methods and tools;
Making judgment:
Choose the appropriate code design for a specific objective
Develop autonomous thinking by choosing the structure and design of the developed code with great autonomy;
Communication skills:
Organize code for readability and comment it using de facto standard tools to produce a reference manual automatically;
Strengthen written and oral communication skills through the writing of the project report and the presentation of the results.
Ability in learning:
The students have to elaborate on the material provided during lectures and laboratory sessions in order to choose the appropriate software design, programming paradigms, and implementation techniques. Will also learn how to interface his/her code with existing libraries. This activity will strengthen his/her capability of autonomous learning.

1) Advanced C++ programming. This part aims to complete the student's knowledge of computer languages by providing an exhaustive illustration of the advanced features of C++, including those added in the newest standards, with an emphasis on scientific computing applications. We will also cover elements of numerical linear algebra, such as iterative solutions of large linear systems, and solutions of nonlinear systems of equations.
2) Code design and organization. In this part of the course, we cover the main design patterns, exception handling, static and dynamic libraries, computer code debugging and profiling, and code versioning systems.
3) Application of Parallel programming. In this part of the course, we address practical issues of parallel programming in the context of numerical algorithms.

Prova scritta condizionata (a scelta del docente), senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i condizionato (a scelta del docente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Altro
For the 10-credits version, the final assessment is a project in which a mathematical problem or an engineering application is solved by developing a computer program. Students should prepare a short report and present the project with an oral presentation, followed by teacher questions. Projects may be carried out in groups of up to three students. In exceptional cases (more complex projects), the group may be formed by more students.
For the 8-credit version, the student takes a written exam with questions concerning the techniques presented during the course and a simple program to develop and test. The teacher may require an oral assessment if needed to clarify student responses. Alternatively, the student may choose to carry out a project, similarly to the 10-credit version.
The possibility of carrying out the written examination is also given to the 10-credit students, with a mark limit of 25.
During the course, the student may engage in activities (called challenges), which consist of developing some simple computer codes for scientific computing problems autonomously. These activities are evaluated and contribute to the final mark.
In the evaluation, we assess:
1) The quality of the report and the oral presentation, both in terms of clarity and completeness. (Descriptors 3 and 4)
2) The originality of the software design, its usability, extendability, and efficacy for the target problem (Descriptors 2 and 3)
3) The capability of the student to apply the knowledge and techniques acquired during the course (Descriptors 1 and 2)
4) The autonomy in choosing tools, programming paradigms, and external libraries (Descriptor 5)

O Klein, Modern C++ Programming Techniques for Scientific Computing,, Anno edizione: 2021 https://conan.iwr.uni-heidelberg.de/data/people/oklein/pdf/klein_modern_cpp.pdf
Note: A freely downloadable text on modern C++. It also covers C++20
B. Stroustrup, A tour of C++, ISBN: 0-13-681648-7 https://www.stroustrup.com/tour3.html
Note: The tour'' is tutorial overview of all of standard C++ (language and standard library) at a moderately high level for people who already know C++ or at least are experienced programmers.

This course is co-organized by Politecnico di Milano, Ansaldo Nucleare and Framatome Italia, and aims at preparing the students to become conscious of the complexity of nuclear energy industry, and to be ready to contribute to this field.
The course presents a description of the nuclear energy industrial environment and of the engineering methodology applied in this environment. The structure of the course combines the introduction of such theoretical framework with project activities on specific applications selected by the involved companies. These project activities are developed throughout the course and paired with dedicated tutorials, homework assignments, and intermediate reviews.

The student will learn about:
The nuclear energy industrial ecosystem and its economics, with its interdependent sectors and players and the roles performed by each player.
The nuclear licensing process, specifically for nuclear power plants.
The engineering approach towards system and component design.
The student will be able to:
Elaborate and apply the acquired knowledge in a project activity.
Describe, analyse, and approach a nuclear engineering project.
Present her/his results according to engineering standards in terms of content and documentation.

The nuclear energy industry ecosystem and its economics: uranium supply and fuel cycle, nuclear reactor design and construction, plant operation, waste management and decommissioning, regulation and policy, and international organizations.
The methodological engineering steps for systems and components: definition of requirements, concept development, preliminary design, detailed design, design analysis, testing, design review with verification and validation, documentation, production and quality control, lifecycle support.
The core steps of the nuclear licensing process: pre-application phase, site license, construction license, operating license, license renewal/extension, and decommissioning license.
Specific topics proposed by the co-organizing companies and addressed via project works, allowing the application of the concepts presented to relevant engineering cases.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The project activities are to be performed by groups of students and organized with the involved companies. They will require the production of a report, which is going to be evaluated in terms of ability to handle complex problems, meet requirements, and produce clear technical documentation. The remaining part of the evaluation is going to an individual oral examination aimed at verifying the knowledge of the course topics and the effective participation in the project activities, together with a clear exposition and the knowledge of dedicated terminology.

D.G. Cacuci, Handbook of Nuclear Engineering, Editore: Springer-Verlag, Anno edizione: 2010
K.D. Kok, Nuclear Engineering Handbook, Editore: Taylor & Francis, Anno edizione: 2009

This course provides the students with all the skills necessary to write efficient algorithms and large-scale software, so as to be able to solve complex and big data problems on parallel systems. The emphasis is on teaching concepts applicable across a wide variety of problem domains (including scientific modelling, statistics, machine learning, operations research, and quantitative finance), and transferable across a broad set of frameworks. The goal of the course is to enable students to master object-oriented and parallel programming methods that nowadays are necessary to produce software systems with industrial strength quality. The course covers Object Oriented Programming (OOP) principles, C++, and OpenMPI for parallel programming. Each topic is treated both theoretically and practically. Lab sessions allow students to acquire a good level of autonomy in learning new topics.

Knowledge and understanding (DD1):
Learn OOP principles and mechanisms through C++
Learn the core characteristics of parallel systems and MPI communication primitives
Applying knowledge and understanding (DD2):
Develop computational thinking skills to support the modelling, solution, and analysis of advanced mathematical models
Structure a problem solution through OOP methods
Develop and compare parallel algorithms
Analyze software code written by others, use software libraries
Implement advanced methods and solve or analyze mathematical models in a parallel programming framework
Develop and test code fulfilling problem requirements
Making judgements (DD3):
Identify and evaluate software architectural choices
Apply complexity methods to evaluate multiple algorithms or data structure implementations
Communication skills (DD4):
The laboratory will allow students to:
Organize code in packages and classes for readability and reuse
Compare and discuss their implementation with teammates during lab sessions
Learning skills (DD5):
Develop and structure software at large scale
Analyze and understand the goals, assumptions, and requirements associated with a problem in the scientific computing, statistics or quantitative finance domains

Description
Historically, parallel computing has been considered to be the high end of computing and has been used to model difficult problems in many areas of science and engineering. Today, commercial applications provide an equal or greater driving force in the development of faster programs. These applications require the processing of large amounts of data in sophisticated ways. Data-intensive applications such as data mining, recommender systems, financial modelling and multimedia processing have implications on the design of algorithms and provide a new challenge for the modern generation of computing platforms. Parallel processing is the only cost-effective method for the fast solution of these big data problems. The emergence of inexpensive parallel computers such as commodity desktop multiprocessors, graphic processors and clusters of entry level servers has made parallel methods generally applicable, as have software standards for portable parallel programming.
Content
T he course is structured in three parts.
The first part of the course covers modern OOP and introduces the fundamentals of the C++ programming language. C++ is used as the reference language throughout the rest of the course. Students will gain experience in designing simple but powerful object-oriented applications and in writing code using C++. Example problems cover both traditional computer science algorithms (sorting, searching, lists) as well as simple scientific computing algorithms (matrix computations, gradient descent). This initial part provides the principles for developing at-scale industry software.
The second part covers the main aspects of parallel computing: parallel architectures, programming paradigms, and parallel algorithms. Parallel architectures range from inexpensive commodity multicore desktops, to general purpose graphic processors, to clusters of computers, to massively parallel computers containing tens of thousands of processors. Students learn how to analyze and classify these architectures in terms of their components (processor architecture, memory organization, and interconnection network).
The third part of the course introduces MPI, one of the most widely used standards for writing portable parallel programs. This part includes a significant programming component in which students face concrete examples from big data and scientific domains, machine learning, and operations research.
During lab sessions, students are invited to discuss their code with teammates, tutors and the instructor and to identify pros and cons of their implementation with respect to the ones provided as solutio. The laboratory sessions will be supervised by the course instructors and by some tutors.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The assessment will be based on a written exam at the end of the course. The elements that will be considered in the assessment activities are the followings:
Written test - Exercises focusing on design aspects
Design of data structures and algorithms
Identification and evaluation of alternative algorithms to solve a given problem
Definition of the high-level architecture and main classes for a software system according to the OOP paradigm
Definition of code fragments in C++ and in OpenMPI for parallel programs
Students can also earn some additional points (up to 3) in the final evaluation by submitting their solutions to three challenging problems that will be assigned during the course.

Official web site https://webeep.polimi.it/
Stanley B. Lippman, Jos©e Lajoie e Barbara E. Moo, C++ Primer, Editore: Addison-Wesley, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 9780321714114
Note: Used also within ADVANCED PROGRAMMING FOR SCIENTIFIC COMPUTING course
Peter S. Pacheco, An Introduction to Parallel Programming http://www.amazon.it/Introduction-Parallel-Programming-Peter-Pacheco/dp/0123742609
Bjarne Stroustrup, Programming - Principles and Practice Using C++, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-0321-992789

Module 2 of the course will focus on sustainable approaches to the valorization of organic waste and agri-food biomasses, mainly by using green technologies based on organic ionic liquids (ILs) and deep eutectic solvents (DES). In detail, the following topics will be considered:

• Current definition of sustainable chemistry space: green chemistry, sustainability, links to UN Sustainable Development Goals. Quantification of sustainability: green metrics, analytical green chemistry metrics.
• Valorization of agri-food wastes: recovery of polysaccharides, lignin, terpenes
• Analytical method for the extraction and determination of pollutants, with emphasis on the industrial contaminants of emerging concern (ICEC). Details on liquid-liquid microextraction (LLME) and dispersive LLME (DLLME) will be presented and critically discussed with the students in light of the analytical green metrics.
  Module 2 is oriented towards the understanding of the valorization of waste from chemical and agri-food manufacturing. The main objective is to provide the students with the scientific and technological foundations of the concept of sustainability. The transmission of concepts will be achieved through several case studies of the most recent literature, with emphasis on the role of green solvents in manufacturing and remediation. Module 2 will also adopt a strongly experimental approach by planning several laboratory sessions.

Module 2. The student will:
learn the principles of green chemistry, the link between green and sustainable chemistry, and their connection to UN SDG
be confident with the most important green metrics and analytical green metrics
learn some paradigmatic approaches to the sustainable valorization of waste from biomasses
learn some paradigmatic approaches to environmental remediation using green solvents.
be able to read and discuss case studies from the recent literature on sustainable chemical processes.

Module 2
The principles of Green Chemistry (GC). The connection between GC and Sustainable Chemistry (SC) through a case study.
The UN Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDG) and their link to SC.
The quantification of sustainability: the green metrics.
Analytical Chemistry goes green: the analytical green chemistry metrics.
The environmental impact of solvents. Neoteric and sustainable solvents: the case of ionic liquids (ILs) and deep eutectic solvents (DES), their sustainability and toxicology.
Biomasses from agri-food and the approaches to waste valorization.
Green solvents for environmental remediation.
Laboratory sessions:
Preparation of a set of hydrophilic DES and hydrophobic DES (HES).
Gelification of HES and preparation of eutectogels
Extraction of dyes from end-of-life polyesters
Chemical analysis of the extract via mass spectrometry and NMR spectroscopy

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of a written test on the main topics of the course and a brief oral discuss i on on a case study.

P.T. Anastas, J.C. Warner, Green Chemistry: Theory and Practice, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 1998

Obiettivi formativi
L'insegnamento si propone di presentare agli studenti i principi della fisica stellare, sia a livello microscopico che macroscopico. Vengono studiate le proprietà termodinamiche della materia stellare, l'equilibrio e stabilità gravitazionale dei corpi autogravitanti, la produzione e il trasporto di energia nelle stelle. In questo modulo, la teoria generale viene esemplificata sulle stelle classiche.
Insegnamento erogato dall'Università degli Studi di Milano. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare il sito di UNIMI al seguente link: https://www.unimi.it/it/corsi/insegnamenti-dei-corsi-di-laurea

Aspetti generali dell'elaborazione dei segnali e delle immagini biomediche, metodi di trattamento del segnale, principali sistemi di diagnostica per immagini ed esame di vari settori applicativi di interesse clinico e di ricerca. Dal filtraggio deterministico all'identificazione parametrica stocastica: modelli AR/MA/ARMA mono e multivariati e analisi spettrale parametrica. Metodo delle componenti principali (PCA). Entropia per il trattamento di segnali e immagini. Analisi e classificazione automatica del segnale elettrocardiografico (ECG). Sistema Nervoso Autonomo: segnali di variabilita' cardiovascolare e interazioni col respiro. ECG fetale. ECG in alta risoluzione: potenziali ventricolari tardivi. Sistema Nervoso Centrale: elaborazione del segnale elettroencefalografico (EEG) e dei potenziali evocati sensoriali.
Principi base di elaborazione e ricostruzione di immagini: trasformata di Fourier 2D, campionamento e quantizzazione, filtri spaziali, equalizzazione, operazioni geometriche, ricostruzione tomografica. Immagini a raggi X, tomografia trasmissiva (CT). Immagini emissive con radiotraccianti: scintigrafia, gamma camera, SPECT e PET. Immagini di Risonanza Magnetica (MRI): sequenze base, contrasto T1 e T2, codifica in frequenza e fase. MRI funzionale (cenni). Ultrasuoni: ecografia e Doppler.

Questo corso si propone di introdurre gli studenti di ingegneria a questioni filosofiche ed etiche che emergono con l'uso delle tecnologie biomediche. Ad esempio, gli ingegneri spesso si avvalgono di simulazioni informatiche di modelli idealizzati dei loro oggetti di studio. Tuttavia, tali procedure sono affette da incertezze rappresentazionali e computazionali che sono ineliminabili. Si presentano quindi questioni filosofiche circa l'attendibilità delle predizioni risultanti, oltre che questioni etiche riguardanti la responsabilità morale dell'uso delle tecnologie utilizzate. Allo stesso modo, l'inedita abilità a trattare un'enorme quantità di dati apre scenari affascinanti, soprattutto nel campo della medicina di precisione. Eppure, anche qui si devono affrontare domande aperte sulla capacità predittiva degli algoritmi impiegati nel trattamento dei Big Data, oltre che problemi morali concernenti la privacy e il controllo delle informazioni personali.

The course provides students with the fundamental knowledge required to understand the structure, function, and mechanical behaviour of cellular and subcellular structures, with particular emphasis on the cell membrane and cytoskeletal filaments.
The course addresses the molecular and biophysical mechanisms underlying key cellular processes, including cell adhesion, locomotion, intracellular transport, and cell division. Particular attention is devoted to the relationship between molecular structure and cellular function, as well as to the mechanical properties of biomolecules and biopolymers.
Students will acquire the theoretical background required to understand and interpret analytical and mathematical models describing molecular and cellular mechanisms. The course also introduces the main experimental approaches and technologies used for the visualization, manipulation, and mechanical characterization of biomolecules, cells, and subcellular structures at the molecular and cellular scales.
Lectures are complemented by tutorials and laboratory activities aimed at applying theoretical concepts to practical and quantitative problems, including molecular modelling, cell imaging, image analysis, mechanical characterization, and the design and experimental characterization of in vitro cell culture systems.

Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
Knowledge and Understanding (DD1)
describe the structure, function, and mechanical properties of the main biomolecules and biopolymers involved in cellular and cytoskeletal structures;
explain the fundamental principles governing the mechanical behaviour of cell membranes and cytoskeletal filaments;
describe the molecular mechanisms underlying cell adhesion, locomotion, intracellular transport, and cell division;
understand the fundamental principles of mathematical and mechanical models used to describe and interpret molecular and cellular mechanisms.
Applying Knowledge and Understanding (DD2)
relate molecular and structural features to the functional mechanisms underlying cellular behaviour;
apply analytical and modelling approaches to describe the mechanical behaviour of cellular and subcellular structures;
determine relevant biophysical parameters from experimental data and quantitative models;
identify appropriate experimental techniques, instrumentation, and experimental setups for the visualization, manipulation, and mechanical characterization of biomolecules, cells, and subcellular structures;
analyse microscopy images and perform quantitative or semi-quantitative measurements of cellular and morphological parameters using dedicated image-analysis software.
Making Judgements and Communication Skills (DD3)
identify appropriate experimental approaches and define suitable protocols for the characterization of biomolecules and cellular structures;
critically evaluate experimental observations and quantitative results in relation to the underlying molecular and cellular mechanisms;
integrate information from different disciplines, including molecular biology, cell biology, biophysics, mechanics, and bioengineering, to interpret complex cellular phenomena;
communicate scientific and technical concepts using appropriate terminology and formalism.

Molecular and Cellular Foundations
Introduction to the cell: DNA, RNA, and proteins; DNA packaging and organization; protein structure and function; molecular recognition mechanisms; protein folding and misfolding; molecular mechanisms associated with protein misfolding diseases, including prion diseases and amyloid fibril formation in neurodegenerative disorders.
Cell Membrane Mechanics and Transport
Structural and mechanical models of biological membranes; membrane composition and organization; membrane mechanical behaviour; lipid rafts and membrane fluidity; passive, active, and protein-mediated membrane transport; bacterial cell membranes.
Application of membrane biophysics to extracorporeal devices for sepsis treatment: drug–lipopolysaccharide interactions analysed through molecular mechanics approaches; multiscale analysis of device performance and efficiency.
Cytoskeleton Mechanics and Cellular Dynamics
Structure and function of the cytoskeleton; intracellular filaments; microtubules, actin filaments, and intermediate filaments; filament polymerization and depolymerization; structure and function of cilia, flagella, and microvilli.
Intracellular transport along cytoskeletal filaments; mechanisms of mitotic spindle formation; role of the cytoskeleton in mitosis and cell division.
Cell adhesion mechanisms; cell–cell adhesion and intercellular communication, including gap junctions; cell–substrate adhesion; mechanisms of cell locomotion and cytoskeletal remodelling during cell migration.
Mechanical Characterization of Cytoskeletal Filaments and Biopolymers
Experimental approaches for the direct and indirect characterization of filament mechanical properties, including tensile testing using atomic force microscopy (AFM), bending stiffness measurements, and estimation of Young's modulus.
Fundamentals of biopolymer mechanics: filament bending behaviour; persistence length; elastic energy and deformation; filament fluctuations; elastic constants; mechanical behaviour of short and long filaments.
Molecular Motors and Active Cellular Processes
Structure and function of molecular motor proteins, including myosins, kinesins, and dyneins; mechanisms of active intracellular transport; directional movement and force generation; mechanical models describing molecular conformational changes and motor activity.
Experimental Technologies for Biomolecular and Cellular Characterization
Overview of the principal experimental techniques used for the visualization, manipulation, and characterization of biomolecules, cells, and subcellular structures, including optical microscopy, electron microscopy, optical and magnetic tweezers, and atomic force microscopy (AFM).
The fundamental operating principles and applications of these techniques are introduced, with particular emphasis on their use in quantitative biophysical and biomechanical investigations.
Optical Tweezers and Single-Molecule Manipulation
Fundamental principles of optical trapping; experimental setup and instrumentation; calibration procedures; force measurement; applications of optical tweezers to the manipulation and mechanical characterization of single molecules and biological structures.
Tutorials and Laboratory Activities
Lectures are complemented by tutorials and laboratory activities designed to reinforce theoretical concepts through practical applications, analytical calculations, numerical analysis, and the use of dedicated software.
Activities include:
fundamentals of molecular modelling and analysis of molecular structures;
retrieval of molecular structures from the Protein Data Bank (PDB) and visualization and analysis using VMD;
mechanical characterization of cell membranes using micropipette-based techniques, with applications to erythrocytes and leukocytes;
analytical exercises addressing membrane mechanics and cellular mechanical properties;
mechanotransduction mechanisms and the role of mechanical stimuli in regulating cellular responses and cytoskeletal organization, with a specific application to endothelial cells;
design of a cell culture chamber for the application of controlled shear stress using Autodesk Inventor CAD software;
cell imaging and semi-quantitative analysis of cellular morphological parameters using histological and fluorescence microscopy images and FIJI software;
experimental fabrication and characterization of the designed cell culture chamber;
analysis of cell and subcellular structure images acquired following controlled mechanical stimulation;
quantitative analysis and modelling of cytoskeletal filament mechanics through dedicated exercises.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Attendance at lectures, tutorials, and laboratory activities is not compulsory.
No midterm examinations or early examination sessions are scheduled. The examination is conducted during the official examination sessions.
The final assessment consists of a written examination followed by an oral examination.
Written Examination
The written examination is conducted on the date of the official examination session and is used to determine admission to the oral examination.
The written test generally consists of:
five multiple-choice questions;
five open-ended questions.
The written examination accounts for one-third of the final grade.
Oral Examination
Students admitted to the oral examination take an in-depth oral examination during the days immediately following the official examination session, with the date agreed upon with the instructor.
The oral examination assesses:
theoretical knowledge, including definitions and conceptual descriptions;
quantitative descriptions and mathematical formulations;
understanding and interpretation of mathematical and mechanical models;
ability to solve analytical and quantitative problems;
ability to critically discuss course topics;
ability to establish connections between different concepts and mechanisms addressed throughout the course.
The oral examination accounts for two-thirds of the final grade.
Optional Group Project
Students are encouraged to participate in a group project carried out during selected tutorial sessions and to prepare a final report to be submitted at the end of the course.
The project is optional and is assessed on a scale from 0 to 1 point. The resulting score is added to the weighted average obtained from the written and oral examinations.
Assessment Criteria
The overall assessment of the student's learning outcomes is based on the following criteria:
ability to describe and quantitatively formalize the main molecular and cellular phenomena using physicochemical, biophysical, and engineering approaches;
ability to integrate knowledge from different areas and critically analyse the mechanisms underlying molecular and cellular behaviour;
depth of understanding of the scientific and technological challenges associated with the use and characterization of biomolecules and cells in research and clinical applications;
ability to describe and critically discuss analytical and mathematical models used to predict, describe, or interpret molecular and cellular mechanisms;
ability to critically interpret and discuss the results obtained through analytical and mathematical approaches;
ability to communicate scientific concepts clearly and effectively using appropriate technical and scientific terminology.

The aim of the course is to provide students with the theoretical and practical knowledge required to apply Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) methods to problems relevant to nuclear engineering. The course covers a range of flow conditions, from single-phase turbulent flows to more complex anisotropic and multiphase flows, with particular attention to the selection of suitable physical models, numerical approaches, and solution strategies.
The course is structured into two closely connected parts: theoretical lectures and hands-on computer laboratory sessions. The theoretical lectures introduce the fundamental concepts needed to critically model fluid flow problems using CFD. Particular emphasis is placed on the physics of turbulent flows and their numerical modelling, with a focus on Reynolds-averaged Navier–Stokes (RANS) approaches. The course then extends the discussion to multiphase flow modelling, including the main flow regimes, phase distribution, and phase interactions. Eulerian–Eulerian, Discrete Phase Model (DPM), and Volume of Fluid (VOF) approaches are presented and discussed in terms of their assumptions, applicability, and limitations. The hands-on laboratory sessions allow students to apply these concepts using a commercial CFD code (SIEMENS STAR-CCM+) to solve representative engineering case studies. Initial exercises focus on single-phase flow problems, while subsequent laboratories address multiphase modelling approaches such as Eulerian–Eulerian, DPM, and VOF. Through these activities, students will become familiar with the practical CFD workflow, including model selection, problem setup, numerical solution procedures, and critical interpretation of the results.

A. Lectures will allow students to:

• learn the theoretical concepts to model turbulent single-phase and two-phase flows with commercial codes;
• understand the connections between the physical phenomena and the modeling approaches;
  B. Laboratory activities will allow students to:
• manage a commercial Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) code;
• connect the physical phenomena and the modeling approaches, by setting-up the numerical modelling with a CFD code (e.g., setting the boundary conditions, numerical techniques,...);
• development capabilities to present the results of the numerical simulations and discuss their accuracy;
  C. The final project work will allow students to:
• apply the theoretical aspects and the modeling approaches presented during theoretical lessons and hands-on session in the computer laboratory;
• communicate the results of the numerical simulations using in technical communications with use of accurate scientific terminology.

The course is structured into two parts, highly connected each other: theoretical lessons and hands-on session in computer laboratory. The aim of the theoretical part is to supply scientific knowledge useful to manage critically computational fluid dynamics modeling. The aim of the computer labs is to introduce to critical and conscious usage of commercial Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) code through the modelling of basic test cases.
Course outline:
1. basic concept regarding Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) and multiphase flows
2a. single phase modeling approaches and numerical methods: theory
2b. single phase modeling approaches and numerical methods: hand-on sessions
3a. Eulerian-Eulerian, Discrete Phase Model (DPM) and Volume of Fluid multi-phase modeling approaches: theory
3b. Eulerian-Eulerian, Discrete Phase Model (DPM) and Volume of Fluid multi-phase modeling approaches: hand-on sessions
The course also will be based on invited lectures from well known experts, regarding the nature of turbulence in single and multiphase flows, multiphase flow simulations and cutting-edge modeling approaches in multiphase flows.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of two parts: (i) a written examination which includes a mix of analytical problems and open questions to assess the theoretical preparation of the student, (ii) the evaluation of a project work related to a particular case study (presentation and preparation of a scientific report). The evaluation of the project work considers the capability to apply proper models, to solve the numerical models and to discuss and comment, from an engineering point of view, the obtained results. In particular, the ability to relate the underling flow phenomena to the proper modeling approaches will be evaluated.

H.K. Versteeg, W. Malalasekera, An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The Finite Volume, Editore: PEARSON PRENTICE HALL, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 978-0-13-127498-3

L'obiettivo del corso è duplice:
1. Rendere gli studenti consapevoli delle complesse dinamiche della comunicazione e della persuasione, con un'enfasi speciale sulla componente personale (mittente/destinatario).
2. Equipaggiare gli studenti con abilità comunicative perché siano in grado di produrre comunicazioni orali, scritte e in forma multimediale che siano chiare e persuasive.
Il corso adotta tre strategie:

• Lezioni frontali
• Modalità "blended" e "flipped" (gli studenti accederanno in maniera autonoma a risorse online quali esempi di discorsi - in forma scritta o di video -, articoli, casi di studio, lezioni in video)
• Tutoring in presenza o in remoto (attraverso collaborazione "cloud") sui compiti da svolgere e sul progetto finale

This multidisciplinary course will introduce students to the fundamental concepts of molecular communication and its role in understanding how information propagates in plants when used as biosensors for environment monitoring. Green Infrastructures are trees, shrubs, herbs, green walls, green roofs, etc. The main goal of the course is to introduce students to the main functional models based on ideas from molecular communication to understand the extent to which plants can be used to sense and collect information from the surrounding environment. Molecular communication is an emerging bio-inspired communication field where molecules are used for encoding, transmitting, and receiving information, in the same way that living cells communicate. The course will give the chance to be initiated into a very exciting cutting-edge research field, which will soon influence many diverse research fields, such as engineering, chemistry, and biology.

1 - Knowledge and understanding
At the end of the course, students should be able to:

• know the different options to realize communication at the nanoscale among nano-precise entities, or nanomachines
• know the basic principles of propagation of information in plants
• develop an interdisciplinary approach that brings together expertise from plant biology, system modelling, and chemistry
  2 - Applying knowledge and understanding
  At the end of the course, students should be able to:
• understand and solve complex problems in different interdisciplinary areas
• integrate and individually find and re-adapt known solutions to existing problems
• summarize and present the results achieved during the analysis and specification activities
  3 - Making judgements
  After the end of the course, students should be able to:
• define mathematical models by considering the informational aspects of a system and the related measures

1. Course Presentation
2. Introduction to Biological and Molecular Communication (cell communication pathways; information storage in biology and cell signaling; molecular communication theory for biochemical systems; classification of propagation models; characterization of the Brownian motion and its simulation; diffusion in 1D and 3D spatial dimensions; biological communication systems: how do they work in nature; analysis of biological communication systems). Propagation of Information in Plants (scales of molecular communication; molecular communication in plants: intracellular, intercellular, and inter-organ; plasmodesmata modeling; Xylem and phloem modeling: action potentials and variational action potentials; communication among complex organisms; response to external stimuli; mechanosensitive signaling in plant modeling). Biosensors and Molecular Communication Applications.
3. Computer-based activities.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The assessment consists of an interdisciplinary project that applies course concepts to green infrastructures. Knowledge and understanding and applied skills are evaluated through the design and preparation of a technical report. Judgement is assessed through the justification of methodological choices. Communication abilities are evaluated through an oral presentation, while learning skills emerge from the integration and autonomous use of course topics in the project. Students may also choose to take an optional written examination at the end of the course covering the course topics.
The final grade is determined according to the following criteria: knowledge and understanding of the course topics (up to 8 points); ability to apply the acquired knowledge in the project (up to 8 points); judgement, including the justification of methodological choices (up to 6 points); communication abilities, assessed through the written report and oral presentation (up to 4 points); and learning skills, assessed through the autonomous integration and application of the course topics (up to 4 points).

Course slides and handouts https://webeep.polimi.it

Il corso ha lo scopo di illustrare metodi e algoritmi per l'analisi di sistemi complessi, vale a dire sistemi composti da un numero elevato di unità tra loro interagenti. Rientrano in questa categoria, a titolo di esempio, le reti sociali e quelle infrastrutturali per la distribuzione di energia, materia o informazione, le reti di transazioni economico-finanziarie e quelle di interazione biologica (p.e. proteine e processi metabolici), gli ecosistemi e le flotte di agenti (naturali o artificiali) coordinati. Il corso illustra dapprima un insieme di strumenti per l'analisi e la caratterizzazione della struttura delle reti, per poi considerare i fenomeni emergenti dall'interazione di sistemi dinamici attraverso la rete. Ogni argomento sarà trattato sia dal punto di vista teorico che attraverso la discussione di esempi applicativi.

Descrittori di Dublino
Risultati di apprendimento attesi
Conoscenza e comprensione
A seguito del superamento dell’esame lo studente conosce:
I principali problemi, i metodi di analisi, e gli algoritmi fondamentali per l’analisi delle proprietà topologiche di una rete complessa.
I principali problemi, i metodi di analisi, e gli algoritmi fondamentali per l’analisi delle proprietà dinamiche di un insieme di sistemi tra loro interagenti (sistemi complessi).
Capacità di applicare conoscenza e comprensione
Attraverso la teoria, le esercitazioni e i casi applicativi analizzati, e a seguito del superamento dell’esame, lo studente acquisisce la capacità di applicare i metodi e gli algoritmi appresi a casi reali, per quanto di complessità limitata.
Abilità comunicative
A seguito del superamento dell’esame, in particolare della prova integrativa, lo studente è in grado di comunicare in modo chiaro i contenuti di una ricerca scientifica, evidenziando i metodi che sono stati adottati e i risultati ottenuti.
Capacità di apprendimento
A seguito del superamento dell’esame, lo studente acquisisce la capacità di apprendere in maniera autonoma argomenti legati alle tematiche generali affrontate durante il corso.

Introduzione allo studio della complessità nei sistemi e nelle reti
Reti complesse:
Distanze, diametro, clustering, distribuzione di grado
Modelli di rete: random, scale-free, small-world
Misure di centralità: closeness, betweenness, PageRank
Analisi di comunità e core-periphery
Robustezza infrastrutturale: resilienza e tolleranza ai guasti
Sistemi complessi:
Robustezza infrastrutturale: propagazione di guasti
Processi di diffusione in rete
Reti di sistemi dinamici
Dinamiche collettive: consenso e sincronizzazione
Per ulteriori informazioni si rimanda alle pagine personali del docente ( https://piccardi.faculty.polimi.it/csr.html ), dove sono anche disponibili le slide usate a lezione e vari articoli di approfondimento.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
L'esame consiste in una prova teorica scritta (esercizi + domande teoriche a risposta 'aperta' e 'chiusa') alla quale viene assegnata una valutazione massima di 32 punti. Lo studente non ha la facoltà di richiedere una prova orale, che è invece a discrezione del docente qualora, in casi particolari, voglia verificare l'effettiva preparazione dello studente.
La prova integrativa (progetto) è facoltativa e riservata agli studenti frequentanti (il docente specificherà le modalità di verifica della frequenza): su richiesta, allo studente viene assegnato un articolo scientifico, analizzato il quale dovrà preparare una presentazione orale supportata da slide, della durata di 10/15 minuti, che esporrà in aula. La prova integrativa ha una valutazione massima di 1.5 punti, i quali si sommano al risultato della prova teorica dando luogo al voto finale.
La seguente tabella mostra in dettaglio gli elementi che saranno considerati nella valutazione:
Modalità di verifica
Descrizione
Risultato di apprendimento perseguito (descrittore di Dublino)
· Prova teorica (scritta)
· Domande di carattere teorico a risposta aperta e chiusa sugli argomenti del corso
· Risoluzione di esercizi numerici
· 1,2,4,5
· 1,2
· Prova integrativa (orale)
· Presentazione del contenuto di articolo scientifico assegnato e discussione
· 1,2,4,5

Albert-László Barabási, Network Science, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 1107076269
M.E.J. Newman, Networks: an Introduction, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-0-19-920665-0
A. Pikovsky, M. Rosenblum, J. Kurths, Synchronization - A Universal Concept in Nonlinear Sciences, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 0-521-59285-2

This course is part of the Computational Science and Computational Learning track in the Master Program in Mathematical Engineering. The aim is to provide students with the fundamentals of mathematical models and numerical methods for partial differential equations that describe the motion of fluids in both laminar and turbulent regimes. This is a very dynamic area of study full of new contributions. Therefore the course, in addition to the basic aspects, aims to encourage the study of the latest methodological approaches. In this part of the integrated course the focus will be on the statistical description of turbulence and on its modelling.
This course is also offered in a reduced 3 CFU version 052029 - COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS [2] which together with the course on 052028 - COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS [1] (5 CFU) defines the integrated course on 052030 - COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS [C.I.] (8 CFU). The present sheet defines the objectives, programs and learning outcomes for both courses.

The student will be able to know and understand:

• the statistical quantities that are useful to describe the main features of a turbulent flow;
• the Kolmogorov theory for statistically homogeneous, stationary and incompressible turbulence;
• the limitations of the Kolmogorov theory
• the main families of turbulent models: Reynolds Averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) and Large Eddy Simulation (LES)
• the properties and limits of the different turbulent models
  The student will be able to apply the knowledge and comprehension to:
• (*) characterize the main transport and diffusion properties of a passive scalar in a turbulent flow.
• (*) characterize the features of two-dimensional turbulence and the main differences with respect to three-dimensional turbulence.
• (*) characterize the features of the turbulent boundary layers.
• the implementation of wall laws in the framework of RANS turbulence models.
• calibrate the model parameters of RANS turbulence models.
• the implementation of simple turbulence models in finite element solvers.
  (*) In the reduced 3 CFU version of the course the points marked with an asterisk will not be included.

• Statistical description of turbulence. Kolmogorov's theory of statistically homogeneous and stationary incompressible turbulent flows. Limitations of Kolmogorov's theory.
• (*) Transport and diffusion of a passive scalar in a turbulent flow.
• (*) Two-dimensional turbulence.
• (*) Turbulent boundary layer.
• Turbulence models for Reynolds Averaged Navier Stokes (RANS) equation; turbulent viscosity models, mixing length,
  two equation models: k-epsilon model, k-omega model.
• Large Eddy Simulation (LES) turbulence models: filtering technique, Smagorinsky turbulent viscosity model,
  similarity scale models, dynamic models, dynamic mixed models, anisotropic models.
  (*) In the reduced 3 CFU version of the course the points marked with an asterisk will not be included.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
The student will attend a written test including theory and programming exercises and oral examinations with the two teachers of the course. The exam is passed if the student reaches a sufficient mark (>=18) in each of the three parts (written exam and two oral exams) and the final mark is the average of the three marks.
The student must prove to know the main definitions and concepts inherent in turbulent flows.
He must be able to critically discuss the different theoretical aspects of turbulent phenomena: the characteristics of the relevant statistical descriptors; the Kolmogorov's theory of statistically homogeneous and stationary incompressible turbulent flows and subsequent developments; (*) the transport and diffusion of a passive scalar in a turbulent flow; (*) two-dimensional turbulence; (*) the turbulent boundary layer; the turbulence models both in the framework of Reynolds Averaged Navier Stokes and of Large Eddy Simulation.
He must be able to propose the most adequate analytic and modelling approach that guarantees the best compromize in terms of accuracy and computational efficiency for a given turbulent flow.
In particular during the oral part the student should be able to present complex arguments in a rigorous, clear and concise way.
(*) In the reduced 3 CFU version of the course the points marked with an asterisk will not be included.

Lecture Notes available on beep channel
J. Ferziger, M. Peric, Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics (4th edn), Editore: Springer-Verlag, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 9783319996912
P.A. Davidson, Turbulence - An Introduction for Scientists and Engineers (2nd edn), Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 9780198722588
U. Frisch, Turbulence, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1995, ISBN: 9780521457132

The course aim at:

• describing in detail the linear elastic problem as the fundamental problem governing the behaviour of solids and structures;
• formulating the linear elastic problem for solids and structures in a way suitable for numerical treatment;
• describing the Finite Element Method for linear elastic bodies and structures;
• giving to the students capabilities in the implementation of the Finite Element Method through laboratory sessions;
• describing the elasto-plastic behaviour of materials and structures;
• presenting the theory of limit analysis for elasto-plastic continua and structures;
• presenting the theory of limit states occurring due to variable-repeated loads acting on elasto-plastic continua and structures.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:

• know the formulation and relevant hypotheses of the linear elastic problem for solid continua and structural elements;
• know the general formulation of the Finite Element Method for linear elastic problems;
• know how to implement in computer codes the Finite Element Method for linear elastic continua and structures;
• know the formulation of elasto-plastic constitutive laws;
• know the theory of limit analysis for elasto-perfectly plastic continua and structures;
• be able to apply the theory of limit analysis for the determination of the collapse load of bi-dimensional elasto-plastic frame structures;
• know the theory of limit states for elasto-plastic bodies and structures subject to variable, repeated loads.
  The student will be able to discuss the above acquired knowledges with a clear and appropriate language and will be able to reproduce the fundamental reasoning and proofs that bring to the demonstration of the theorems presented during the classes.

• Part 1: The structural problem.
  General formulation of the elastic boundary-value problem.
  Virtual work principle; virtual displacements and virtual forces principles.
  Potential energy and complementary energy theorems.
  Plane strain and plane stress elastic problems.
  Axi-symmetric elastic problem.
  Structural theories: Timoshenko and Euler-Bernoulli beam theories.
• Part 2: The finite element method in linear problems
  Displacement approach for truss structures.
  The Rayleigh-Ritz method for the displacement approach.
  General formulation of the displacement-based finite element method: mesh construction; displacement model; stiffness and mass matrices; equivalent nodal loads; assembling procedure; solution; convergence criteria.
  Finite elements for plane problems.
  Isoparametric finite elements.
  Finite elements for axi-symmetric problems.
  Finite elements for Euler-Bernoulli and Timoshenko beams.
  Numerical integration.
• Part 3: Elasto-plastic behaviour of materials and beams
  Uni-dimensional elasto-plastic constitutive law: perfectly-plastic and hardening behaviours.
  Three-dimensional elasto-plastic constitutive law: von Mises yielding function, associative flow rule, isotropic hardening.
  Perfectly-plastic beams under bending and axial force.
  Limit domains for beam sections under bending and axial force.
• Part 4: Limit analysis
  Fundamentals of limit analysis for frames: static and kinematic theorems, corollaries.
  Limit analysis of frames by direct methods and by linear programming.
  Limit analysis for elasto-plastic continua.
  Shakedown analysis: Bleich-Melan theorem.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The examination includes the following parts.

• An (elective) work in which the student applies the knowledge acquired during the laboratory classes on the Finite Element Method.
• A written exam including quantitative exercises and open questions on the course topics.
• An oral exam in which the examiner check the student's preparation asking supplementary information on the solved quantitative exercises of the written text and ask general questions on the course contents.
  The student during the final oral exam must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the topics, with the related hypotheses, the critical points, the mechanical meaning and their consequences.

A. Corigliano, A. Taliercio, Meccanica Computazionale. Soluzione del problema elastico lineare. Esculapio, Editore: Esculapio, Bologna, Anno edizione: 2005
L. Corradi, Meccanica delle strutture. voll. 1, 2, 3, Editore: McGraw-Hill, seconda edizione, Anno edizione: 2010
L. E. Malvern, Introduction to the mechanics of a continuous medium, Editore: Prentice Hall, Anno edizione: 1969
M. Bonnet, A. Frangi, C. Rey, The finite element method in solid mechanics, Editore: Mc Graw Hill, Anno edizione: 2014
K.J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Editore: Prentice Hall, Anno edizione: 1996
C. Massonet e M. Save., Calcolo plastico a rottura delle costruzioni, Editore: CLUP, Milano, Anno edizione: 1980
V. Franciosi, Calcolo a Rottura, Editore: Liguori, Anno edizione: 1986
S. Kaliszky,, Plasticity: Theory and Engineering Applications,, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 1989
A. Khan, Huang, Continuum theory of plasticity, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1995

The course aims at describing the main corrosion phenomena on metals in contact with natural (soil, atmosphere, water) and industrial environments. The students will be able to make a corrosion assessment, evaluating the maximum expected corrosion rate and making a proper material selection for a specific application as a function the environmental aggressiveness and operation condition. Among the several available protection techniques, cathodic protection will be described in details.
During the course, a corrosion real case will be proposed. Students, divided into groups of maximum 10 persons, will be asked to make a corrosion assessment, define the cause of corrosion or indicate a proper protection system to assure a safe use in operating condition. At the end of the course, any group has to write a technical report on the proposed subject. In the last day of lessons, some groups (maximum 6) will be asked to present their work in classroom.

Lectures, numerical exercises and practical examples will allow the student to (DdD1 - DdD2):

• define, for each environment, the parameters necessary to evaluate the corrosion rate
• know the possible forms of corrosion of a metal in contact with a specific environment
• make a corrosion assessment, discussing on the possible cause of corrosion, estimating the corrosion rate
• discuss and select a proper metal or a proper protection technique for a specific application
• know the cathodic protection systems and select a proper plant for a real structure
  The project work will allow students to (DdD2 - DdD3):
• discuss in a team on a real corrosion problem, stimulating the student's ability to develop autonomous knowledge of the subject
• address and critically discuss problems and situations also other than those faced during the lessons
• find a suitable remedy to the damage, using applicable technical standards
• write an organised technical report, in which the cause of corrosion and/or the application of a protection system are described

The course is taught in the first emi-semester and it deals with the following topics.
Basic principles of corrosion (outline). Electrochemical mechanism. Thermodynamic and kinetic aspects.
Corrosion and protection of metals in natural environments (related issues: main forms of corrosion, causes of corrosion, evaluation of corrosion rate, use of corrosion prevention systems, metals most used and specific corrosion issues). Atmosphere: effect of pollutant, RH, temperature. Soil: soil composition, stray current, differential aeration, SRB. Fresh water and seawater: indexes, scaling power, hardness, conductivity.
Corrosion and protection of metal in Oil & Gas industry. Off-shore and on-shore, oil and gas production and transportations, CO2 corrosion, H2S corrosion, erosion-corrosion. Corrosion in industrial boiler.
Cathodic protection. Galvanic and impressed current systems, anodic materials, feeding system, design and monitoring.
A project is integral part of the course. The aim of projects is to help students in using the approaches and principles tough during the course. Projects will be assigned in the first weeks of the emi-semester. The final report is expected to be released at a fixed deadline. Some intermediate revison processes will be scheduled. Some groups will present and discuss their report in classroom at the end of the emi-semester.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation will be carried out by a written exam.
An intermediate written exam will be scheduled at the end of the emi-semester of lessons, during the week of lesson suspension according to the official academic calendar.
The written exam consists of multiple choice questions, open questions and numerical exercises. Aim of the written exam is to verify the student ability to know the corrosion issues of metals in real working conditions and to verify if the student is able to make a proper corrosion assessment, estimating the corrosion rate, evaluating the residual service life or applying cathodic protection as main preventative or protection methods. Exams during the official dates are organized in the same way.
The maximum score of the written exam of the module "Corrosion Engineering" is 28/30. The written exam is passed even if the obtained score is 14/30.
The project laboratory report will be evaluated based on the proper corrosion assessment, the definition of the cause of corrosion and the proposal of a correct remedy. Structure of the report and clarity of exposition will be considered, too. The maximum score of the project laboratory report is 4/30. This score is sum up to the written exam score.
The oral exam is optional and can be scheduled only after a successful written exam. With the oral, a maximum increase of 3 points can be obtained. If the oral is not satisfactory, the score can be reduced.

Pietro Pedeferri, Corrosion Science and Engineering, Editore: L. Lazzari, M. Pedeferri, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-3-319-97625-9
Dispense del corso
L. Lazzari, P. Pedeferri, M. Ormellese, Cathodic Protection, Editore: PoliPress, Anno edizione: 2008

Nella prima parte del corso vengono introdotti i concetti fondamentali della schematizzazione degli organi meccanici (assi, alberi, ingranaggi, cuscinetti, telai, giunti, molle, ecc.) per lo studio dell'equilibrio e del calcolo delle reazioni vincolari, delle azioni interne, degli sforzi e delle deformazioni, in base al legame elastico lineare, nonche' della deformabilita' delle strutture. Verranno trattati i sistemi isostatici e semplici sistemi iperstatici, con particolare attenzione all'analisi cinematica dei sistemi. Successivamente il corso ha come obiettivo l'impostazione del dimensionamento e verifica dei piu' elementari componenti e organi delle macchine. A questo scopo e' illustrato il comportamento meccanico dei materiali utilizzati in campo ingegneristico sollecitati staticamente e a fatica, sono quindi evidenziati i coefficienti che tengono conto della presenza di intagli (coefficiente di sovrasollecitazione teorico, Kt, sperimentale, Ks, e di fatica, Kf) nei componenti reali. Lo stato di sforzo e di deformazione nel piano e' studiato per determinare le sollecitazioni e le direzioni principali o in una prefissata direzione. Infine sono illustrati i principali criteri di resistenza statici e a fatica per materiali duttili e fragili.

See the program of the module in the master course

See the program of the module in the master course

L'insegnamento affronta il tema della creatività, in particolare nel campo della scienza e della tecnologia, con l'obiettivo di stimolare negli studenti la consapevolezza del fatto che esistono alcuni fattori chiave per creare ambienti di lavoro e modi di agire e pensare maggiormente creativi. Dopo una base teorica sulla creatività in generale e della creatività negli ambiti della scienza e della tecnologia, con particolare riferimento alle opere di Kuhn e Popper, vengono proposte una serie di metodologie da sperimentare in maniera laboratoriale, ispirate degli studi di Resnick, De Bono, Kelley e altri autori. L'approccio viene validato praticamente attraverso lo svolgimento di progetti di gruppo su temi dati, da affrontare in gruppi interdisciplinari.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua obbligatoria
See the program of the module in the master course

Data-driven and algorithmic technologies increasingly support or automate decisions in engineering, business, science, public policy and everyday life. Their outcomes, however, are not determined by technical performance alone: they also depend on how data are generated, selected and represented, on the objectives and constraints embedded in algorithms, and on the social contexts in which technological systems are designed and deployed.
The course provides students with an interdisciplinary framework for understanding, analysing and addressing fairness-related issues in data-driven technologies. It combines a sociological perspective on data, datafication and algorithmic processes with technical methods for identifying bias, evaluating different notions of fairness and designing fairness-aware technological and decision-making solutions.
The course is intended for students from different engineering backgrounds. It aims to show that data and algorithmic fairness is not a specialised topic limited to diversity and inclusion, but a central engineering challenge concerning the quality, reliability, legitimacy and societal impact of technological systems.
The sociological module introduces students to the relationship between data and society, considering the production and use of data as both a technological activity and a socio-political process. The technical module focuses on the mechanisms through which unfair outcomes may arise in data, algorithms and decision-making processes, and on methods and frameworks for evaluating and mitigating them.
Through lectures, discussions, case studies, exercises and a group project, students will learn to connect sociological interpretation, technical analysis and engineering design.

Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
Explain and critically interpret how data and algorithmic systems are shaped by social, cultural, political and technological processes, and how their design and deployment may reproduce or transform existing inequalities.
Dublin Descriptor 1 — Knowledge and understanding
Analyse data-driven and algorithmic systems from a fairness perspective, identifying potential sources of bias across the different stages of the technological lifecycle and applying suitable concepts, criteria and methods to assess their outcomes.
Dublin Descriptor 2 — Applying knowledge and understanding
Formulate and justify fairness-aware design or policy choices, critically discussing alternative solutions, conflicting objectives, limitations and trade-offs, and clearly communicating the results of the analysis to audiences with different disciplinary backgrounds.
Dublin Descriptors 3 and 4 — Making judgements and communication skills
Class activities, independent study and project work will also support students in integrating technical and sociological perspectives, using feedback constructively and autonomously extending the course concepts to new application domains.
Dublin Descriptor 5 — Learning skills

The course is organised into two closely integrated modules.
Module A — Data and society: sociological perspectives
2 CFU
The first module introduces a sociological perspective on data and algorithmic processes. Data are considered not only as technical objects, but also as the result of social choices, classifications, institutional practices and power relations.
Topics include:
introduction to sociology and to the relationship between society and technology;
data, society and processes of datafication;
the social construction of data, categories and classifications;
identity, culture and technological systems;
the relationship between technology, power and inequality;
the role of gender, race and ethnicity, age, disability and socioeconomic conditions in the production and use of data;
historical and contemporary case studies concerning data-driven technologies;
data feminism and design justice;
epistemic injustice and its relevance to data production, technological design and decision-making;
the social, cultural and political implications of algorithmic systems in scientific, business, policy, healthcare and everyday-life contexts.
The module combines lectures with in-class discussions, exercises and case-study activities. This reflects the approach proposed for the sociological module, in which data production and application are treated as both technological and socio-political phenomena.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Valutazione continua obbligatoria
The course adopts an interdisciplinary and student-centred approach. Teaching activities combine:
lectures introducing sociological concepts, technical methods and analytical frameworks;
guided discussions on scientific literature, technological applications and controversial cases;
individual and small-group exercises;
analysis of real or realistic case studies;
activities requiring students to compare alternative definitions and approaches to fairness;
supervised development of a group project;
final presentation and discussion of project results.
The group project requires students to select or analyse a data-driven or algorithmic application and examine it from both a sociological and a technical fairness perspective. Depending on the selected case, students may analyse data generation, model assumptions, performance across population groups, decision rules, deployment conditions, affected stakeholders and possible mitigation strategies.
The project is intended to develop the ability to integrate perspectives from different disciplines and to formulate technically informed and socially aware design recommendations.
Indicative teaching mix
Teaching activity
Hours
Didattica trasmissiva/frontale
28
Didattica interattiva/partecipativa
12
Didattica laboratoriale
4
Didattica progettuale
6
Didattica valutativa
0
Total assisted teaching
50
Independent study and project work
75
Assisted teaching hours per CFU
10
This classification is consistent with the current distinction between transmissive teaching, interactive activities, laboratory work and project-based teaching. In particular, discussions, guided exercises and case-study activities fall within interactive teaching, while the supervised development and revision of the group assignment are appropriately classified as project-based teaching.

Il corso ha lo scopo di illustrare problemi, metodi e algoritmi relativi all'analisi di sistemi complessi, con particolare riferimento allo studio delle dinamiche non lineari e delle reti di interazione tra sistemi.
Nel primo modulo (Teoria dei sistemi (dinamica non lineare)) si discutono le proprietà fondamentali dei sistemi dinamici non lineari, vale a dire i comportamenti asintotici, dai più semplici (stazionario) ai più complessi (oscillazioni persistenti, periodiche o caotiche), e le transizioni da un comportamento all'altro al variare dei parametri del sistema (biforcazioni, isteresi, catastrofi).
Nel secondo modulo (Complessità nei sistemi e nelle reti) si considerano sistemi composti da più unità tra loro interagenti, presentando dapprima gli strumenti per l'analisi delle proprietà delle reti complesse (network analysis) per poi analizzare come la struttura delle interazioni tra i sistemi caratterizzi il comportamento dinamico complessivo (sistemi multi-agente, consenso e sincronizzazione).

Approccio clinico: interventi per contaminazione da inalazione, ingestione, ferita, adsorbimento cutaneo, modalità di chelazione, immobilizzazione o escrezione forzata.
Modelli della fase pre-sistemica e sistemica: tratto respiratorio, tratto alimentare, modello NCRP per le ferite, circolo sanguigno.
Le grandezze in uso: dose assorbita, dose efficace, dose agli organi, funzioni di ritenzione ed escrezione, attività integrata in un organo, frazione di energia assorbita in un organo, energia efficace specifica, intake, dose efficace impegnata, coefficiente di dose.
Strumenti di calcolo: ICRP 78, NRPB-M824, IAEA SRR 37, NIRS database, MONDAL2 database.
Misure in vitro: tecniche disponibili, spettrometria alpha, gamma, beta totale, scintillazione liquida, spettrometro di massa, Cherenkov.
Misure in vivo: whole body counting, organ counting, strumentazione e sistemi di taratura.
Programma di sorveglianza: monitoraggi di conferma, routine e speciali, criterio "IAEA", ISO 20553, ISO 27048.
Linee guida IDEAS: rapporto FZKA 7243, il workgroup IDEAS, livello critico di screening e livelli di indagine, valutazioni di intake, funzione di verosimiglianza e funzione di dispersione, scelta delle funzioni di ritenzione / escrezione e analisi del fit, flow chart metodo IDEAS, analisi delle code di intake.
Esercitazioni: calcolo di dose impegnata di individui contaminati in seguito ad eventi incidentali reali come da database internazionali .

L'insegnamento da 10 CFU consta di due insegnamenti integrati da 5 CFU ciascuno denominati DOSIMETRIA INTERNA e RADIOPROTEZIONE AVANZATA, si indica di seguito il dettaglio specifico per modulo.
Dosimetria Interna (5 CFU):
L’obiettivo dell’insegnamento è quello di fornire una conoscenza di base sulle problematiche legate alla contaminazione interna da radionuclidi in organi e tessuti degli esseri umani, la sua prevenzione, trattamento, quantificazione, gestione e calcolo della dose efficace impegnata. Grazie alle conoscenze acquisite in questo insegnamento, lo studente necessiterà solo in minima parte di integrare la propria formazione specifica con le procedure peculiari delle installazioni presso le quali andrà ad operare/lavorare.
Specificatamente legato anche all’iniziativa “Ambassador in Green Technologies” l’insegnamento fornirà la conoscenza di base per l’analisi di impatto dosimetrico sull’ambiente inteso come biota non umano, consentendo di delineare le potenzialità di danno su strutture animali e vegetali a valle di rilasci autorizzati o incidentali.
Radioprotezione Avanzata (5 CFU):
Partendo da una conoscenza già acquisita dei fondamenti della radioprotezione, l'insegnamento intende illustrare agli studenti i principali campi di applicazione di questa disciplina nel panorama attuale delle attività umane, che spaziano dallo smantellamento di un impianto nucleare alle sorgenti orfane.
L’obiettivo che l'insegnamento si propone è quello di far conoscere, rendere familiari e in grado di affrontare le principali problematiche di radioprotezione che si riscontrano in campo industriale, energetico e non, sanitario, dei trasporti e della security delle materie fissili. Particolare risalto verrà dato alle problematiche di radioprotezione associate alle attività di decommissioning degli impianti nucleari.
Gli studenti acquisiranno familiarità e sensibilità verso casi reali che verranno illustrati in aula dal docente e da esperti dei vari settori che terranno seminari didattici su temi specifici. Le visite previste sugli impianti serviranno a fornire una visione d'insieme del contesto in cui le tematiche illustrate si inseriscono.
L'insegnamento viene offerto nell'ambito della LM in Ingegneria Nucleare, ma sicuramente i temi trattati possono essere di interesse per studenti di altri corsi di studi, quali ad esempio Ingegneria della Prevenzione e della Sicurezza nell'industria di processo, Ingegneria per l'Ambiente e il Territorio, Ingegneria Civile, ecc.

Dosimetria Interna:
Lo studente:
Conosce la terminologia ed i principi di base di trasporto e risoluzione dei modelli biocinetici.
Conosce le basi delle metodiche di quantificazione della attività incorporata ed escreta, con rispettive potenzialità e limiti, in modo da poter scegliere l’idonea tecnica di misura.
E’ in grado di predisporre, in piena autonomia di giudizio, una campagna di monitoraggio personale nonché di gestire le anomalie e le emergenze di contaminazioni del personale.
E’ in grado di calcolare le dosi efficaci impegnate derivanti da contaminazioni, anche in scenari complessi che prevedano introduzioni multiple di radionuclidi e di discernere, con spirito critico, tra dati che presentino anomalie, dati affidabili e potenziali vie di introduzione occulte o secondarie.
E’ in grado di stimare il danno da radiazione ambientale al biota non umano derivante da contaminazioni ambientali di radionuclidi sulla cui base può decidere come intervenire per mitigare o eliminare una o più componenti isotopiche di rilievo.
Radioprotezione Avanzata:
Lo studente:
Conosce i temi più rilevanti sui quali si esercita attualmente la radioprotezione e le leggi e norme tecniche di riferimento.
Conosce i contesti industriali (energetici e non) e i processi di lavorazione dove il rischio di incidente radiologico può diventare rilevante.
E’ in grado di analizzare un problema reale e di impostarne la soluzione utilizzando gli esempi forniti nelle case histories presentate a lezione.
Ha proprietà di linguaggio e conosce il lessico specialistico utilizzato.
Ha autonomia di giudizio nella valutazione e risoluzione delle problematiche.

Dosimetria Interna:
Terminologia, DPI e gestione delle emergenze: terminologia tecnica specifica, relativa alla biocinetica ed alla fisiologia discussa nell’insegnamento, dispositivi di protezione individuale (DPI), direttive di perimetrazione e gestione delle emergenze radiologiche/nucleari.
Approccio clinico: interventi per contaminazione da inalazione, ingestione, ferita, passaggio trasndermico, modalità di chelazione, immobilizzazione o escrezione forzata.
Modelli della fase pre-sistemica e sistemica: tratto respiratorio, tratto alimentare, modello NCRP per le ferite, trasporto sistemico.
Le grandezze in uso: dose assorbita, dose efficace, dose agli organi, funzioni di ritenzione ed escrezione, attività integrata in un organo, frazione di energia assorbita in un organo, energia efficace specifica, intake, dose efficace impegnata, coefficiente di dose, fantocci voxel e ibridi.
Strumenti di calcolo: ICRP-78, NRPB-M824, IAEA SRS-37, NIRS database, database del governo federale tedesco, MONDAL-3 database, ICRP-OIR database.
Misure in vitro: panoramica sulle tecniche disponibili, con particolare riferimento alla spettrometria alpha, gamma, conteggio beta totale, scintillazione liquida, spettrometro di massa e Cherenkov volte alla quantificazione radionuclidica negli escreti umani.
Misure in vivo: sistemi di quantificazione radionuclidica negli esseri viventi, whole body counting (WBC), organ counting (OC), strumentazione e tecniche di taratura.
Programma di sorveglianza: monitoraggi di conferma, di routine e speciali, criterio “IAEA” per l’avvio della sorveglianza, ISO 20553, ISO 27048.
Linee guida IDEAS 2.0: rapporto FZKA aggiornato, il workgroup IDEAS, livello critico di screening e livelli di indagine, valutazioni di intake, funzione di verosimiglianza e funzione di dispersione, scelta delle funzioni di ritenzione / escrezione e analisi del fit, flow chart metodo IDEAS, analisi delle code di intake.
Linee guida RP-188 (exTECHREC): rapporto RP-188 (ex TECHnical RECommendations) della UE inerente l’armonizzazione del settore della dosimetria interna, bande di incertezza, nuovo approccio ai casi di impiego della DTPA.
Biota non umano: cenni di dosimetria su biota non umani secondo approccio ICRP-136. Impostazione di calcolo per alcuni scenari espositivi.
Esercitazioni: calcolo di dose impegnata di individui contaminati in seguito ad eventi incidentali reali come da database internazionali.
Organizzazione dell’insegnamento: la presenza alle lezioni è fortemente consigliata ed è obbligatoria per le esercitazioni che si terranno nella parte finale.
L'organizzazione dell'insegnamento prevede inoltre una visita presso i laboratori di dosimetria interna ed ambientale del JRC di Ispra.
Radioprotezione Avanzata:
Lo smantellamento degli impianti nucleari: Analisi degli obiettivi da perseguire, delle tempistiche e delle fasi previste nelle attività di decommissioning di un impianto nucleare. Rassegna delle tecniche di taglio applicabili e loro classificazione in base alla tipologia, al materiale da sezionare, ai rifiuti secondari generati, alla possibilità di remotizzarle e al costo. Rassegna delle tecniche di decontaminazione sui differenti materiali prima e dopo il sezionamento. Fattori che condizionano l'applicazione o meno di un processo di decontaminazione e la scelta della tecnica migliore. Gestione dei materiali di risulta.
I rifiuti radioattivi: classificazione dei rifiuti alla luce della normativa italiana. Principali tecniche commerciali per il trattamento e condizionamento dei rifiuti radioattivi a bassa e media attività. Le principali tipologie di deposito e la scelta italiana per il Deposito Nazionale. Rifiuti radioattivi che non possono trovare una collocazione definitiva nel futuro Deposito Nazionale.
Le Salvaguardie nucleari: IAEA e EURATOM, sistema delle salvaguardie internazionali basato su contabilità ed ispezioni. Regime di contabilità e reportistica richiesta da EURATOM nel contesto delle salvaguardie, Protocollo Aggiuntivo alle salvaguardie nucleari. Salvaguardie nazionali, analisi degli obiettivi sensibili, della loro suscettibilità e delle possibili azioni. Tecniche di misura non distruttive impiegate nelle salvaguardie internazionali.
La presenza di materiali radioattivi nell’industria convenzionale: problema delle sorgenti orfane e del rischio che queste possano inconsapevolmente entrare in cicli produttivi convenzionali. Tecniche di monitoraggio e valutazione dei rischi in assenza di allarmi ai presidi radiometrici e in caso di incidente radiologico. La dispersione di radiofarmaci nell'ambiente dovuta agli escreti di pazienti trattati per diagnosi o terapia e le problematiche derivanti. Problematiche legate alla presenza di NORM (radionuclidi presenti nell'ambiente con concentrazione naturale) nell’industria.
Schermature: si illustreranno le metodiche di calcolo delle schermature e barriere per le radiazioni ionizzanti (beta, gamma, fasci X, neutroni) analizzando anche le installazioni di acceleratori fino a 10MeV e le problematiche oltre i 10MeV.
Seminari specialistici su tematiche di trasporto del materiale radioattivo, radioprotezione presso depositi di combustibile, la gestione nazionale delle emergenze nucleari, aspetti di radioprotezione nelle attività sanitarie e nel settore NORM, a seconda delle disponibilità annuali costituiranno alternativa ad attività di laboratorio sperimentale specificatamente elaborate per la caratterizzazione dei rifiuti radioattivi e NORM.
L'organizzazione dell'insegnamento prevede inoltre una visita presso l'impianto elettronucleare di Caorso e/o il Deposito Avogadro di Saluggia.
Il modulo prevede 1 CFU erogato in modalità di didattica in flipped classroom.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Dosimetria Interna:
L’esame consiste nella presentazione di elaborati di calcolo volti a determinare la dose efficace impegnata da soggetti coinvolti in attività routinarie o incidentali motivando, passo-passo, le soluzioni adottate e la procedura seguita.
Lo studente dovrà altresì dimostrare capacità di ragionamento critico sullo studio realizzato, esponendo con competenza e proprietà lessicale specialistica la descrizione delle operazioni svolte.
In qualunque momento, a valle del termine dell’insegnamento, lo studente o gruppo di studenti (max 2 persone per gruppo) può richiedere il testo del problema e riconsegnarlo una volta svolto. Successivamente verrà fissato un incontro per l’esposizione orale, coerentemente con le date di appello disponibili.
Radioprotezione Avanzata:
La verifica prevede una prova orale finale, durante la quale verrà valutata la capacità di illustrare gli argomenti e la proprietà di linguaggio specialistico. L'esame ha sempre inizio con l'esposizione di un argomento a scelta del candidato tra quelli trattati durante le lezioni/seminari. Le successive domande, oltre ai concetti teorici presentati, si basano spesso su ipotetici ma realistici scenari che si possono verificare nelle attività illustrate durante le lezioni; verrà chiesto al candidato di individuare le principali problematiche di radioprotezione che si possono verificare e le modalità per affrontarle.
Nel rispondere, lo studente deve dimostrare di aver acquisito uno spirito critico e pratico nell'affrontare le diverse problematiche di radioprotezione.
Lo studente deve dimostrare di conoscere le diverse tecniche e tecnologie illustrate e di saper individuare la migliore per i casi particolari prospettati.

To provide the main tools in dynamical systems and mathematical control theory, enabling students to address control problems of interest in applied sciences, by using the concepts learned during the course.
This course explores the fundamental mathematical principles and methods used to analyze and design control systems which are necessary tools in the design and management of systems that stem from sciences, technology, industry, or services.
Control theory analyzes properties of controlled systems, i.e., dynamic systems which can be acted upon by means of a control (or command).
The aim is to transform the system from an initial state to a particular end-state, respecting certain criteria, we might aim to stabilize the system in order to make it resistant to certain disruptions or to determine optimal solutions for a particular optimization criterion (optimal control).
Students of this course can profit of their training both in academic and in modern industry, in specialized fields such as aeronautics, aerospace, robotics, but also in life sciences, where the knowledge of the mathematical tools employed in control could help to better understand problems encountered to design, build, and optimize, or at least improve existing methods. From the mathematical point of view, due to the wide range of applications of control systems, both models involving ODEs and models involving PDEs are needed. The main part of the course deals with dynamical systems of ODEs. Control theory for PDEs is a wide field of study and research. Students will be introduced in this framework by means of some specific examples, as diffusion problems and vibrating phenomena, where they can exploit the main techniques employed to study controlled PDEs, largely used in applied sciences.

By the end of the course, students know classical problems of control theory governed by ordinary differential equations (ODEs). They also know examples of control problems involving partial differential equations (PDEs), of very large interest in various applied sciences.
Applications studied during the course include: fuel optimal landing of a space vehicle, minimum drag nose shape problem, boat guidance in a river, reproductive strategies in social insects (in the framework of controlled ODEs), heating or cooling a building in an optimal way, stabilization and controllability of a string (in the PDEs framework).
In reference to the Dublin indicators, the course emphasises:
DD1 – Knowledge and Understanding
The student will be able to clearly explain, using rigorous mathematical language, the definitions and theorems related to the course syllabus provided by the instructor.
DD2 – Applying Knowledge and Understanding
The student will be able to:
analytically use tools from control theory to various types of differential equations and systems;
set up an optimisation problem.
DD5 – Learning Skills
The nature of the subject, together with the structure of the course and the examination, is designed to foster and assess the student's learning abilities. In addition, the teaching approach adopted encourages students to develop independent learning skills and become more autonomous learners.

1. Dynamical systems. Linear systems of ODEs: general results and structure, exponential matrix. Asymptotic behavior of dynamical systems, stability (linearization, Lyapunov method), phase portraits.
2. Control Systems and asymptotic stabilization. Examples, reachable sets, linear systems, local controllability of nonlinear systems, bang-bang theorem. Stabilization of linear and nonlinear control systems.
3. Optimal control. Existence of Optimal Controls for Mayer problems and the problem of Bolza. Necessary conditions for the optimality: the Pontryagin Maximum Principle. Linear quadratic optimal control. Sufficient Conditions. Dynamic Programming. The linear quadratic case.
4. An introduction to control for partial differential equations. Controllability and stabilization of the wave and the heat equations. Optimal control for PDE’s, an introduction.
5. Further topics. Seminar of experts and students on recent advances in mathematical control theory, dealing e.g., with control problems for multiagent systems, traffic models, moving sets.
The 5cfu version of the course consists in the points 1, 2, 3, 5 of the above program.

Altro
In dependence of the number of students, several options are possibile:
Evaluation during lectures, depending on their participation. The students will be asked to contribute actively by preparing expositions and solving exercises.
Oral examination with, possibly, a preliminary presentation of some specific topic of the course or written exercises.
These options will be clarified during the first week of the course.

Bressan, Piccoli, Introduction to Mathematical Theory of Control, AIMS Book Series, 2007
Cannarsa, Gazzola, Dynamic Optimization for Beginners, EMS Press
Evans, An introduction to mathematical control theory, Berkley, Lecture notes
Li, Yong, Optimal Control Theory for Infinite-Dimensional Systems, Birkhäuser, Boston, 199

The course operates within the stream of structural analysis disciplines, focusing on procedures for computing the response of linear discretized systems to dynamic loads. The main purpose is to bridge the gap between rigorous procedures for writing and integrating the equations of motions and design procedures which are adopted, at various level of refinement, in the design of civil engineering structures against environmental and antropic dynamic loading conditions.
Whithin this framework, the course aims at:

• developing a strong theoretical background in the field of modelling structural problems related to dynamic loads, addressing both loading and structural representation, with reference to both deterministic and probabilistic frameworks,
• developing a strong background about the procedures for computing, from the above models, the structural response to dynamic loads, especially focusing on applications to seismic, wind and offshore engineering and to problems related to machine foundations,
• developing, justifying and commenting the procedures which are adopted, at different levels of complexity, in structural design applications addressing dynamic actions applied to civil engineering structures and infrastructures.

The students are expected to gain confidence and insight into the numerical and experimental techniques currently employed in civil engineering dynamics. The first part of the course is devoted to the development of linear vibration theory within a classical deterministic context; in the second part, applications to wind, seismic and offshore engineering are developed within the probabilistic framework typical of modern codes and recommendations.
Within this framework the expected learning achievements are as follows
knowledge and understanding
after having attended the course and passed the exam, the student is expected
1 - to know the principles and fundamental methods for developing discretized models of structural dynamics problems,
2 - to know the principles and fundamental methods for solving the equations of motion of discretized systems under the mosto common dynamic loading conditions applied to civil engineering structures,
3 - to possess adequate knowledge of the general procedures which are at the basis of the development of modern procedures for automatic computer based simulation of dynamic structural response,
4 - to possess adequate knowledge about the methods for modelling dynamic loading and response as random processes, and about the way in which they are reflected by modern codes addressing dynamic loads,
5 - to possess a basic knowledge about field measurment procedures in vibration analysis.
applying knowledge and understanding
after having attended the course and passed the exam, the student is expected
6 - to manage simple hand procedures for the estimation of dynamic response, to be used for preliminary design and for checking the results obtained by refined procedures,
7 - to manage refined simulations of the dynamic response of linear discretized systems, by consciously employing available software packages,
8 - to apply modern codes and procedures for structural design in seismic, wind and offshore engineering contexts,
9 - to analyze the results of field measument of vibration.

Equations of motion for linear discretized systems.
Lagrange equations. Discretization methods: lumped mass and assumed-mode methods. Viscous damping. Cases of rotating masses and moving reference.
One-degree-of-freedom systems.
Free vibration. Harmonic forces: transient and steady state response, frequency response function, magnification factor. Dynamic equilibrium; Argand diagrams. Arbitrary forces: Duhamel integral, numerical step-by-step analysis, frequency domain analysis.
Multi-degree-of-freedom systems.
Free vibration. Properties of eigenpairs. Modal superposition analysis for undamped and damped systems. The case of seismic actions; response Spectrum method. Direct methods; frequency analysis, numerical integration in time and frequency domain. Application of harmonic analysis to the case of machine foundations.
Elements of random vibration analysis.
Modelling dynamic actions as stochastic stationary processes: direct and cross spectral densities, extreme values. Response of linear systems to reandom excitation, applications to seismic, wind and offshore engineering.
Modelling of dynamic forces due to fluid-structure interaction.
Morison equation for slender bodies. Aerodynamic (wind) actions and hydrodynamic (waves-current) actions on structures. Linearization of drag forces due to turbulent wind. Aerodynamic damping. Equivalent static forces: dynamic coefficient. Excitation due to vortex shedding.
Vibration measure and analysis.
Vibrometers, measurement chains, harmonic analysis of vibration.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
The exam evaluation is based on:

• The solution of "takehome" problems, to be performed by the students along the course.
• The results of a written exam in which an exercise (e.g. equations of motion of a simple system), similar to the takehome ones, will have to be solved in class.
• A final oral exam, encompassing a practical question and some questions related to the theoretical/metodological aspects of the course.
  The takehome problems focus on the verification of learning objectives 1,2, 4 and 6; these shall be presented in HANDWRITTEN form by the students, and will be collected by the instructors before the written exam part.
  The written exam part focuses on the verification of learning objectives 1,2 and 6; the results of this part will serve as admission to the oral exam part.
  The oral exam part aims at veryfying all the expected achievements; some, or all, questions of the oral exam can be substituted by written questions at the discretion of the instructors.

L. Meirovitch, Elements of Vibration Analysis, Editore: McGraw-Hill
M. Geradin, D. J. Rixen, Mechanical Vibrations: Theory and Application to Structural Dynamics, Editore: Wiley, ISBN: 978-1-118-90020-8
A. Preumont, Twelve Lectures on Structural Dynamics, Editore: Springer https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-94-007-6383-8

The objective of the class is to raise awareness about the current changes in terms of energy production and uses due to pollution, raising costs of fossil fuels and other raw materials and their depletion as well as the resulting EU policies. This is inducing rapid societal and economical changes that bring, at the same time, challenges and opportunities for the next generations of engineers. Starting from the current situation in terms of energy use and its recent evolution, to finally reach the ideal of a circular economy, many issues need to be overcome. Green electricity is not easily storable and thus, electrochemical energy storage and conversion is a necessary part of the equation.

DD1: knowledge and understanding
Lectures and tutoring sessions will allow students to:

• learn the problematics of energy consumption vs. production of goods, quality of life and pollution;
• learn the approaches proposed to lower emissions and the challenges that the energy transition brings;
• learn what is the place of electrochemical energy storage in the energy transition and the value chain of batteries from mining to recycling;
• learn the EoL approaches to batteries and accumulators;
• learn the fundamentals of Life Cycle Thinking as applied to the field of energy storage.
  DD2/4: ability to apply knowledge and understanding/communication skills
  Students that successfully pass the exam:
• are able to assess the sustainability of energy production considering the whole value chain;
• are aware of the technical and societal challenges that need to be addressed to significantly lower emissions;
• know the directions in terms of development and investment in the energy sector (production and storage) pursued by EU policies;
• know the different scale of energy storage needed and the position of electrochemical energy storage in the mix;
• are able to prepare a report on the concepts learnt and discuss it critically.

New regulation and sustainability of electrochemical energy storage in the energy transition (2 CFU)

• Introduction to the electrochemical storage options;
• the EU battery and accumulators directive (2006/66/EC): primary and secondary legislation;
• framework of the new EU battery regulation: EU Grean Deal, Circular Economy Action Plan, proposal for a new regulation on batteries and waste batteries;
• End of Life of accumulators;
• recycling and reuse of waste batteries: technologies and market perspectives;
• Life Cycle Thinking;
• Product Environmental Footprint Category Rules for batteries: Carbon Footprint of batteries and their role in the decarbonisation;
• Life Cycle Assessment of batteries and capacitors: state-of-the-art.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Report on a specific topic to be submitted before the exam and presentation with the support of electronic media during the oral examination.

Goal of the course is to provide a basic knowledge of the most significant use of sensors, circuits, electronics systems in the biomedical instrumentation, starting from recalling the basic principles of the instrument/technique and then analysing and designing the sensors and electronics circuits employed in the instrument. The tipologies of instruments considered in the course are: conventional and advanced instrumentation for the analysis of signals of biological origin, systems for medical imaging based on the use of radiation (X and gamma rays). Special focus of the course will regard application of microelectronic circuits, as prosthetic devices (cochlear implant, artificial retina) and integrated readout circuits for signal processing in medical imaging. The course includes also two laboratories, one concerning the implementation of neural networks for processing detector signals in medical imaging, the second concerning the experimental measurements of gamma-ray coincidences (PET principle).

Knowledge and understanding
After passing the exam, the student:
knows the fundamental principles, concepts and basic implementations of sensors, circuits and electronic systems used in biomedical instrumentation
knows how to define specifications of sensors, circuits and electronic systems to be used in biomedical instrumentation
knows the main guidelines to design electronics circuits to be used in biomedical instrumentation, including attention to electronics noise performances, bandwidth and power requirements
knows the main potential and limitations of using microelectronics design to realize electronics circuits for biomedical applications
Applying knowledge and understanding
After passing the exam, the student:
is able to define the specifications of sensors, circuits and electronic systems to be used in biomedical instrumentation
is able to select technologies and methodologies to obtain solutions to problems regarding sensors, circuits and electronic systems to be used in biomedical instrumentation
is able to design electronics circuits or systems for processing signals of biological origin or for medical imaging
is able to evaluate measured performances of an electronic circuit or system used in biomedical instrumentation

I part – Electronics for processing biological signals
1) Origin of biological signals. Principle of electrocardiography (ECG) and requirements for the electronics. Electrodes.
2) Circuits for the amplification and filtering of biological potentials. Application to the electrocardiography: basic parameters and design issues (noise, insulation and protection techniques, common-mode and interferences rejection). The Instrumentation Amplifier: application to ECG.
3) The electronics of the pacemaker: basic functionalities, batteries, amplification circuits, pulses generators, telemetry. Generation of pulses larger than the battery voltage. Charge pumps. Amplifiers based on switched-capacitor topologies.
4) Design example of an ultra low-noise Instrumentation Amplifier for biosignals: architecture and noise analysis.
5) Microelectronics prostheses: cochlear implant and artificial retina.
II part – Electronics for medical imaging systems
1) Basics on medical imaging systems based on the use of X and gamma rays. Digital radiography, computed tomography (CT), SPECT and PET. Figures of merit: efficiency, resolution, signal/noise ratio. The PET time-of-flight (TOF).
2) Fundamentals of detectors for medical imaging. The Anger Camera. Scintillators coupled to photodetectors. Estimation methods for reconstructing the event in the detector (centroid, maximum likelihood, neural networks). The Silicon Photomultipliers (SiPMs) and their readout electronics. Gamma cameras for SPECT and PET. Potential and challenges of PET-TOF.
3) Integrated circuits for medical imaging. Electronics noise and its representation by means of the equivalent noise charge. The charge preamplifier and the optimization of the input transistor. The shaping amplifier. The peak stretcher. The baseline holder.
4) Timing techniques: leading edge, constant fraction discriminator, zero-crossing discriminator. Time-to-amplitude converter (TAC) and Time-to-digital converter (TDC).
5) Digital Radiography and Photon Counting Computed Tomography.
Laboratories
1) Design and optimization of neural networks for processing detector signals in medical imaging (3 hours)
2) Experimental measurements of gamma-ray coincidences (PET principle) (3 hours).

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination is based on a oral exam only. The exam will consist in a discussion on two topics, one chosen about the first part of the course and one about the second part. After a general exposition of the topic requested, further questions may be more focused on specific details in order to better evaluate the depth of knowledge of the student about the topic under discussion. Schematics of the main circuits explained during the lessons are supposed to be described autonomously by the student.
A list of possible dates (about six per call) are provided in advance to the students to facilitate the choice of the day for the oral exam. Only one date can be chosen for each call (appello), but with possibility to modify the choice. The student can decline the proposed mark, if considered not satisfactory, without any penalty for the next calls. Tutorials to clarify course topics and individual student questions will be also organize during each call session.

J.G.Webster, Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design, Editore: John Wiley and Sons, Anno edizione: 2010
J.G.Webster, Design of Cardiac Pacemakers, Editore: IEEE
Smith and Webb, Introduction to medical imaging, Editore: Cambridge, Anno edizione: 2011
Krzysztof Iniewski, Medical Imaging: Principles, Detectors and Electronics, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2009
M.Nakhostin, Signal processing for radiation detectors, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2017
Angelo Rivetti, CMOS: Front-End Electronics for Radiation Sensors, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2015

L'insegnamento si propone di fornire competenze relative alle applicazioni della superconduttività nella realizzazione di intensi campi magnetici per ricerca in fisica e particolarmente per acceleratori di particelle. La prima parte del corso riprende aspetti di termodinamica classica utili alla comprensione di base della superconduttività e ai principi per raggiungere le basse temperature. Nella seconda parte si dà una descrizione delle proprietà di trasporto della corrente nei superconduttori. Nell'ultima parte si affrontano i problemi relativi alla progettazione e realizzazione di magneti superconduttivi.
Insegnamento erogato dall'Università degli Studi di Milano. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare il sito di UNIMI al seguente link: https://www.unimi.it/it/corsi/insegnamenti-dei-corsi-di-laurea

Il corso affronta le principali questioni teoriche relative all'innovazione socio-tecnica (quali i concetti di base dell'innovazione tecnologica, le dinamiche di diffusione delle innovazioni, i limiti del determinismo tecnologico, l'agency degli oggetti tecnologici, la flessibilità interpretativa della tecnologia, genere e tecnologia) e analizza esempi rilevanti di tecnologie d'avanguardia che hanno un impatto sulla società e sulla vita umana, come l'Internet delle cose, la fabbricazione digitale, la realtà aumentata e l'intelligenza artificiale. Anziché focalizzarsi sul loro funzionamento, le prestazioni e i problemi tecnici, il corso affronterà le questioni etiche che esse sollevano e gli impatti sociali che producono.

The main objective of the course is to study the climate change challenge using quantitative, numerical tools. Specifically, the aim is to learn the basic elements of the global energy and climate problems, evaluate the solutions with a focus on the energy sector, and use optimization and simulation models to evaluate the emission reduction and adaptation strategies.
To do so, a discussion of the fundamentals of the global economy, energy, land and climate systems will be complemented by development and applications of mathematical models integrating these key components. The course will also involve programming languages used in energy-climate planning, such as AMPL and python, among others.
The course uses innovative teaching methods, in particular, it is a flipped classroom course: students will form groups of 4-5 and work on projects to improve one or more numerical models to deal with climate change solutions, either on mitigation or adaptation.
Students based in Leonardo (e.g., Mathematical Engineers) may attend part of the course virtually.

At the end of course, students will be able to:

• Explain the foundations of climate science / climate change and how climate change affects energy and economic systems
• Describe the main historical landmarks of climate- energy policy (IPCC)
• Explain the link between climate change and energy systems
• Discuss advantages and limitations of the different mitigation and adaptation strategies
• Describe the different components of an energy system
• Distinguish between major modeling paradigms (IAMs, bottom-up and top-down energy models, etc.) and choose the appropriate type of model for a given question
• Answer specific questions using optimization models and critically interpret / analyse results
• Translate a real-world problem into an optimization formulation
• Write a mathematical model in a specific programming language
• Identify the main sources of uncertainty and calculate their impact on model outcomes
• Present a project in class, and thus create a presentation and be able to communicate it properly

The specific list of topics is as follows
Topic 1: Introduction to the climate change challenge: physics and causes of climate change, consequences and impacts.
Topic 2: Global energy and climate policies and agreements
Topic 3: The role of technology in climate change mitigation
Topic 4: Fundamentals of continuous and discrete optimization
Topic 5: Mathematical modeling and optimization using AMPL
Topic 6: Fundamentals of climate economics
Topic 7: Introducing the tools of Integrated Assessment Models
Topic 8: The simplest integrated energy-economy-climate model: the DICE model
Topic 9: Introduction to energy systems
Topic 10: Energy models: EnergyScope and PyPSA
Topic 11: Climate risks, adaptation and climate engineering
Topic 12: Accounting for risks and uncertainty: sensitivity and uncertainty analysis methods, stochastic and robust optimization

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Final grade will be based on two main components. A group project which involves model development and presentation during the course lectures. An additional written exam which will be done during the standard exams timeline.
1) Model development and group presentation (2/3): This will be done in class during the course, and we will evaluate both the modeling work as well as the communication skills. In particular, the teacher will assess the relevance of the chosen project, the validity of the software development (also looking at the code) as well as the presentation and oral skills.
2) Written exam (1/3): This will test knowledge of programming and of the theoretical concepts. The theoretical questions will cover the topics examined in class.

Global Energy Assessment - Toward a Sustainable Future, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2012 http://www.globalenergyassessment.org/
IPCC 6th assessment report, Anno edizione: 2023 https://www.ipcc.ch/assessment-report/ar6/
DICE 2013 http://www.econ.yale.edu/~nordhaus/homepage/documents/DICE_Manual_100413r1.pdf
The AMPL Book https://ampl.com/resources/books/ampl-book/

The goal of the course is providing the students with the knowledge and the competence to understand inherently, design preliminarily (i.e. employing only paper, pencil and a calculator), model accurately (i.e. employing also a computer and a simulation code), and optimize conventional and unconventional power plants from energy, economic, environmental and technical perspectives. The goal is pursued by way of traditional teaching methods as well as of innovative ones including mandatory and non-mandatory small-group activities.

Regarding conventional power plants, the student will be able to:
describe the modelling approaches for the working fluids, the main equipment (like heat exchangers and turbomachines) and the single as well as overall process;
explain the typical choices of the design parameters for working fluids, operating conditions, main equipment, and processes;
sketch the cycles and the processes on selected thermodynamic charts as well as on the process flow diagrams (also referred to as layouts);
compute and comment the typical performances and irreversibilities of the main equipment and the processes.
Moreover, regarding conventional and unconventional power plants, he/she will be able to:
select the most promising layouts for diverse hot sources and/or cold sinks;
size with a good approximation the main equipment (like heat exchangers and turbomachines);
predict the performances in on- and off-design operation of the main equipment and the processes;
mitigate the typical irreversibilities of the main equipment and the processes.
Lastly, he/she will be able to:
improve autonomously and continuously the detailed knowledge in power plants;
read and understand generic industrial processes other than power plants;
develop new concepts for power plants and industrial processes.

The course covers the electricity generation in power plants, focusing in particular on the inherent relation among working fluids, thermodynamic cycles and main equipment. Thermodynamic and technical aspects are addressed in details, whereas economic, management, environmental, and strategic aspects are presented as necessary. The developed concepts can be applied indifferently to fossil fuel-fired power plants, as well as to waste-heat-recovery systems, renewable sources like biomass, biogas, biomethane and concentrated solar, and also to generic industrial processes.
The course comprises lectures, numerical exercise hours, project work hours (developing own or employing existing simulation codes), and technical visits at equipment manufacturers and power plants (if possible). Part of the course (1 credit) is provided as innovative learning, through these project works that are mandatory and that are solved by students in teams, for which guidelines are provided, and optional assigned homeworks solved also in teams, which are anyhow discussed in class with the participation of the students.
The specific topics are as follows, some of which provided by way of the group activities.
Working fluids: Thermodynamic properties. Ideal gases and real fluids (vapors and liquids); phase change; combustion and fuels, both fossil and renewable; influence on the design of turbomachines, heat exchanger, and power plant (conventional and unconventional cycles, open and closed cycles).
Power plants: Second-law analysis. Energy as well as entropy balances of diverse power plants (open and close, fossil and renewable); physical meaning of entropy; matching of the heat source and the cycles; irreversibilities; first and second-law performances.
2.a. Advanced gas turbines and combined cycle. Historical evolution and state-of-the-art of gas turbines; second-law analysis and future developments.
2.b. Advanced steam power plants. Historical evolution of pulverized-coal power plants; focus on ultra-supercritical power plants; second-law analysis; control logics, plant governing, and emission abetment; future developments.
2.c. Off-design operation. Characteristic behavior and curves of equipment (pumps, compressors, expanders, and heat exchangers). Estimate of power plant behavior at part-load and at different ambient conditions. Controlling of power plant.
2.d. Nuclear power plants (provided at the end of the course). Overview of nuclear reactors; choice of nuclear source, moderating fluid, cooling fluid and thermodynamic cycle; overview of nuclear power plants; choice of operational parameters for selected technologies.
Turbomachinery: One-dimension analysis. Geometries and definitions; stage optimization by way of free variable, objective functions and constraints; velocity triangles and limits related to transonic and supersonic flows; effect of geometrical parameters on stage efficiency; similitude theory and influence of the working fluid on the geometry and performance.
Class notes are provided at the beginning of the course, presentations will be published during the course as well as the prject work hours, and specific readings (in addition to the bibliography listed below) will be suggested throughout the course.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam comprises both a written examination as well as an oral examination, for Energy Conversion A, or the grading of the project work reports, Energy Conversion B.
The written examination covers lectures (excluding closed gas cycles and nuclear power plants), exercises and projects. The written examination includes 2 exercises requiring a complete numerical solution and 4 questions requiring a theoretical argumentation. The numerical exercises are structured in a sequence of tasks, each graded singularly. The written examination assesses the capability to:
sketch cycles and diagrams of conventional and unconventional power plants,
explain the choices for the design parameters,
size the equipment,
predict the performances,
quantify the irreversibilities.
For Energy Conversion A, the oral examination covers lectures and computer labs; in particular, written technical reports describing the solution and commenting the results of the assigned project works must be presented at the oral examination. The oral examination assesses the capability to:
sketch cycles and diagrams of conventional and unconventional power plants,
describe the modelling approaches,
justify the typical performances,
mitigate the irreversibilities.
Alternatively, for Energy Conversion B, the grading of the project work reports is based on:
clarity of writing,
clearness of figures and tables,
completeness of the results,
depth of the comments,
overall quality.
The final grade is generated in a sequence of steps. First, the written examination grade is in 30ths and is expressed with decimals. The minimum written examination grade to proceed to the oral examination is 15.00. Bonus points may be gained with non-mandatory activities and added on top of the written examination grade if positive. The oral examination or report grading generates a grade variation within ±5.00 with respect to the written examination grade. Merit grade (laude) is only upon examiner’s evaluation at the oral examination.
Note, for Energy Conversion A, the oral examination calendar is published after the written examination grades are published. All publication are online and announced by email. Examinee can choose an oral examination appointment on their preference from the available ones by signing up online. Importantly, the oral examination must be taken in the same session as the written examination.
If the oral examination calendar of a given session includes the written examination of the following session, students can take the new written examination before taking the oral examination and decide whether to hand it; in case they do, the new written examination grade overrides the previous. This happens for the January-February as well as June-July sessions, but not for the September session.
Important: students must be enrolled in the examination call in order to take the written examination. No enrolment no examination!

M.J. Moran, H.N. Shapiro, D.D. Boettner, M.B. Bailey, Principles of Engineering Thermodynamics, 8th Edition SI Version, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-1-118-96088-2
E.P. Gyftopoulos, G.P. Beretta,, Thermodynamics: Foundations and Applications, Editore: Dover publications, Anno edizione: 2005 https://ebookcentral.proquest.com/lib/polimi/detail.action?docID=4890763
P. Kiameh, Power Generation Handbook. 2nd EditionPower Generation Handbook. 2nd Edition, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2011
2. W.C. Reynolds, P. Colonna, Thermodynamics - Fundamentals and Engineering Applications, Editore: Cambridge University Presso, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 9780521862738

Technical issues have been playing a relevant role in forensic practice and represent an important aid to those who administer Justice. The typical engineering methods represent a large part of the forensic sciences, and technical experts' role has steadily gained importance in the last decades.
Justice has always sought certain means to assess the factual truth to render fair verdicts. To the investigators and triers of facts, science and techniques appear like the optimal tools to provide a certain representation of facts, based on scientific and irrefutable data.
Unfortunately, science and technique have their own limitations and they can only provide limited information on the events they model. This means that every decision taken based on a scientific judgment of facts has an intrinsic risk of being not fully correct, and it is important, from both the technical and ethical points of view, to consider such limitations.
The objective of this course is to frame the role of the technical experts inside the judicial proceedings and explain how the implicit doubts in the result of every piece of evidence collected through scientific and technical activities shall be quantified and presented to the triers of facts to explain them the risk of a wrong decision.
In this respect, forensic metrology is the branch of forensic science capable of providing a pondered answer to these issues not hiding the important, implicit limits of every technical assessment of the facts to the triers of facts, thus avoiding ethical and penal implications and will be covered by this course.
According to the topics covered by this course, it appears to be in line with UN SDG 16.

After attending this course, students are expected to gain basic knowledge of the legal proceedings, and in particular that required to serve as technical experts, both those appointed by the judge and those appointed by the parties.
They will also build competencies on how to report the results of their technical activities, so that they can be fully understood by the legal counterpart (judges, prosecutors, lawyers, jurors), including the implications related to the limited validity. This part will be covered from a theoretical perspective, providing the technical tools needed to identify the sources of uncertainty and quantify their effects on the validity of the provided expertise as well as the risk of issuing a wrong decision based on such expertise. Practical cases will be then presented and the students will be involved in simulating possible cases in team works.
The Dubliner descriptors associated with this course are DD1, DD2, DD3, and DD4.

The following main topics will be covered:
An overview of the legal systems and legal proceedings
The role of the technical experts inside the legal proceedings
The validation of the results returned by the scientific investigations (in the case of crimes) or scientific analysis of the issues that triggered the legal proceeding (n the case of litigations)
The concept of uncertainty in the expression of experimental results
Methods to evaluate the risk of wrong decision when the decision is based on experimental results
The method for ensuring scientific validity to forensic-science methods
All the above points will be covered also by referring to real cases that will be extensively discussed during classes, showing how a more correct evaluation of the scientific evidence might have avoided cases of miscarriage of justice.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists of a final oral test, during which the students will be asked to present and discuss the topics covered during the course and show their ability to apply them to a hypothetical case study (DD1, DD2, DD3, and DD4).
If the students wish to prepare a written report on a case of their knowledge, analyzing and discussing how the scientific evidence contributed to the solution of the case, the discussion of such a report will be part of the exam and will replace one of the questions asked. The report can be prepared and submitted prior to the exam, but its submission is not mandatory. There is no penalty for not submitting such a report.
In general, the student should prove its ability to discuss the requirements scientific evidence must satisfy, the capability of identifying the origin of uncertainty contributions in the different steps in which scientific evidence is formed, evaluating them and presenting them to the trier of fact, in order to present and quantify a possible doubt about the validity of the collected evidence.

Alessandro Ferrero, Veronica Scotti, Forensic Metrology: An Introduction to the Fundamentals of Metrology for Judges, Lawyers and Forensic Scientists, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 978-3-031-14618-3 https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-3-031-14619-0

This course deals with the application of ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by technology. This course aims at showing how the decision to develop a technology (meant at large), the processes of its design, development, management, control, and production are inherently moral. It is intended to give students a chance to reflect on the ethical, social, and cultural impact of technological applications (in particular AI).
The course includes lectures by the instructor and invited lecturers; class participation will be expected, and students should apply what they learn through reading, lectures, and class discussions by looking at current events through an ethical lens.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of science and technology;
Be acquainted with normative ethics and normative argumentation;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent in some technological applications;
Be able to understand how technical problems are inherently connected to a social dimension within a socio-technical perspective.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in clarifying and ethically analyzing case-studies involving technology;
Be able to apply ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by current technologies;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for solving or diminishing existing and emerging ethical and social problems.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To autonomously analyze the ethical issues of a technology and to develop a critical analysis on that;
To evaluate and select the appropriate knowledge in the effort of elaborating and justifying a philosophical argument on a topic autonomously selected.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Exercise and improve their skills in a critical writing;
Present in an effective way the results of their research, being able to justify their choices.
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be better prepared to their future professional life in an ethically and socially responsible way;
Be able to analyze problems through an ethical lens.

The course will cover different topics both from a theoretical and a more practical point of view. We will start with a broad analysis of the concept of responsibility, in particular in an engineering perspective, and of normative ethics and its tools. We will discuss ethical questions in the design of technology with a focus on Design Ethics and its Social Ethics paradigm. Then ethics in IT-configured societies will be discussed and technology as the instrumentation of human action will be presented. Topics will include, for instance, the novel framework of Responsible Research and Innovation, Value-Sensitive design, the ethical aspects of technicolgical risks, the relationship among sustainability, ethics and technology, information flow, privacy, and values and uncertainty
Students will be supervised in class sessions in the development of the individual final essay in order to meet the standards required by scientific publications.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Collective presentations
Students are encouraged to:
Develop an argument in which the presented claims are justified by the use of ethical argumentation and the relevant literature;
To present this argument in an oral presentation in class in front of the instructor and their student colleagues.
1, 3
4, 5
Individual written essay
The individual final essay must show that the student has the capacity to read and carefully study the suggested bibliography and the ability to apply it to case-studies;
The individual final essay will be about the ethical issues associated to technologies that require to have developed critical skills in analyzing technical problems with the tools provided by ethical theories and argumentation.
1, 2
3, 4, 5

Ibo van de Poel, Lambèr Royakkers, Ethics, Technology, and Engineering: An Introduction (second edition), Editore: Wiley-Blackwell, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 978-1-119-87943-5
Mattia Andreoletti, Daniele Chiffi, Philosophy of Risk, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2027
Note: If not yet published, an advanced draft of the book will be made available to students.
Behnam Taebi, Ethics and Engineering. An Introduction, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9781316628409

This course deals with the application of ethical theories to problems created, aggravated, or transformed by technology (broadly construed). It aims at showing how the processes of technology design, development, management, control, and production are i nherently moral. It intends to give students a chance, and the proper conceptual resources, to reflect on the ethical, social, and cultural impact of technological applications.
The course includes lectures by the instructor, workshops, and student presentations. Class participation is warmly encouraged. Students are expected to critically reflect on what they learn during the course, share ideas and insights during class discussions and activities, and put theory into practice.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of science and technology;
Be acquainted with normative ethics and normative argumentation;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent in some technological applications;
Be able to understand how technical problems are inherently connected to a social dimension within a socio-technical perspective.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in clarifying and ethically analyzing case-studies involving technology;
Be able to apply ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by current technologies;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for solving or diminishing existing and emerging ethical and social problems.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To autonomously and critically analyze the ethical issues raised by a given technology;
To evaluate and select the appropriate knowledge in the effort of elaborating and justifying a philosophical argument on a topic autonomously selected.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Exercise and improve their skills in a critical writing;
Present in an effective way the results of their research, being able to justify their choices.
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be better prepared to their future professional life in an ethically and socially responsible way;
Be able to analyze problems through an ethical lens.

The course will cover different topics both from a theoretical and a more practical point of view. After a broad introduction on the ethical significance of Technology and Engineering, the course will first discuss traditional topics in Engineering Ethics, such as Professional Ethics, the notion of Responsibility, the Problem of Many Hands, and Whistleblowing. Secondly, the course will focus on Technology Ethics by analyzing the Non-Neutrality of Technology, Value Mediation, and Design Ethics. Once the ethical significance of Engineering and Technology is clarified, the course will provide tools to appropriately discuss moral problems by introducing Normative Ethical Theories (Consequentialism, Deontology, Virtue Ethics) and specifying their function in Applied Ethics. As a conclusive step, the overarching value of Sustainability will be examined, its main components investigated, and related ethical challenges debated.
Workshop activities held throughout the course will explore the most fundamental notion of Technological Mediation.
Class sessions will be dedicated to supervise students in the development of the individual final essay in order for it to meet the standards required by scientific publications.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, con revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Altro
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Collective presentations
[Mandatory only for 5 CFU]
Students are encouraged to:
Develop an argument in which the presented claims are justified by the use of ethical argumentation and the relevant literature;
Discuss this argument in an oral presentation in class in front of the instructor and their student colleagues.
1, 3
4, 5
Individual written essay
The individual final essay must show that the student has the capacity to read and carefully study the suggested bibliography and the ability to apply it to case-studies or relevant topics;
The individual final essay requires students to have developed critical skills in analyzing technical problems with the tools provided by ethical theories and argumentation.
1, 2
3, 4, 5

Ibo van de Poel, Lambèr Royakkers, Ethics and Engineering: An Introduction, Editore: Wiley-Blackwell, Anno edizione: 2011
Sven Ove Hansson (Ed.), The Ethics of Technology. Methods and Approaches., Editore: Rowman & Littlefield, Anno edizione: 2017
Batya Friedman, David G. Hendry, Value Sensitive Design: Shaping Technology with Moral Imagination, Editore: The MIT Press, Anno edizione: 2019
Behnam Taebi, Ethics and Engineering. An Introduction., Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2021
Sven Nyholm, This is Technology Ethics: An Introduction., Editore: Wiley-Blackwell, Anno edizione: 2023

The course (jointly organized by Politecnico di Milano and University of Pavia) is aimed at providing theoretical and experimental knowledge of nuclear reactor kinetics through experimental laboratories to be held at the TRIGA Mark II research reactor located in the Laboratory of Applied Nuclear Energy (LENA) of the University of Pavia. In particular, this course presents a consolidated approach towards reactor analysis wherein theoretical concepts and modelling approaches for reactor physics, dynamics and thermal-hydraulics are applied to study the TRIGA reactor and consequently validated during the experimental laboratories.
The course consists of a theoretical part illustrating the basic principles of nuclear reactor physics and reactor kinetics, a modelling part aimed at describing the behavior of the reactor, and a description of several reactor kinetics experiments. The laboratory activities include experimental sessions at LENA research facility followed by analysis and discussion of the obtained results. Homework and assignments related to the analysis of experimental data and modelling approaches - as part of the project laboratory activity - are provided throughout the course.

The students will know and comprehend:
the advanced mathematical and physical approaches required to analyze kinetics and dynamics of nuclear reactors
different experimental techniques required to estimate and evaluate relevant nuclear reactor parameters (control rod worth, reactivity feedback coefficients, …)
the TRIGA reactor design with the major reactor components
The students will be able to:
elaborate and apply experimental techniques for control rod calibration and reactivity feedback evaluation
compare experimental data and modelling outcomes in a critical way for validation purposes
perform an error analysis to quantify the experimental errors and analyze reactor transients at different power
exhibit fluency in technical communications with use of accurate scientific terminology.

TRIGA reactor design: operational characteristics of TRIGA Mark II reactor at LENA – Pavia (reactor core, core support grids, graphite reflector, fuel elements, control rods, neutron source, core configuration, reactor instrumentation, …)
error analysis: procedure for estimating the errors in measured quantities and error propagation to other variables
control rod calibration: procedures for calibration of control rods: "reactor period" method, "rod drop" method and "sub-critical core configuration" method
measurement of the void coefficient: procedure for the measurement of void coefficient in TRIGA Mark II reactor at zero-power condition
measurement of the prompt and isothermal fuel temperature coefficients: procedure for measurement of prompt and isothermal fuel temperature coefficients in TRIGA Mark II reactor at different power levels
pulse reactor mode: analysis and modelling of pulse reactor mode of TRIGA Mark II reactor in Ljubljana
neutronic simulation of TRIGA Reactor: Monte Carlo approach to transport theory with application to the TRIGA reactor by Serpent code
determination of control rod worth, reactivity feedback coefficients and kinetic parameters
determination of group constants for defining a diffusive model for several energy groups
analysis of typical reactor transients at different power levels: analysis of nuclear reactor dynamics with reference to the TRIGA Mark II reactor
Obiettivi
Il corso è dedicato agli aspetti di modellistica dei componenti e dei sistemi principali di un impianto nucleare di potenza, con riferimento alle diverse filiere di reattori.
Sulla base degli argomenti trattati, il corso consente di acquisire gli strumenti per la comprensione dei fenomeni legati alle variazioni di reattività che si manifestano in un reattore in potenza, gli strumenti modellistici e di simulazione per l’analisi dinamica di nocciolo, nonché gli strumenti di controllo e regolazione dell’intero impianto.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists in an oral examination aimed at verifying the knowledge of the course topics. In particular, the ability to describe the theoretical fundamentals of nuclear reactor kinetics, the ability in analyzing and interpreting experimental results and the comparison with modelling outcomes with focus on error analyses are addressed. In addition, the examination requires also the preparation and the discussion of a scientific report regarding one of the assigned homework to test the ability to discuss and communicate results in a professional way. The report should be prepared in advance and sent at least one week before the oral examination.

J.J. Duderstadt, L.J. Hamilton, Nuclear Reactor Analysis, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1976, ISBN: 978-0471223634
D.L. Hetrick, Dynamics of Nuclear Reactors, Editore: American Nuclear Society, Anno edizione: 1993, ISBN: 978-0894484537
D.G. Cacuci, Handbook of Nuclear Engineering, Editore: Springer-Verlag, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-0387981307
K.D. Kok, Nuclear Engineering Handbook, Editore: Taylor & Francis, Anno edizione: 2009, ISBN: 978-1420053906

The course is aimed at developing a full understanding on the main failure mechanisms encountered in metals and on the environmental and loading conditions that can induce anticipated failure of structural parts.
Methods for the nondestructive measurement of the integrity of materials will also be covered in the second part of the course to give a comprehensive frame of information about the testing of metal structures against unexpected failures in service.

After attending the course and final examination, the students will:
a) know the fundamental mechanisms about failure of metals under different service conditions (DdD1);
b) know the different methods to perform non-destructive tests on structural parts (DdD1);
c) be able to apply the above knowledge for the evaluation of expected damage to be found in structural metallic parts as a function of manufacturing routes and service conditions (DdD2);
d) be able to select the best method (or combination of methods) for the non-destructive detection of defects in structural parts (DdD2).

The topics covered during the course are:
1) Failure mechanisms in metals: Principles of linear elastic fracture mechanics / Ductile fracture mechanism (microvoid formation) / Brittle fracture by cleavage and intergranular mechanisms / Strain and damage by fatigue / Strain and damage by creep.
2) Embrittlement mechanisms: Hydrogen embrittement / Liquid metal embrittlement (LME) / Loss of ductility at high temperature in steels / Temper embrittlement.
3) Residual stresses in metals: Micro and macro stress fields / Measurement of residual stresses / X-ray diffraction / Hole-drilling strain-gage method / other mechanical methods / Failures and distortion due to residual stresses.
4) Defects in metals related to manufacturing: Casting / Welding / Hot deformation / Cold forming / Thermal treatments and coatings.
5) Non destructive testing: X-ray radioscopy / Die penetrants testing / Ultrasound testing / Eddy current testing / Magnetoscopic testing.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The integrated course of "Mechanical Behaviour and Failure of Metals" is made up of the two modules of "Mechanical Behaviour of Metals" and of "Failure and control of Metals".
The exam of the module "Failure and control of Metals" consists of a written test only consisting of a short number of open questions (typically 3 or 4 questions) where the student will be asked to summarize the main concepts learnt about selected general topics.
The final mark of the integrated course will be registered as the average of the two modules once both have been passed. The positive evaluation of each single module will expire at end of the exam sessions of the running academic year.

C.R. Brooks, A. Choudhury, Failure analysis of engineering materials, Editore: Mc Graw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2002
R.W. Cahn, P. Haasen, E.J. Kramer, Materials science and technology, Vol. 6 Plastic deformation and fracture of metals, Editore: VCH Weinheim publisher, Anno edizione: 1996
R.W. Hertzberg, Deformation and fracture mechanics of engineering materials, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 1989
M.A. Meyers, R.W. Armstrong, H.O.K. Kirchner, Mechanics and Materials - Fundamentals and linkages, Editore: Wiley-Interscience publisher, Anno edizione: 1999
R.W. Messler, Principles of welding - Processes, physics, chemistry and metallurgy, Editore: Wiley-Interscience publisher, Anno edizione: 1999
J. Campbell, Casting - second Edition,, Editore: Butterworth Heinemann publisher, Anno edizione: 1991

Obiettivi formativi
Gli studenti comprenderanno la fisica delle particelle fondamentali e le loro interazioni, come descritte nel Modello Standard delle particelle elementari, sia dal punto di vista formale, sia da quello delle tecniche sperimentali.
Insegnamento erogato dall'Università degli Studi di Milano. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare il sito di UNIMI al seguente link: https://www.unimi.it/it/corsi/insegnamenti-dei-corsi-di-laurea

1)- Caratteristiche generali degli acceleratori. Acceleratori elettrostatici, a induzione, circolari, lineari
2)- Formulazione Hamiltoniana. Emittanza. Moto lineare, matrice di trasferimento e matrice di fascio.
3)- Campi magnetici a simmetria cilindrica. Equazioni di moto e focalizzazione, matrice di trasferimento. Matching e autoellissi. Adiabatic damping.
4)- Altri sistemi focalizzanti. Quadrupoli magnetici e elettrostatici. Matching e trasporto periodico.
5)- Equazioni di Hill. Matrice di trasferimento e stabilità . Matching e autoellissi. La cella FODO
6)- Risonanze. Teoria e classificazione
7)- Colliders. Luminosita . Calcolo della luminosita per le macchine
8)- Elettrosincrotroni. Perdita di energia per radiazione. Radiation damping
9)- Limiti dei sincrotroni e colliders. Apertura dinamica. Carica spaziale, tune shift, effetto fascio-fascio. Decadimento della luminosita.
10)- Leggi di scala per sincrotroni e colliders.
Insegnamento erogato dall'Università degli Studi di Milano. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare il sito di UNIMI al seguente link: https://www.unimi.it/it/corsi/insegnamenti-dei-corsi-di-laurea

1.L'interazione nucleone-nucleone (NN) nel vuoto e nella materia nucleare. Richiami sui sistemi nucleari semplici e sullo "scattering". L'interazione NN e le teorie di campo (cenni).
2.Modelli per la struttura nucleare: richiami sulla teoria di Hartree-Fock, interazione di "pairing", equazioni di Hartree-Fock-Bogoliubov, teoria della risposta nucleare ad un campo esterno (adronico o elettrodebole). Nuclei sferici e deformati.
3.Nuclei ricchi di protoni o di neutroni e limiti della stabilità nucleare ("drip lines"): masse di nuclei instabili, distribuzioni di densità, sistemi con "alone". Peculiarità dei sistemi debolmente legati. Simmetria di isospin.
4.Tecniche sperimentali per lo studio di nuclei instabili: produzione ed accelerazione di fasci radioattivi.
5.Reazioni nucleari: teoria dello "scattering", reazioni dirette elastiche ed inelastiche, reazioni di trasferimento.
6. Fisica nucleare e processi astrofisici: evoluzione stellare e nucleosintesi
Insegnamento erogato dall'Università degli Studi di Milano. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare il sito di UNIMI al seguente link: https://www.unimi.it/it/corsi/insegnamenti-dei-corsi-di-laurea

Obiettivi: Apprendimento e utilizzo dei principali metodi per la soluzione dell'equazione di Boltzmann
Contenuti: Derivazione dell'Equazione di Boltzmann in forma integrale e integro-differenziale. Metodo di Von Neumann; Metodi dell'autovalore alfa e k; Sviluppo in polinomi di Legendre; Approssimazioni Pn e P1; Equazione di Diffusione; Schema Multigruppo; Organizzazione dei moderni codici di calcolo.
Equazione aggiunta del trasporto. Interpretazioni fisiche del flusso aggiunto. Calcoli perturbativi.
Il Metodo Monte Carlo per la simulazione stocastica del trasporto di neutroni e fotoni.
Approfondimento sull'utilizzo del Metodo Monte Carlo con esempi: variabili random, tecniche di campionamento, tecniche di riduzione della varianza in calcoli pesati.
Argomenti monografici: Fluttuazioni del numero di particelle in un sistema markoviano: il modello stocastico di ramificazione di Kolmogorov-Dmitriev; Introduzione all'analisi di dati casuali e rumore neutronico.

FISICA DEI REATTORI A FISSIONE II
Obiettivi: Apprendimento dei principali metodi per la soluzione dell'equazione del trasporto neutronico e dei fondamenti necessari per l'utilizzo di codici di trasporto neutronico.
Contenuti: L'equazione di Boltzmann del trasporto neutronico. Forma integrale e integro-differenziale. I principali metodi di soluzione. Applicazioni. Equazione aggiunta del trasporto. Applicazioni. Fluttuazioni stocastiche. Il modello di ramificazione di Kolmogorov e Dmitriev Applicazione del metodo Monte Carlo alla simulazione stocastica del trasporto di neutroni e fotoni. Introduzione all'analisi di dati casuali e rumore neutronico.
SPERIMENTAZIONI DI CINETICA DEL REATTORE NUCLEARE
Il corso, di carattere teorico-pratico, si propone di svolgere attività sperimentale nell'ambito della cinetica dei reattori nucleari utilizzando l'impianto di ricerca TRIGA Mark II. Richiami dei principi di cinetica e dinamica dei reattori nucleari. Il reattore TRIGA Mark II: caratteristiche neutroniche e termo-idrauliche. Calibrazione fine di una barra di controllo mediante il metodo del periodo stabile del reattore. Misura del coefficiente di temperatura pronto e isotermo del combustibile TRIGA. Misura del coefficiente di vuoto del moderatore. Determinazione del valore del coefficiente di moltiplicazione in condizioni di reattore sottocritico e calibrazione approssimata delle barre di controllo. Modellazione e analisi dei transitori del reattore con e senza gli effetti di potenza.

The course is offered in a 10-CFU annual version (Fission Reactor Physics II + Transport of Radioactive Contaminants). In alternative the students can attend one of the two 5-CFU courses into which the annual version is parted (Fission Reactor Physics II - first semester and Transport of Radioactive Contaminants - second semester). Moreover the 5-CFU course Fission Reactor Physics II is also part of the integrated 10-CFU course Experimental Nuclear Reactor Kinetics + Fission Reactor Physics II.
Transport of Radioactive Contaminants is included in the program 'Ambassador in Green Technologies'
The detailed descriptions reported below define aims, educational outcomes and programs for both of the two 5-CFU courses that compose the 10 CFU annual course.
FISSION REACTOR PHYSICS II (5 ECTS)
The aim of the course is to provide knowledge of the main methods for the solution of the neutron transport equation and of the fundamental concepts necessary for the use of deterministic and stochastic neutron transport codes.
The Boltzmann neutron transport equation, both in Integral and integrodifferential formulation, is derived and the main deterministic solution methods are illustrated and discussed. Subsequently the adjoint equation is derived and its application to perturbation problems is addressed. Finally the theoretical formulation of the Monte Carlo method applied to the neutron transport equation is dealt together with some applications.
TRANSPORT OF RADIOACTIVE CONTAMINANTS (5 ECTS)
included in the program 'Ambassador in Green Technologies'
The sustainability of industrial activities must necessarily take into account the need to protect the environment and the population from the effect of any toxic waste produced.
The aim of the course is to provide knowledge of the main physical concepts necessary to analyze and model the migration of toxic and/or radioactive contaminants through natural and artificial porous media and groundwater and learning of the fundamentals required for the use of deterministic and stochastic codes required to assess the impact on public and environment of the disposal of toxic wastes in general, and radioactive waste in particular.
To this aim the principal processes of radionuclide transport in aqueous solution through porous and fractured media are illustrated and discussed. The advection dispersion equation of transport in porous media is derived. The stochastic Kolmogorov Dmitriev model is applied to describe radionuclide transport through porous media. Exercises with codes and experimental activities are provided to better understand the adopted models.
At the end of the course a visit to the Joint Research Centre of Ispra is foreseen. The visit is comprehensive of seminars regarding the following topics: Nuclear Safeguards and Security; Decommissioning and Nuclear Waste Management issues.

FISSION REACTOR PHYSICS II
The student:
knows the main physical assumptions under which the Boltzmann equation of neutron transport can be derived, is able to derive the Boltzmann equation in integrodifferential and integral form and knows the main mathematical methods for its deterministic solution
knows the fundamentals of the theoretical formulation of the Monte Carlo method applied to the transport of neutrons in a multiplying medium
knows the physical interpretation of the adjoint flux and is able to derive the adjoint transport equation and to apply the adjoint transport equation to a perturbation problem
is able to use an appropriate and scientifically rigorous language to describe the topics covered by the course
is able to program sampling procedures useful for Monte Carlo simulations
TRANSPORT OF RADIOACTIVE CONTAMINANTS
The student:
knows the main processes that govern water flow through aquifers and transport of radionuclides through porous media and is able to derive the Advection Dispersion equation and a probabilistic equation of transport by means of the Kolmogorov Dmitriev approach
knows how to study experimentally, at the lab scale (i) the transport of a tracer through a porous medium and (ii) the exchange processes between aqueous and solid phases to obtain equilibrium isotherms
is able to indentify parameters and processes that are neeeded to assess impact on population and on environment due to the disposal of wastes of different origin
is able to discuss the problem of radioactive repositories assessment with reference to the main processes to be taken into account and to the main properties of the host geological formations to prevent contamination of the environment and reduce dose to the population
is able to use an appropriate and scientifically rigorous language to describe the topics covered by the course
knows the basics of some codes of transport of toxic agents and radionucludes

FISSION REACTOR PHYSICS II
The Boltzmann equation. The neutron transport equation. Fundamental physical assumptions for the derivation of the equation of neutron transport. Neutron angular density and angular flux. Neutron current. Transfer probabilities for scattering and fission. Derivation of the Boltzmann equation of neutron transport in Lagrangian and Eulerian form on the basis of neutron conservation. Integrodifferential formulation. General characteristics of the transport operator. Integration in the entire reactor. Linearity and Green’s functions. Integral formulation and its derivation on the basis of neutron conservation.
Solution methods. Integral formulation. Von Neumann method. Integrodifferential formulation. Analysis of non-stationary case by means of the alpha eigenvalue method. Effective multiplication factor eigenvalue method. Expansion of flux in Legendre polynomials for plane geometry. Pn approximation. P1 approximation. Derivation of the diffusion equation. Discrete ordinate method. Sn approximation (outline). The Multigroup method. Numerical solutions and organization of modern computer codes (outline).
The adjoint transport equation. The adjoint to the transport operator. The adjoint function and neutron importance. Derivation of the adjoint transport equation for the neutron importance. Physical interpretations of the adjoint flux to certain kinds of adjoint source. Spectrum of the adjoint operator and criticality. Application of the perturbation theory. Perturbation of the effective multiplication factor. Application to a PWR core barrel oscillations. Derivation of the Point Kinetics equation.
Monte Carlo method. Application of the Monte Carlo method to the stochastic simulation of transport of neutrons and photons. Collision, transfer, and transport kernels. Von Neumann expansion. Iterated fission sources method.
Analog Monte Carlo. Some sampling techniques. Energy distribution of neutrons after 1, 2 and 3 collisions in graphite; Sampling the mean free path in the presence of different materials.
Weighted Monte Carlo with MCNP. Description of the MCNP program. Criticality calculation. Importance sampling and weight windows in shielding problems. Example of a perturbation calculation. Simulation of a correlated measure.
Neutronic simulation of a TRIGA Reactor (*) (monographic topic in collaboration with the course 'Experimental Nuclear Reactor Kinetics') Monte Carlo approach to transport theory with application to the TRIGA reactor by Serpent code: 1) Determination of multiplication coefficient, kinetic parameters and neutron flux distribution, 2) Determination of group constants for defining a diffusive model for several energy groups.
Statistics of Neutron Fluctuations (*) (monographic topic). Probability generating functions. The convolution theorem. Fluctuations of the number of particles in a Markovian system of different types of particles: the branching model of Kolmogorov and Dmitriev. The Chapman-Kolmogorov identity. The Kolmogorov equations. Application to the propagation of neutrons in multiplying system with a neutron source variable in time. The Fokker-Planck equation.
Neutron Noise (*) (monographic topic). Introduction to the analysis of random data and neutron noise. Stationary processes. Ergodic processes. Analysis in the time domain and frequency. Application to the determination of the directions and frequencies of oscillation of the core-barrel of PWR reactor. Estimate of the rate of rise of bubbles in a liquid two-phase within a vertical channel.
(*) the monographic topics can be activated at the discretion of the professor in charge of the course
TRANSPORT OF RADIOACTIVE CONTAMINANTS
Monte Carlo method (*). Outline of the application of the Monte Carlo method to the stochastic simulation of transport of neutrons and photons. Collision, transfer, and transport kernels. Von Neumann expansion.
Repositories of radioactive waste. Characteristics and types of radioactive waste. Concepts of deposit and barriers. Main processes of leakage of radionuclides from deposits. Transport in the near-field and in the far field. Determination of the source term.
Transport of toxic and radioactive pollutants in aqueous solution in porous and fractured media. Basics concepts of hydrogeology. Porosity and water content. Hydraulic conductivity. Storage coefficient. Darcy law. Darcy velocity. Pore velocity. Models of water flow in saturated and unsaturated porous media. Flow field in a saturated porous medium: confined and unconfined aquifers. Main transport phenomena in hydrogeology. Derivation of the Advection Dispersion equation. Main physical and chemical parameters and their determination. Hydrodynamic dispersion. Reactive transport. Exchange processes between the phases. Isothermal linear equilibrium. Freundlich and Langmuir nonlinear Isotherms. Processes of decay, dissolution, degradation, adsorption, competition, colloidal transport. Dual porosity media. Two Region Model.
Stochastic approach. Probability generating functions. The convolution theorem. Fluctuations of the number of particles in a Markovian system of different types of particles: the branching model of Kolmogorov and Dmitriev. The Chapman-Kolmogorov identity. The Kolmogorov equations. Probabilistic Kolmogorov equations and their application to the propagation of radionuclides in a porous media. Derivation of main rates by comparison with the advection dispersion deterministic model. Application of the Monte Carlo method to the stochastic simulation of the transport of contaminants in saturated and unsaturated media in presence of linear and nonlinear processes..
Informatics laboratory. 1D model of transport with Matlab. 3D Model with G roundwatervistas: MODFLOW, MODPATH, MT3D; RESRAD off Site Code with exercises. 1D Monte Carlo Model with Python. Compartment code AMBER and 3D code FEFLOW (outline)
Laboratory. Experimental techniques for the study and measurement of the dispersion of contaminants in porous media. Batch tests to study the phenomena of exchange between the phases and the determination of the equilibrium isotherms. Column tests of 1D transport. Determination of the effective porosity and coefficient of dispersivity Spectrophotometry. Liquid chromatography. Mass spectrometry.
The inverse problem (outline). Definition of the problem. Direct and indirect methods. Examples of methods for the solution of inverse problems for the determination of characteristic parameters of the models of flow and transport.
Transport of pollutants in the atmosphere (**) (monographic topic). Vertical movements and conditions of stability and instability of the atmosphere. Equation of diffusion of contaminants into the atmosphere. Decay and chemical reactions. The theory and assumptions underlying the simulation models of Gaussian type. Chemical and physical parameters. Source term.
(*) recalls for the students that attend only the 5CFU course T ransport of Radioactive Contaminants
(**) the monographic topics can be activated at the discretion of the professor in charge of the course
At the end of the 10FU course a visit to the Joint Research Centre of Ispra is foreseen for all the students that attend any of the 5CFU versions of the course. The visit is comprehensive of the following seminars:
Seminar on Nuclear Safeguards and Security (outline). Illustration of issues related to nuclear safeguards.
Seminar on Decommissioning and Waste management (outline). Illustration of a decommissioning project.

Prova orale obbligatoria
FISSION REACTOR PHYSICS II + TRANSPORT OF RADIOACTIVE CONTAMINANTS
FISSION REACTOR PHYSICS II
TRANSPORT OF RADIOACTIVE CONTAMINANTS
The evaluation consists in an oral examination. It aims at verifying the knowledge of the course topics, with particular reference to the knowledge of the mathematical description of the fundamental physical processes under consideration, to the ability of deriving the fundamental equations of transport of neutrons in multiplying media and of transport of radionuclides in porous media and to the ability to use an appropriate and scientifically rigorous language to describe the topics covered by the course.
The student will be asked to explain the physical meaning of the adopted mathematical models and to derive and discuss the following main topics:
Fission reactor physics II: Boltzmann equation, deterministic and stochastic (i.e. Monte Carlo) solution methods of the Boltzmann equation, adjoint transport equation, application of the adjoint transport equation to a perturbation problem; sampling procedures
Transport of Radioactive Contaminants: deterministic models of water flow and transport of radionuclides through porous media and Kolmogorov Dmitriev stochastic model of transport of radionuclides through porous media. The ability to discuss the relevance of parameters of transport through porous media with respect to the assessment of toxic and/or radioactive disposal/repositories is addressed as well. The student will also be asked to describe in detail the experiments held in the lab.

G. Bell and S. Glasstone, Nuclear Reactor Theory, Editore: Van Nostrand Reinhold Co, Anno edizione: 1970
D. Savage, The scientific and Regulatory basis for geological disposal of radioactive waste, Editore: John Wiley and Sons,, Anno edizione: 1995
MVP/GMVP Version 3: General Purpose Monte Carlo Codes for Neutron and Photon Transport Calculations Based on Continuous Energy and Multigroup Methods https://jopss.jaea.go.jp/pdfdata/JAEA-Data-Code-2016-018.pdf
Additional notes are given by the professor in charge of the course and are made available on the one-drive site

This course is intended to provide students with a comprehensive understanding of the physical principles governing heat and mass transport, emphasizing the fundamental modes of transfer and their interplay in engineering systems. Through the integration of theoretical concepts and practical methodologies, students will develop the skills to model, analyze and design systems involving conduction, convection, radiation and diffusion, and to apply systematic approaches for addressing complex thermal and mass transfer problems in energy engineering and related industrial applications.

By the end of the course, students will be able to:
Analyze and design systems and components for heat and mass transfer, including heat sinks, radiators, heat exchangers and process equipment.
Identify and model the transport phenomena governing real processes and devices.
Formulate and solve the governing equations for heat and mass transfer at both global and local scales using analytical and numerical approaches.
Use property tables and other provided reference data to evaluate and design thermal and mass transfer systems.

The course includes theoretical lessons and practical classes devoted to solve exercises on fundamental aspects of thermal design and control of equipment and systems.
Radiative transfer: Thermal radiation, radiation intensity and derived spectral and total radiation quantities. Blackbody radiation: the Planck’s distribution, the Stefan-Boltzmann’s law, Wien’s displacement laws, band emission. Emission, absorption, reflection and transmission from real surfaces; Kirchhoff’s law; grey surface and selective surface. Solar and environmental radiation. Radiation exchange between grey surfaces: view factors and their relationships, evaluating radiation exchange between between opaque, diffuse and grey surfaces in an enclosure. Radiation shields. The reradiating surface. Multimode heat transfer. Radiation exchange with participating media. Volumetric absorption. Gaseous emission and absorption.
Heat conduction: The Fourier’s law, thermal conductivity. The heat diffusion equation. Steady-state, one-dimensional solutions; thermal resistances and equivalent circuits. Conduction with thermal energy generation. Heat transfer from extended surfaces. Approximate one dimensional conduction analysis. Transient conduction: lumped-capacity solutions, analytical solutions in one-dimensional slab, cylinder and sphere. Finite difference method for 1D and 2D steady and transient problems.
Convective heat and mass transfer: The governing equations. Velocity, temperature and concentration boundary layers (BLs). BL equations for laminar flow: BL similarity parameters and functional form of the solutions. Introduction to turbulence. The time-averaged boundary layer equations. Time-averaged velocity profile near a wall. Forced convection in external flows: heat transfer over flat plate, cylinders, spheres. Forced convection inside ducts: the mean velocity and the bulk temperature, the fully developed region and the Graezt problem; laminar and turbulent flow in tubes and channels. Forced convection mass transfer: the Lewis analogy. Free convection: the governing equations for laminar boundary layers; similarity considerations; laminar free convection on a vertical surface; the effects of turbulence; empirical correlations for bodies of various shapes. Free convection within parallel plate channels. Combined free and forced convection. Convection mass transfer. Free convection mass transfer. Similarity considerations.
Heat Exchangers: Principles and methods for the analysis and design of heat exchangers; shell-and-tube, double-pipe and compact devices; overall heat transfer coefficient and the role of thermal resistances; log-mean temperature difference and effectiveness–NTU methods for evaluating thermal performance; influence of flow arrangement and heat capacity rates on exchanger behaviour; design and performance assessment in industrial applications.
Mass diffusion: Fick’s law of diffusion, mass diffusivity. The stationary medium approximation. The mass diffusion equation, boundary conditions and discontinuous concentrations at interfaces, evaporation, solubility of gases in liquids and solids, catalytic surface reactions; mass diffusion with homogeneous chemical reactions. Transient diffusion.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
The course assessment consists of:
A written test, held at the end of the course (no midterm tests).
A mandatory oral exam for all students.
The written test includes numerical problems on key topics covered during the course. Each problem is graded on the formal development (e.g., governing equations, assumptions, methodology) and on the numerical solution.
The problems are designed to evaluate your ability to:
identify and describe the processes and transport phenomena in the case study;
write and solve the governing equations using appropriate methods;
analyze and design components or systems, using the provided material if needed.
After the test, the official solutions are distributed. Each student will then be asked whether they wish their test to be graded.
If you do not request grading, the test will not be corrected and will not affect your record.
If you request grading and the score is below 10/30, you will not be allowed to take the next exam date in the same session.
The oral exam, required for all students, may include both theoretical questions and problem-solving exercises.

Bergman T.L., Lavine A.S., Incropera F.P., DeWitt D.P., Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, Editore: John Wiley and Sons
H.D. Baehr, K. Stephan, Heat and Mass Transfer, Editore: Springer
J.H. Lienhard, A Heat Transfer Textbook
Note: Free download

L'insegnamento fornisce una trattazione avanzata di argomenti selezionati di scambio termico e di massa, affrontando problemi di complessità medio-alta riguardanti il progetto e l'analisi di componenti e impianti di conversione dell'energia. I principali temi riguardano lo scambio termico radiativo, la conduzione del calore e la diffusione di massa. Casi di studio sono sviluppati per applicare la teoria a sistemi e processi complessi, come lo scambio termico radiativo nei forni industriali, la radiazione ambientale, le superfici selettive, la conduzione termica multidimensionale in regime stazionario e variabile, i processi di diffusione nelle colonne di distillazione.

SCAMBIO TERMICO E DI MASSA II

LASER AD ALTA INTENSITA' PER APPLICAZIONI NUCLEARI E FISICHE I L'insegnamento si propone di fornire innanzitutto una solida conoscenza sui laser e sulle proprietà dei fasci laser, con particolare attenzione agli aspetti legati al regime ad alta intensità. Argomenti (in sintesi): richiami di elettromagnetismo; risonatori e fasci gaussiani; assorbimento, decadimento spontaneo, emissione stimolata della luce; regime continuo e impulsato dei laser; materiali attivi per alte energie.

The course is offered in a 10-CFU/ECTS version (High intensity lasers for nuclear and physical applications I+II), composed of two 5-CFU/ECTS courses (High intensity lasers for nuclear and physical applications I, High intensity lasers for nuclear and physical applications II) that are offered jointly. The present form defines aims, educational outcomes and syllabus for each part.
Part I is in the FIRST semester,
part II in the SECOND semester (the lesson timetable for this part will be visible in the second semester);
campus: LEONARDO for both parts.
Students who already attended "PRINCIPI dei LASER" can attend only part II; for students who have a background in laser physics the choice will be evaluated. To attend part II it is recommended to have some basic knowledge of laser physics.
HIGH INTENSITY LASERS FOR NUCLEAR AND PHYSICAL APPLICATIONS I (5 ECTS)
The objective of this course is to provide the students with the physical bases for understanding the behavior of laser beams and their characteristics. In particular, it aims at giving rigorous and sound knowledge of electromagnetic waves, laser physics, properties of laser beam and properties of laser pulses. This knowledge is intended to give to the students the expertise and the capabilities to deal with any kind of laser and laser radiation, furthermore to address various phenomena typical of applications of laser beams.
HIGH INTENSITY LASERS FOR NUCLEAR AND PHYSICAL APPLICATIONS II (5 ECTS)
The objective of this course is to provide in-depth knowledge of the properties of high intensity laser pulses, of the related technologies, in order to understand and address laser driven applications. The course first present in detail the complex transformations (in space, time, frequency, amplitude) that high-intensity laser pulses undergo during propagation, and on the possibility to control pulse characteristics. Second, the course presents the up-to-date technologies for high power scaling: amplification systems by chirped pulse and by optical parametric chirped pulse. The descriptions on physical phenomena involved and the results achieved worldwide will be illustrated. Finally, the course will discuss a few major applications of high intensity lasers: generation of XUV attosecond pulses by high order harmonic generation, laser driven particle acceleration, laser driven inertial confinement fusion.

HIGH INTENSITY LASERS FOR NUCLEAR AND PHYSICAL APPLICATIONS I
The student:

• knows the physical and mathematical methods to describe the propagation of electromagnetic waves and their interaction with matter (DD1)
• knows the physical principles of laser operation (DD1)
• is able to manage the major effects of laser beam propagation and laser-matter interaction (DD2)
• is able to face different and more complex phenomena in the field of laser applications (DD5)
  HIGH INTENSITY LASERS FOR NUCLEAR AND PHYSICAL APPLICATIONS II
  The student:
• knows the physics principles of laser pulses transformation in space, time, frequency, amplitude (DD1)
• knows the technology related to the generation and amplification of laser pulses to high powers (DD1)
• understands the role of laser beam parameters in some important applications (DD2)
• is able to identify the laser pulse parameters that are relevant in different applications and uses (DD5)

HIGH INTENSITY LASERS FOR NUCLEAR AND PHYSICAL APPLICATIONS I

• ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES. Helmoltz’s equation, plane, spherical, standing waves; polarization, phase and group velocity, intensity; reflection and refraction, dispersion, interference, Fabry-Perot interferometer, multilayer-dielectric coatings; Huygens-Fresnel principles, Fraunhofer’s diffraction.
• GEOMETRICAL OPTICS, DIFFRACTION OPTICS AND GAUSSIAN BEAMS. Ray propagation, aberrations and matrix formulation; the scalar wave equation, paraxial wave equation; Gaussian beams, ABCD law.
• PASSIVE OPTICAL RESONATORS. Resonators, cavity modes, stability condition, eigenmodes; losses, photon lifetime, Q-factor.
• SEMI-CLASSICAL THEORY OF LIGHT MATTER INTERACTION, THE GAIN MEDIUM. Spontaneous emission; absorption and stimulated emission; line broadening, transition cross section, absorption and gain coefficient, saturation.
• CONTINUOUS WAVE AND TRANSIENT LASER BEHAVIOR. Rate equations; threshold condition and output power; Q-switching and mode-locking.
• EXAMPLES OF OPERATING LASERS. Single mode selection; pumping schemes; examples of semiconductor and solid-state lasers.
  A visit to a laser laboratory is planned with direct view of Gaussian beam and diffraction.
  HIGH INTENSITY LASERS FOR NUCLEAR AND PHYSICAL APPLICATIONS II
  -LASER BEAM SPATIAL TRANSFORMATIONS Gaussian and non-Gaussian beams: quality factors; C ontrol of the intensity profile; T ransformations of the wavefront; S elf-focusing and B-integral, thermal effects and thermal lensing; C ontrol of the wavefront by modulators and Spatial filtering
  -L ASER PULSE TEMPORAL TRANSFORMATIONS Laser pulses, dispersion, spectral broadening, gain narrowing; d ispersion compensation, post compression, stretching by gratings; p ulse temporal shaping by spatial modulators and by programmable shapers; c arrier-envelope phase stabilization.
  -LASER PULSE INTENSITY AMPLIFICATION Amplification by stimulated emission; f requency conversion and amplification by optical parametric interaction.
  HIGH-INTENSITY LASER TECHNOLOGIES Laser amplifiers, chirped pulse amplification, amplifier schemes; s olid state bulk lasers, thin disk lasers and amplifiers; f iber lasers and amplifiers; o ptical parametric chirped pulse amplification.
• XUV ATTOSECOND PULSES High order harmonic generation and attosecond pulses, s emiclassical model, tunnel ionization, strong field approximation; g eneration techniques
• LASER DRIVEN PARTICLE ACCELERATION Laser plasma acceleration and the ponderomotive force, principles of electron acceleration (laser wakefield acceleration and bubble acceleration); p rinciples of laser driven ion sources; r equirements for laser pulses and results.
• LASER DRIVEN INERTIAL CONFINEMENT FUSION P rinciples of inertial confinement fusion, burn efficiency and requirements for ignition; i gnition schemes, indirect drive, direct drive and advanced schemes principles.
• EXAMPLES Petawatt and high intensity laser worldwide ( SG II, ELI-NP nuclear physics, and ELI-ALPS attosecond laser pulse source, …)
  A visit to a laser laboratory is planned with direct view of non-linear effects for high-intensity laser pulses ( self-phase modulation, frequency conversion, optical parametric amplification, self-channeling).

Prova orale obbligatoria
For both parts, the evaluation consists in an oral examination, with a discussion and problem-solving tests, on all the topics of the course. For both parts, it will assess the general knowledge, the degree of understanding of the physical phenomena and the capability to identify the relevant quantities for any phenomenon under consideration. With more detail, for part I the student will be asked to manage laser physics, laser beam propagation and laser-matter interaction; for part II, laser pulses transformations, amplification technologies and examples of applications.

O. Svelto, Principles of Lasers - fifth edition, Editore: Springer, ISBN: 978-1-4419-1302-9
Note: for part I
M. Zavelani-Rossi, F. Vismarra, HIGH-INTENSITY LASERS for nuclear and physical applications, Editore: Società editrice ESCULAPIO, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9788893852463
Note: for part II
M. Zavelani-Rossi, Notes on electromagnetic waves and optics
Note: available on Beep
Review articles
Note: available on Beep
J.D. Jackson,, Classical Electrodynamics, Wiley / Eugene Hecht, Optics,, Editore: Pearson Education
C. Mencuccini, V.Silvestrini, Fisica - Elettromagnetismo e ottica, Editore: Casa Editrice Ambrosiana

LASER AD ALTA INTENSITA' PER APPLICAZIONI NUCLEARI E FISICHE II L'insegnamento presenta i processi di amplificazione ed esamina esempi di strutture laser ad alta energia approfondendo gli aspetti legati ad alcune applicazioni, quali la fusione nucleare a confinamento inerziale, l'accelerazione di particelle, la generazione di raggi X e gamma secondari, la generazione di impulsi XUV ad attosecondi. Argomenti (in sintesi): amplificazione degli impulsi e processi non lineari; sistemi laser ad alta intensità; sistemi laser per la fusione nucleare a confinamento inerziale, per l'accelerazione di particelle e per la generazione di raggi X e gamma; generazione di impulsi XUV ultrabrevi.

Scopo del corso è di offrire una lettura storica del percorso evolutivo dell'impresa europea nei suoi snodi fondamentali, con particolare riguardo all'innovazione tecnologica. In questa prospettiva sarà collocata anche la storia dell'impresa italiana riferita alle esperienze sia delle maggiori imprese private (Fiat, Olivetti, Pirelli) sia dell'impresa pubblica (Iri), soffermandosi infine sulle ragioni della caduta delle imprese di grandi dimensioni e sull'affermazioni di forme di capitalismo "intermedio". Nella sua parte finale il corso insisterà sulla continuità dei caratteri dell'impresa europea, domandandosi se, all'interno di uno scenario post- globale come l'attuale, essa abbia la possibilità di continuare il percorso lungo il proprio asse o se invece emerga l'opportunità di una contaminazione con altre esperienze modulate da differenti contesti storici.

Il corso mira a sviluppare le conoscenze necessarie all'impiego delle tecniche gestionali tipiche del project management, con particolare riferimento al settore dell'engineering and contracting. Gli argomenti trattati riguardano: Progetto e Project Management. Il ciclo di vita del progetto. I progetti nel settore dell'engineering & contracting. Processi operativi, gestionali e organizzativi di progetto. La fase di competitive bidding. La gestione del contratto. La fase di esecuzione del progetto. Ingegneria, approvvigionamento, costruzione e avviamento. Identificazione, analisi e gestione dei rischi/ opportunità di progetto. Pianificazione e controllo del progetto: contenuto, qualità, avanzamento, tempi, risorse, costi, cash flow. Gli strumenti della pianificazione operativa: Work Breakdown Structure, diagrammi di Gantt, tecniche reticolari, curve ad S.

Il corso si propone di proporre, sviluppare e applicare i principali strumenti e tecniche utili per la pianificazione, l'esecuzione e il controllo di progetti complessi, con particolare attenzione all'esecuzione di impianti industriali. L'argomento viene sviluppato attraverso l'analisi del punto di vista tecnico, contrattuale, organizzativo, economico e finanziario, mediante l'utilizzo di casi di studio appartenenti a diversi settori industriali.

The goal of the course is to provide students with knowledge to tackle the challenges and to assess the benefits of integrating renewable energy sources with nuclear to effectively support the transition towards a carbon-neutral power grid.
The aim of this module is to provide a general overview of the role of nuclear energy in carbon neutral scenario, highlighting the benefit and challenges of the presence of the nuclear option in the energy mix. The module will focus on the technical aspects of the integration among advanced nuclear plants, renewable energy sources, storage solutions, enhanced grid networks, load-shifting, and flexible backup options.
This module will focus on the use of Modelica code for the modelling and the technical evaluation of the integrated energy systems for the project work.

The students will know and comprehend:
The challenges of the transitions towards a carbon-neutral world and the implications on the power grid
The features of the integration among the different low carbon energy sources
The characteristics of the nuclear reactor concepts for hybrid systems (e.g., Small Modular Reactors and Generation-IV reactors) and the technical challenges from a control and safety point of view
The students will be able to:
Analyze needs and address the challenges of power generation planning and dispatchment in the green energy transition
Use and develop models for the study of low carbon energy sources
Perform a simplified techno-economic analysis of systems characterized by the presence of advanced nuclear reactors, renewables power plant, storage and other components
Exhibit fluency in technical communications with use of accurate scientific terminology.

Introduction to nuclear technology for integrated systems: basic principles of nuclear power plant production with a particular focus to the most promising concepts to be used in the integration with renewables (e.g., Small Modular Reactors and Generation-IV reactors), key plant components involved in the integration with other energy sources and their interface with the electrical grid.
Role of nuclear energy in the energy mix: base load, load-following and frequency control, GHG emissions, environmental footprint and grid stability. Non electrical applications: hydrogen production, district heating, thermal storage, desalination.
Nuclear technical challenges for the integration: principles and goals of nuclear safety, impact of the integration on safety, analysis of the daily regulation on the main power plant parameters, control issues coming from the integration with non-programmable renewable energy sources.
Fundamentals of electricity market: forward/short term market, formation of market price, wholesale market models, zonal vs nodal market, ancillary service & balancing market, capacity market.
Seminar from experts coming from industry, research center and intergovernmental agencies (OECD/NEA, IAEA, …): outlook on the current worldwide situation toward the decarbonization and role of the nuclear/renewable integration.
Techno-economic analysis of a real-world case: use of Modelica language to analyze feasibility and impact of the low-carbon sources integration.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists in an oral examination aimed at verifying the knowledge of the course topics. In particular, the ability to explain the current challenges of the transition towards a carbon-neutral power grid, the ability in analyzing the problem with the proper tools – both from the technical and economic point of view - and the capacity to understand and comment the outcomes of the models are tested and evaluated. In addition, the examination requires also the preparation and the discussion of a scientific report regarding the real-world study case analyzed in the project work. The report should be prepared in advance and sent at least one week before the oral examination.

This soft-skills course aims to introduce foreign students to the fundamentals of Italian culture within the broader context of European history and culture. The course is divided in two units.
In Unit 1 (3 credits) students will learn about the main events in the history of Europe and Italy and about their socio-cultural implications, with special attention to contemporary issues. Students will also learn about key artistic and literary movements within this broad historical context.
In Unit 2 (2 credits), the focus will be on Italian contemporary literature, focusing on the potential intersection of literary research with pressing contemporary issues, such as ecology, mental health, and human and civil rights.
The goal of the course is to provide students with a deeper understanding of the social and cultural context in which they are studying and living and in which they might work in the future. Given the variety of topics and subjects, which will span art, literature and cinema, lectures will make considerable use of multimodal resources.

At the end of the course students will have developed an understanding of Europe's and Italy's cultural past and present, and will be able to use these competences to interpret current socio-cultural issues. A special focus on Italian history of the 19th-20th centuries will enable students to understand Italy’s cultural landscape and the basic structure of Italian society. They will also be able to understand and appreciate cultural artefacts in a culturally competent manner.
In Unit 2, the course will explore Italian contemporary literature, using debates and literary objects as a way to face pressing contemporary issues, such as ecology, mental health, and human and civil rights.
During the course, team-work will be frequently used to improve students' communication skills, especially in relation to topics they are not familiar with, from both a disciplinary and cultural viewpoint. Most lectures include an analysis of a specific cultural object: students will learn to apply analytical techniques to a variety of artefacts, and will eventually be able to use them autonomously. At the end of the course, students will be able to discuss in detail a single cultural object, discussing and assessing its main historical and formal features.

Unit 1 (3 credits)
A first series of lectures will focus on European history, from Ancient Grece up to the 19 th century; by learning about the foundations of European civilisation, focusing especially on its early times, international students will gain a better understanding of the contemporary western world. This historical background is a prerequisite for approaching the study of culture: the course will deal with the fundamentals of western literature, religion, art and cultural imaginaries. Moreover, the historical part will provide an overview of contemporary Europe both as an institution and a cultural entity.
The second part of this Unit is mainly dedicated to Modern Italy. Lectures will mainly deal with the history of Italy from unification (1861) to the present day. Students will have an opportunity to discuss crucial cultural problems, spanning politics, literature, cinema and local customs. Special attention will be paid to social imaginaries and narratives, which will be used as an entry point for a critical approach to the investigation of identities and cultural trends.
Unit 2 (2 credits)
In the second part, the course will explore Italian literature—with forays into cinema and the arts—focusing particularly on the thematic aspects of the reflections of major authors: Calvino’s ecological anxieties, Primo Levi’s unique blend of science and literary inquiry, and the distinct ways Ginzburg and Morante retell History. In short, the second part of the course will provide an opportunity to delve deeper into events and themes highlighted in the first part, using different approaches and languages.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The examination for 5-credit students is composed of three parts: a group presentation, a written test about unit 1 and an interview about the contents of the whole syllabus.
3-credit students will give the group presentation and sit the written test about unit 1 or, alternatively, an oral interview about the sylllabus of the same unit.
Attending students will study the content of the lectures based on the power point presentations and other materials uploaded on Beep, as well as on the compulsory references books (see references section). In gr
Non-attending students will study the recordings of the lectures, the power point presentations, the compulsory reference books and the other materials uploaded on Beep. Additionally, they are required to read the book Modern Italy. A Very Short Introduction by Anna Cento Bull (see references section).

Ernst Hans Gombrich, A Little History of the World, Editore: Yale University Press, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-0-300-14332-4
Christopher Duggan, A Coincise History of Italy, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-0-521-74743-1
Note: Second Edition
Anna Cento Bull, Modern Italy. A Very Short Introduction, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-0-19-872651-7
Jeremy Black, A Brief History of Italy, Editore: Robinson, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-1-47214-088-3
John Foot, Modern Italy, Editore: Palgrave Macmillan, Anno edizione: 2003, ISBN: 978-0-333-66905-1
Zygmunt G. Baranski, Rebecca J. West, The Cambridge Companion to Modern Italian Culture, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 9780521559829

L'insegnamento ha l'obiettivo di fornire una conoscenza introduttiva della fisica delle particelle, ottenuta ampliando e sviluppando opportunamente alcuni degli argomenti già introdotti nell'ambito dell'insegnamento Fisica del nucleo, di cui questo insegnamento costituisce un possibile, naturale completamento. Ci si propone, in particolare, di sviluppare in modo organico la fenomenologia e i possibili schemi di classificazione delle particelle. Inoltre, si approfondiranno aspetti legati alla descrizione della struttura interna degli adroni (in particolare, il modello a quark) e delle interazioni fondamentali (forte, debole, teorie di gauge).

The aim of the course is to provide the students with the fundamental knowledge in the field of low-temperature, technologically relevant plasmas. Particular emphasis is placed on their applications in the field of material engineering and nuclear engineering, such the synthesis of coatings and nanostructures, surface micro- and nano-strutturing, laser-plasma radiation sources and plasma-wall interaction for nuclear fusion research. The course is characterized by a modular structure and a learn-by-doing approach. Each module has curricular laboratory sessions in which the students will put in action their knowledge by means of experimental and/or computational activities. Moreover, a laboratory project will be assigned as the conclusive part of the course: the students, arranged in teams, will design and carry out an experimental campaign dealing with one of the topics presented during the course.

At the end of the course the student:

• Knows and understands the principles of plasma physics, with particular reference to low-temperature and technologically-relevant plasmas, and their applications in science and engineering (DdD1)
• Knows and understands the main properties of laboratory plasmas, with particular reference to the cases discussed during the course (DdD1)
• Is able to apply the acquired knowledge to understand, describe and model the behavior of physical systems in which low-temperature and technologically relevant plasmas are involved (DdD2)
• Is able to design, perform and interpret simple plasma physics experiment and is able to communicate the results in the form of a research paper (DdD2)

The course is organized into 5 modules plus a Project Laboratory.
1) Basic concepts
The course will start with a pre-assessment to gauge the students' previous knowledge and identify any knowledge gaps or misconceptions. Given the diverse background of the students, innovative didactic strategies will be employed, such as “flipped classroom” (with learning material provided by the teacher) and “peer teaching” in working groups. Topics that will be covered include: plasma definition, approaches to describe a plasma (kinetic, multi-fluid, single fluid), characteristic plasma parameters, Debye shielding and sheath-effect, transport of particles and electromagnetic waves in plasmas, optical emission and absorption in a plasma. Special attention is given to dimensional analysis as a powerful tool for grasping the physical foundations of the topics presented.
2) Plasma discharges
This module deals with the phenomenon of plasma discharges and their applications. Frontal lectures will be accompanied by experimental laboratory activities with a glow discharge apparatus. Topics include: collisional ionization, Townsend avalanche, Paschen’s law, DC glow discharge, and an overview of other discharge modes (arc discharge, Dielectric Barrier Discharge, AC discharges, wave-sustained discharge). Applications to medicine and space propulsion can also be discussed, according to students' interests.
3) Plasma-material interaction
This module covers the interactions of plasmas with surfaces, as well as the effects on plasma-exposed materials and the resulting applications. Experimental lab activities will be carried out at the Istituto di Scienza e Tecnologia dei Plasmi (ISTP-CNR Bicocca). Topics include: plasma-surface interactions, plasma sheaths, plasma induced physical processes and sputtering, plasma induced chemical processes, surface functionalization, plasma cleaning, plasma-material interaction in nuclear fusion machines.
4) Laser-generated plasmas
This module provides an overview on laser-plasma interaction in different regimes of laser intensity and relative applications. Frontal lectures will be accompanied by experimental and computational laboratory activities. Topics include: laser-plasma coupling, electromagnetic ionization mechanisms, laser-induced breakdown spectroscopy, laser cleaning, laser-based plasma diagnostics, radiation sources by laser-plasma interaction (electrons, hadrons, high-energy photons).
5) Plasma-based deposition
This module focuses on the deposition of thin films, coatings and nanostructures with controlled properties exploiting plasma-based techniques. Frontal lectures will be accompanied by experimental laboratory activities with Pulsed Laser Deposition and Magnetron Sputtering deposition.
Topics include: plasma assisted physical- and chemical-vapour deposition. Physical vapour deposition. Magnetron sputtering, unbalanced and closed-field sputtering, high-power impulse magnetron sputtering. Pulsed Laser Deposition (PLD): nanosecond- and femtosecond-PLD. Application of coating produced by Physical Vapour Depostion in nuclear fusion and particle acceleration.
6) Laboratory project
Students will be organized in working groups according to their interests and background. In the last part of the semester, each group will develop a project associated to the topics covered in one of the modulus from 2 to 5. The project should focus on a research question proposed by the teacher. Each group, under the teacher’s supervision, will develop a plan to address the research question by means of an experimental (or computational) approach, will carry out the required activities and will deliver a final report, that will be part of the evaluation process. Dedicated sessions of mentoring and review of the projects are foreseen.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua obbligatoria
Continuous evaluation and self evaluation activities are carried out during the semester. In particular, short group assignments are associated to each curricular laboratory. Although homework assignments are optional, a good overall performance in these tasks positively affects the final grade.
The final evaluation consists in an oral examination to assess student’s overall knowledge of the course topics, their understanding of relevant physical phenomena, and their problem solving skills especially when facing novel/unfamiliar situations. The report about the group laboratory project (module 6) will be a topic of discussion during the oral examination, also to ascertain the individual contribution and the degree of autonomy of each group member. The ability to organize knowledge discursively, the proficiency in the use of specialized vocabulary, and the effectiveness of written and oral presentation are also evaluated.

Alexander Piel, An introduction to laboratory, space, and fusion plasmas, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-3319634258
R. Hippler, S. Pfau, M. Schmidt, K. H. Schoenbach, Low Temperature Plasma Physics, Editore: Wiley-VCH, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 3-527-28887-2
U.S. Inan, M. Golkowski, Principles of Plasma Physics for Engineers and Scientists, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-0-521-19372-6
Michael A. Lieberman, Allan J. Lichtenberg, Principles of Plasma Discharges and Materials Processing, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 9780471720010 DOI:10.1002/0471724254
M. Ohring, Materials Science of Thin Films, Editore: Academic Press, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 0-12-524975-6
Leon J. Radziemski, Lasers-Induced Plasmas and Applications, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 9781003066200
ZAVELANI-ROSSI, VISMARRA, High-Intensity Lasers for Nuclear and Physical Applications, Editore: Esculapio, ISBN: 9788893852463
Andrea Macchi, Appunti su Scariche di Plasma per Applicazioni Tecnologiche, Anno edizione: 2011
Note: Lecture notes in italian, provided by the teacher
Paolo Maria Ossi, Plasmi per superfici, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-8873980261
Note: Textbook in Italian

This Laboratory course is aimed at providing theoretical and experimental knowledge about radiation therapy and its fundamental technological and clinical aspects. The course consists of a theoretical part illustrating the basic principles of radiobiology applied to radiotherapy, for better understanding the main relations with the related computational and experimental dosimetry. The fundamental principles of Monte Carlo simulations are illustrated, together with computational and experimental dosimetry techniques applied in conventional radiotherapy and hadrontherapy. Technologies and methods for clinical treatment planning will be described along with the issue of the transfer of the plan to the reality of each irradiation session, including personalized therapies also designed for mobile tumors.
***Access to the course is limited and subject to a maximum number of participants***
Admission procedure
Students enrolled in Biomedical Engineering: for information on the application and admission procedure, students enrolled in Biomedical Engineering should refer to the dedicated section of the Biomedical Engineering Programme website (https://www.ccsbio.polimi.it/laurea-magistrale/?lang=en#TRANSVERSAL_LAB_and_Capstone_Projects_courses)
Students enrolled in Nuclear Engineering: the student must select this course by submitting an autonomous study plan. The student must send an email to [email protected] and to the Study Plans Committee ([email protected]) to express their interest in attending the course. After the deadline for study plan submission, the Study Plans Committee will define the list of admitted students and will confirm or reject each request based on the number of available places. Students who are not admitted to the course must propose an alternative 5-CFU course to the Study Plans Committee.

Expected learning is described according to the Dublin Descriptors (DD): “DD1 Knowing, DD2 applying, DD3 evaluating, DD4 communicating, DD5 learning to learn”.
The student will learn:
-the fundamental aspects of radiobiology for radiotherapy (DD1);
-the main dosimetric quantities related to radiotherapy (DD1);
-the principles of Monte Carlo simulations (DD1 and DD2);
-the main experimental and computational dosimetry techniques in conventional radiotherapy and hadrontherapy (DD1 and DD2);
-the main aspects related to quality assurance, patient positioning and image guidance in conventional radiotherapy and hadrontherapy (DD1);
-technologies and methods for 4D treatment planning and dose delivery (DD1);
-the use of advanced imaging techniques and deep learning for patient stratification and therapy personalization (DD1 and DD2).
The student will be able to:
-elaborate and apply computational and experimental techniques for patient radiotherapy treatments (DD2 and DD3);
-compare experimental data and simulation outcomes in a critical way (DD3);
-exhibit fluency in technical communications in the field of engineering dosimetry techniques for radiation therapy with use of accurate scientific terminology (DD4);
-assess critically different approaches to the treatment plan transfer in the reality of each irradiation session (DD3);
-apply conventional and advanced indices for patient selection and treatment personalization (DD2 and DD5).

Radiobiology for radiotherapy: dose-response curves and radiation-induced DNA damage; quantification of cell kill and cell survival curve; target theory and the assocoiated models; the linear-quadratic model; the isoeffect dose and the nominal standard dose; the clinical use of the the linear-quadratic model in fractionated radiotherapy; early- and late-responding tissues and alpha/beta ratio; equivalent dose in 2 Gy fractions; the relative biological effectiveness and the oxygen effect; tumour volume and tumour growth.
Computational dosimetry: definition of main dosimetric key quantities; cavity theory; introduction to Monte Carlo simulations for calculation of dosimetric quantities.
Computational dosimetry applications for patient treatment: numerical simulation of an alpha depth-dose profile and of a photon depth-dose profile; numerical simulation of a simplified treatment planning on a tumor mass based on the spread out of Bragg peak of a proton beam.
Experimental aspects for verifying computational dosimetry: radiation dosimeters and dosimetry techniques; reference dosimetry and traceability; outline of ion chambers and calorimeters; non-reference dosimetry and Quality Assurance; measurement of an alpha depth-dose profile; measurement of a photon depth-dose profile.
Image guidance for treatment geometry verification, correction and adaptation: Optical tracking technologies; image guidance technologies; Cone-beam CT; QA procedures in radiation therapy.
Treatment planning and delivery in 4D: Motion management strategies; point-based and image based rigid registration.
Models for dynamic targeting of moving tumor volumes: Deformable image registration (DIR); strategies for DIR quality assessment; internal-external correlation strategies for gated irradiation and tumor tracking; global image based modeling in hadrontherapy.
Advanced multiparametric imaging and deep learning for patient stratification and treatment personalization: MRI anatomical and functional imaging for treatment planning; Virtual CT generation; deep learning approaches for CBCT application in adaptive therapy strategies; radiomics and dosiomics for patient stratification and treatment personalization.
Several laboratories will be offered aiming at gaining experience with both computational and experimental features of dosimetry and treatment planning applied to radiotherapy. Moreover, a final project work, focused on a specific application of the topics and tools encountered during the course, will be assigned to students subdivided in small groups.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists in an oral examination aimed at verifying the knowledge of the course topics. In particular, the ability in understanding and describing the fundamental theoretical aspects illustrated during the course and the ability in analyzing and discussing experimental and simulated results will be verified. In addition, the examination requires the preparation and the discussion of a presentation regarding the final project work, in order to test the ability to discuss and communicate results in a professional way.

The course is aimed at providing the students the proper methodologies to design and evaluate life support systems and artificial internal organs, namely artificial lung/ventilation systems, artificial kidney/dialysis therapy, artificial pancreas, artificial heart/ventricular assist devices, being them either implantable, or para-, or extra-corporeal. The machine to patient interaction will be also focused and discussed. After an introduction of the basic physiology of the native internal organs, the design of life support systems will be focused based on the mechanical and physico-chemical phenomena taking place in them. Mass transfer, energy supply and converters, will be studied and optimized as a function of the specific application. Criteria on how to optimize and adjust the performance and efficiency of the systems will be given also paying attention to the specific life-style of the patient.
Moreover the course aims at giving the students hints about ethical approaches to the design of life saving devices and to bring students to make autonomous judgements about the possible solutions to be adopted.
Along the course clinical applications/implantation procedure and devices will be shown to the students either in the form of videos/slides or by showing real commercial devices.

At the end of the course the students are expected to possess both know-how and know-why about the artificial internal organs or life support systems devices working conditions, constraints and design methods.
With reference to the Doublin Descriptors listed herunder:
DD1 - Knowledge and understanding;
DD2 - Applying knowledge and understanding;
DD3 - Making judgements;
DD4 - Communication skills;
DD5 - Learning skills.
the students are expected to develop and acquire abilities to meet all the Descriptors, namely applied to:

• knowledge of the main concepts about the design constraints and specifications of the artificial internal organs or life support systems focused during the course;
• knowledge and understanding of the main physical, mechanical, and chemical phenomena taking place in the devices;
• knowledge to perform calculations to design, quantify, and evaluate, the performances of the devices;
• ability to develop, judge and apply patient specific approaches to the design of artificial systems and know how to optimize the interaction with the living organism;
• development of skills to face and communicate/promote innovation in this field of biomedical engineering.

The course is aimed at teaching design and evaluation criteria of artificial internal organs and life supprot systems devices.
More specifically, the main subjects are the following:

• Survey about functional anatomy and physiology of the internal organs possibly needing assistance or substiitution;
• Design criteria and optimisation of life support systems devices/artificial internal organs;
• Materials choice;
• Adjustment methods and criteria to optimise the machine to patient interface;
• Optimization criteria for device setting;
• Mass transfer in solutions and through artificial membranes;
• Design and optimisation of dialysis filters and oxygenators;
• Design and optimization of blood pumps;
• Energy sources and converters;
• Efficiency evaluation and optimisation criteria of the systems;
  International standards prescription related to the testing and the production of life support systems will also be presented.
  Practical class activities will deal with the solution of problems related to the design and evaluation of the studied life support system/arytificial organs.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The final exam will consist in either an oral or a written test (which in specific cases can be followed by an oral exam) based on the number of students attending the course.
The students will be informed about the exam modalities at the very beginning of the course.
The students will be evaluated based on their capacity to answer theoretical questions about the subjects taught during the course
and to frame them in a wider scenario. More specifically skills about knowledge and understanding and communications, will be
evaluated. Moreover, the student will be evaluated based on his/her capacity to establish connections among the different subjects
dealt with during the course, and among the course and the other courses attended. More specifically, students' skills in applying
knowledge and understanding to problem solving, in making judgements about the possible technical choices, and in communication
modalities to explain and assess the validity of the chosen methods, will be evaluated (as per DD1, DD2, DD3, DD4, DD5).

Maria Laura Costantino, Notes from the Course of Life Support Systems
Note: The notes are available in pdf format on the Beep page of the course.

Lithium-ion batteries (LIBs), first released to power camcorders, have revolutionized the society leading to cell phones market penetration in the 90’s (then laptops, smartphone connected werables etc…) and finally to the connected society we are living in today. Thanks to recent development in LIBs technology, EV cars with ranges above 500 kms are expected and battery production in the EU is expected to reach a 250 Billion€ market within the current decade. The paramount importance of LIBs in modern society was established by the 2019 Nobel Prize awarding in Chemistry to LIBs inventors. LIBs are leading the forthcoming energy transition but new energy storage technologies are quickly raising.
The course will bring students to the understanding and knowledge of the key electrochemical energy storage technologies able to drive the energy transition, focusing on the state of art as well as the new coming challenges. The first part of the course (module 1) is focused on LIBs technology: from the concept of insertion electrodes to the materials used to their designs and manufacturing process, including sustainability aspects of production. In the second part (module 2), safety and critical aspects related to battery materials supply chain and recycling are considered. Moreover, new generation lithium batteries, beyond Li-ion, are explored. In particular, non-Li chemistries such as Zn-based batteries, supercapacitors and technologies for long duration storage, e.g. redox flow batteries, are introduced and discussed within the framework of the energy transition and resilience.

In the framework of course and exam preparation and evaluation, students will:

• learn the working principles of LIBs and post-LIBs technologies (DdD1);
• understand the principle of battery design, for a specific target e.g. high energy or high power (DdD1);
• understand the challenges and opportunities in the forthcoming energy transition in relation to the development of LIBs and next-generation batteries (DdD1);
• critically analyze the energy technologies' strengths and weaknesses in relation to the various application fields (DdD2);
• be able to do an autonomous literature review and communicate the results of their activity with clarity and proper language (DdD2).

Li-ion batteries: the key feature of LIBs technologies.
History
Electrochemical working principles
Materials (active and inactive materials)
Safety
Post LIBs: working principles and materials
Li-metal batteries (LMBs)
Lithium-Sulfur batteries (LSBs)
Design rules for LMBs and LSBs
The European scenario and EU objectives:
Supply chain
Recycling
Beyond Li chemistries: working principles, materials and challenges for non-Li based chemistries.
Panorama of the non-Li batteries (Na-ion, K-ion, Zn-ion, etc.)
Supercapacitors
Long-duration energy storage (LDES)
Redox flow batteries
Design rules for LDES
The course will be inclusive of laboratory demonstration and activities related to LIBs materials, electrode preparation, battery assembly and testing.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Students are requested to prepare a.ppt presentation on a specific topic in the framework of the course. The topic must be approved by the teachers and presentation will be followed by Q&A session.

The main objective of the course is to provide the students with the necessary tools for the design and assessment of machine components, both under static and fatigue loading. The basics of mechanical design are illustrated in order to include capability to develop simplified structural models, basic theory of elasticity, design methods for static and fatigue loads (multiaxial and variable amplitude loading) and tools for assessing the influence of notches on static and fatigue strength.

Once the students has passed the exam, the students will:
possess the knowledge of the main tools (analytic approach) and methods for modelling structural behaviour of simple machine components/systems; (DdD1)
understand assumptions and limitations of the beforementioned tools and methods; (DdD1)
perform design and assessment of machine components/systems subjected to static and fatigue loading; (DdD2)
analyse and critically discuss the results. (DdD2)
Thanks to the practices that are focussed on case studies (basic optimization technique, bolted and welding joints, basic of gears, pressure vessels, power transmission shafts, static design of a prothesis) the students will improve the skills necessary for practical design applications. Moreover, the theoretical concepts and the case studies will provide together a more general capability to approach an engineering solution of simple problems related to structural design in several fields. These competences are therefore of benefit for a wide range of study courses.

The course is organized in lectures and tutorials. Theoretical concepts will be applied during application in order to show an engineering approach to the design and assessment of actual and relevant components.
Internal forces: definition of slender members, definition of internal forces and equations of equilibrium, frames;
Axial and bending problem in beams: hypotheses and basic assumptions for the Euler-Bernoulli beam; state of stress due to normal force and bending moment;
Shear in beams: relationship between bending moment and shear force; shear stress distribution in case of solid section; torsion in beam: distribution of torsional stresses for a circular solid beam;
State of stress: definition of equilibrium for deformable bodies; Cauchy tetrahedron; principal stresses and directions; stress invariants; hydrostatic stress tensor and stress deviator tensor; Mohr’s circles for plane stress; three-dimensional description of Mohr’s circles;
Material behaviour: tensile test devices and specimens; engineering stress-strain curve; true stress-strain curve; ductile and brittle failure mechanisms; ideal material models;
Influence of notch for ductile and brittle materials: phenomenological aspects; definition of Kt and Ks parameters.
Stress-strain relations: general expression of the elastic tensor; elastic tensor for isotropic materials; derivation of the generalised Hooke’s law; stress-strain relationships for plane stress and plane strain.
Failure criteria for isotropic materials: Galileo-Leibniz-Rankine-Navier criterion for brittle materials; Guest-Saint Venant-Tresca criterion for ductile materials; Huber-Hencky-von Mises criterion for ductile materials; general considerations about the definition of the safety factor;
Fatigue: fatigue phenomena; fatigue testing; definition of fatigue cycles; Wöhler diagram; finite and infinite life regime; relationship between fatigue limit and tensile strength; influence of mean stress with Haigh diagrams; notch effect on fatigue; influence of surface finishing; size effect and influence of stress gradient; damage accumulation with Miner-Palmgren rule; Gough-Pollard and Sines criteria for multi-axial loading condition.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The exam is based on a written test followed by a voluntary oral one. Written exam is compulsory and cover all the theoretical and applicative topics of the course. The written test will include the solution of numerical exercises, aimed at assessing the capability of application of the design tools to practical cases and questions aimed at assessing the students’ capability of application of the design tools to simple practical cases regarding machine components and systems and/or to test students’ knowledge and understanding of the theoretical topics included in the program. Oral exam is voluntary and possible only in case written exam has been positively passed; oral exam can modify the score of +- 3 points and have to be carried out in the same exam session of the written one. The oral test will prove also the capability of critically discuss the design tools and their limits and or applicability conditions. Practical exercises can be also requested during oral exam.

Lecture notes by the teacher (english) Beep
N. E. Dowling, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, Global Edition 5th Edition, Editore: Person, Anno edizione: 2019
AA. VV, Costruzione di Macchine, Editore: McGraw Hill
Note: (italian language)

The course presents the two most important manifestation of ordering phenomena in solids beyond the crystal lattice: magnetism and superconductivity. The two are crucial for the understanding of the transport properties of crystalline materials, and can be exploited in a multitude of applications. Magnetism and superconductivity are governed by microscopic interactions, ultimately among electrons, but the macroscopic phenomenology is the result of interatomic interactions and dimensionality. Bose-Einstein condensation (BEC) and superfluidity are also presented as they share with magnetism and superconductivity the property of being macroscopic quantum phenomena.
The objective of the course is thus to provide a broad knowledge and understanding of ordering phenomena in solids. Phenomenology, experimental methods and theoretical models are considered and confronted. More broadly the goal is to introduce the students to the real world of advanced condensed matter research, with special emphasis on phenomenology and experimental insight.

Lectures and seminars will allow students to:
Know the fundamental concepts of ordering phenomena
Recognize the different types of magnetic order
Know the general phenomenology of superconductivity, superfluidity and BEC
Determine which experimental methods can be used in the study of magnetism and superconductivity and, in general, of ordering phenomena in solids
Read and understand original research papers in the fields of magnetism and superconductivity
Present a brief seminar on basic concepts and advanced examples on modern magnetism and superconductivity
Therefore, after passing the exam, the student will be able to:
DD1 - Understand the principles of magnetism and order phenomena, know the terminology related to them, employ the basic models applicable to them
DD2 - Recognize analogue of magnetism and superconductivity in other contexts and apply models ant techniques in new contexts of physics and technology
DD4 - Communicate their own perception of physics phenomena in a formal presentation and elaborate on them

Magnetism of isolated magnetic moments
Phenomenology: recalling diamagnetism, paramagnetism.
Weiss model for ferromegnetism and antiferromagnetism
Atomic moments.
Hunds rules
Crystal field: origin of CF, quenching of orbital moments, Jahn-Teller effect.
Exchange interaction
Examples of simple 3d transition metal oxides (NiO, MnO, Fe3O4)
Goodenough Kanamori rules
Perovskites
Manganites and cuprates
Magnetic order and magnetic structures.
Order parameters
Heisenberg and Ising models
Magnetism in metals
Pauli paramagnetism
Landau diamagnetism
Stoner model
RKKY interaction, Kondo effect
Excitations in magnetic systems
Spin waves
Stoner excitations
Magnetism at low dimensionality
Spin chains and spin ladders
2 dimensional magnets
Thin films
Bose-Einstein Condensation (BEC) and Superfluidity:
Bose-Einstein statistics
BEC principles
BEC of ultra-cold atomic gas
Macroscopic wave function and quantum fluids
Superfluid HeII
Superfluid flow and vortices
Superconductivity:
Phenomenology: transport, susceptibility, thermodynamics
London equations
Josephson effect
Ginzburg-Landau model
BCS theory
Cuprate superconductors (also as an example of 2D antiferromagnets).
Experimental techniques.
Magnetic resonances, Mössbauer spectroscopy, muon spin rotation.
Elastic and inelastic scattering of neutrons and x-rays for magnetic structure and magnetic excitations.
Synchrotron radiation based techniques for magnetism: selected examples of X-ray spectroscopy.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of two parts held during a single interview, in English.
1) A seminar of 20-25 minutes, on a subject pre-assigned by the teacher. The student has to present the general concepts of the theme in a correct and complete way, providing some examples at the level of the lectures and of the text book. The student is also invited to look for original examples, applications, interconnections with other subjects, to demonstrate a higher level of understanding. A PowerPoint presentation is best suited for the seminar, but black/white board option is also possible.
2) Two or three questions on the core of the course as presented in the lectures. The student is requested to answer at the black/white board to show their understanding of the basic concepts and notions of the course. Theoretical and experimental aspects will be valued equally important.
A fully successful exam (27-30/30) will be deemed when a solid and broad mastering of the concepts of ordering phenomena in solids is demonstrated.
An average grade (22-26/30) will be the result of fairly complete understanding of individual themes but with limited interconnection among subjects.
A pass level (18-21/30) will correspond to a minimum knowledge of individual notions.

S. Blundell, Magnetismm in condensed matter, Editore: Oxford University Press, ISBN: 978-0198505914
James F. Annett, Superconductivity, Superfluids and Condensates, Editore: Oxford university Press, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 978-0-19-860756-7
Harald Ibach, Hans Lüth, Solid-State Physics: An Introduction to Principles of Materials Science, Editore: Springer, ISBN: 978-3540938033

The course is aimed at developing a full understanding on the main failure mechanisms encountered in metals and on the environmental and loading conditions that can induce anticipated failure of structural parts.
Methods for the nondestructive measurement of the integrity of materials will also be covered in the second part of the course to give a comprehensive frame of information about the testing of metal structures against unexpected failures in service.

After attending the course and final examination, the students will:
a) know the fundamental mechanisms about failure of metals under different service conditions (DdD1);
b) know the different methods to perform non-destructive tests on structural parts (DdD1);
c) be able to apply the above knowledge for the evaluation of expected damage to be found in structural metallic parts as a function of manufacturing routes and service conditions (DdD2);
d) be able to select the best method (or combination of methods) for the non-destructive detection of defects in structural parts (DdD2).

The topics covered during the course are:
1) Failure mechanisms in metals: Principles of linear elastic fracture mechanics / Ductile fracture mechanism (microvoid formation) / Brittle fracture by cleavage and intergranular mechanisms / Strain and damage by fatigue / Strain and damage by creep.
2) Embrittlement mechanisms: Hydrogen embrittement / Liquid metal embrittlement (LME) / Loss of ductility at high temperature in steels / Temper embrittlement.
3) Residual stresses in metals: Micro and macro stress fields / Measurement of residual stresses / X-ray diffraction / Hole-drilling strain-gage method / other mechanical methods / Failures and distortion due to residual stresses.
4) Defects in metals related to manufacturing: Casting / Welding / Hot deformation / Cold forming / Thermal treatments and coatings.
5) Non destructive testing: X-ray radioscopy / Die penetrants testing / Ultrasound testing / Eddy current testing / Magnetoscopic testing.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The integrated course of "Mechanical Behaviour and Failure of Metals" is made up of the two modules of "Mechanical Behaviour of Metals" and of "Failure and control of Metals".
The exam of the module "Failure and control of Metals" consists of a written test only consisting of a short number of open questions (typically 3 or 4 questions) where the student will be asked to summarize the main concepts learnt about selected general topics.
The final mark of the integrated course will be registered as the average of the two modules once both have been passed. The positive evaluation of each single module will expire at end of the exam sessions of the running academic year.

C.R. Brooks, A. Choudhury, Failure analysis of engineering materials, Editore: Mc Graw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2002
R.W. Cahn, P. Haasen, E.J. Kramer, Materials science and technology, Vol. 6 Plastic deformation and fracture of metals, Editore: VCH Weinheim publisher, Anno edizione: 1996
R.W. Hertzberg, Deformation and fracture mechanics of engineering materials, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 1989
M.A. Meyers, R.W. Armstrong, H.O.K. Kirchner, Mechanics and Materials - Fundamentals and linkages, Editore: Wiley-Interscience publisher, Anno edizione: 1999
R.W. Messler, Principles of welding - Processes, physics, chemistry and metallurgy, Editore: Wiley-Interscience publisher, Anno edizione: 1999
J. Campbell, Casting - second Edition,, Editore: Butterworth Heinemann publisher, Anno edizione: 1991

This course aims at providing the students with knowledge about radiation therapy and emission tomography and their fundamental technological aspects. The first part of the course deals with the interaction of radiation with the biological tissue for better understanding the mechanisms ruling dose delivering in radiation therapy. Moreover, some outlines about radiobiology are given, for understanding radiation interactions with the DNA and the cellular response against radiation. Microdosimetry is also introduced for focusing on measurement techniques, which are capable of giving deeper information about the quality of radiation fields. Two emission diagnostic techniques (SPECT and PET) are discussed by focusing on the detection systems and the phenomena affecting their response. The operation principles of particle accelerators applied to radiation therapy are given for a better understanding of the engineering aspects linked to the patient treatment. The final part of the course discusses electron and X-ray therapy, both conventional and conformal, and hadrontherapy with protons and carbon ions. Boron Neutron Capture Therapy (BNCT) is also treated, together with the problematics linked to the use of research nuclear reactors and particle accelerators as neutron sources.

The student:
knows the fundamental interactions of radiation with the biological tissue and the cellular response to radiation, the main emission diagnostic and radiation therapy techniques, the principles of operation of particle accelerators applied for radiation therapy and the detection techniques for dosimetry;
can apply her/his knowledge for assessing the quality of radiation fields and the radiation dose (laboratory sessions);
can judge critically the advantages and the problematics of different radiation therapy techniques;
acquires skills for communicating her/his knowledge in the field of engineering techniques for radiation therapy.

Principles of Radiation Physics. Definition of absorbed dose and dose prescription in radiation therapy. Interactions (ionization, excitation and Coulomb scattering) of charged particles with biological tissues. Production of Bremsstrahlung X-rays. Inelastic interactions of intermediate-energy hadrons with biological tissues. Photonuclear reactions. Interactions of electromagnetic radiation with biological tissues. Interactions of neutrons with biological tissues.
Outlines on radiation biology. Direct and indirect interactions of radiation with DNA. Survival curves. Relative biological effectiveness (RBE). The oxygen effect. Fractionation of radiation therapy.
Microdosimetry. Principles of microdosimetry. Microdosimetric spectra. The tissue-equivalent proportional counter (TEPC). Outlines on nanodosimetry.
Emission diagnostic techniques. Single Photon Emission Tomography (SPECT): collimation and detection of gamma rays, influence of Compton scattering. Positron Emission Tomography (PET): coincidence detection techniques, spatial resolution, random coincidence, attenuation and scattering, PET scintillators.
Principles of operation of particle accelerators. The Cockroft-Walton and Van de Graaff electrostatic accelerators. The betatron. The cyclotron. Resonant cavities (outlines). Linear accelerators for ions and electrons. The synchrotron (outlines).
Techniques for dose delivering. X-ray and electron radiation therapy: electron scatterers, Bremsstrahlung targets, flattening filters, collimators. Hadron-therapy: dual-scattering systems, modulators, spread-out of Bragg peak, active techniques. The gamma-knife and stereotactic techniques.
Boron Neutron capture Therapy (BNCT). Principles of BNCT. Neutron field tailoring for BNCT. Accelerator-based neutron sources for BNCT.
Course Organization
The course is structured in one semester with lectures of six hours per week. Seven experimental laboratories (duration about four hours per lab session) are offered, aiming at gaining experience with different types of radiation measurement techniques. Visits to radiation therapy, hadron therapy and BNCT facilities are organized in the framework of the course.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation consists in an oral examination. It aims at verifying the knowledge of the course topics, by focusing on the ability in understanding the physical and radiobiological aspects of different radiation therapy and diagnostic techniques. The student’s capability in evaluating the rationale of the engineering solutions to the main problematics of radiation therapy and dosimetry will also be verified. The first part of the exam foresees a critical discussion of one of the laboratory sessions. In particular, the student’s capability of carrying out autonomously a laboratory session will be verified. The student’s communication capabilities will be tested through discussions about the advantages of a given radiation therapy technique, the solutions adopted for dose delivery, the techniques for measuring the dose and for assessing the beam quality.

Notes about all the course topics and the laboratory sessions are available on the WeBeeP site.

Immagini biomediche - Introduzione: importanza dell'imaging, 3D, multimodale e funzionale. Metodi di ricostruzione da proiezioni di immagini 3D, numerici, statistici. Principi e strumentazione per immagini di risonanza magnetica nucleare (MRI). Non idealità ed artefatti MRI. Spettroscopia MRI in vivo. Angiografia MRI. Immagini MRI pesate in diffusione e trattografia. MRI funzionale e mappe parametriche statistiche. Ecografia non lineare e 3D. Immagini cardiache.
Chirurgia assistita - Struttura dei sistemi di Computer Aided Surgery (CAS). Fase pre-operatoria: imaging 4-D; metodi di segmentazione 2D e 3D; modellazione e rappresentazione di superfici e volumi. Simulazione e pianificazione chirurgica: convenzioni di rappresentazione di posizione e orientamento; mapping e trasformazioni. Cenni di robotica in chirurgia: catene cinematiche, problema cinematico diretto e inverso. Fase intra-operatoria: chirurgia stereotassica e chirurgia guidata da immagini. Il problema della registrazione: metodi per punti corrispondenti; registrazione di superfici; acquisizione e registrazione di immagini intra-operatorie; Target Registration Error. Navigazione in chirurgia. Gestione dei fenomeni di organ motion; metodi di registrazione non rigida. Esempi di applicazione: neurochirurgia, chirurgia ortopedica, radiochirurgia.

L'insegnamento affronta i diversi aspetti del problema dei cambiamenti climatici globali, con l'obiettivo principale di fornire gli elementi necessari per l’impostazione e la valutazione delle politiche di mitigazione. Per raggiungere questo obiettivo, sono approfondite le basi fenomenologiche del problema, mostrando l'origine e l'entità delle diverse forzanti antropiche, nonché gli impatti attesi a breve e lungo termine sui diversi comparti ambientali. Dopo aver familiarizzato durante le esercitazioni con i metodi di stima delle emissioni di gas serra da diverse tipologie di sorgenti, sono valutati gli scenari emissivi redatti da diverse organizzazioni scientifiche.
Nella seconda parte del corso sono presentate le strategie di riduzione delle emissioni di gas serra nei diversi settori e a diverse scale, e sono valutate anche tramite esercitazioni pratiche le metodologie per la stima del potenziale di riduzione delle emissioni di diverse opzioni tecnologiche. Un secondo e non meno importante obiettivo del corso è quello di far capire l'evoluzione del negoziato internazionale sui cambiamenti climatici, nonché di mostrare il ruolo che possono avere i principali strumenti del mercato del carbonio nel favorire la decarbonizzazione del sistema energetico. Sono infine illustrate le principali politiche sul clima proposte a livello europeo e sono discussi i motivi del ritardo nell'implementazione delle politiche di mitigazione del cambiamento climatico, affrontando anche i problemi legati alla comunicazione.

Dopo aver frequentato l'insegnamento e aver superato con successo le prove d'esame, lo studente:

• Conosce le principali fonti di emissione di gas serra e le principali metodologie di stima (Descrittore di Dublino: 1)
• Comprende i fondamenti scientifici del problema del riscaldamento globale, il ruolo dei fattori naturali e antropici, le scale spaziali e temporali dei diversi processi, l'importanza dei fenomeni di feedback presenti nel sistema climatico, gli scenari futuri di aumento delle temperature e di altri impatti in relazione a diverse ipotesi di evoluzioni dei sistemi energetici e delle relative emissioni climalteranti (Descrittore di Dublino: 1)
• Conosce le diverse tipologie di azioni disponibili per ridurre le emissioni di gas serra e per rimuovere la CO 2 atmosferica, acquisendo capacità di valutare vantaggi e svantaggi delle diverse opzioni e il loro potenziale (Descrittore di Dublino: 2 e 3)
• Comprende il ruolo del negoziato internazionale sul clima e acquisisce capacità di applicare a diversi contesti territoriali i concetti compresi, nonché di valutare ad esempio il livello di ambizione degli impegni presi da diversi Stati nell'ambito dell'Accordo di Parigi (Descrittore di Dublino: 2 e 3)
• impara a giudicare come i mezzi di comunicazione informano sul cambiamento climatico, nonché a riconoscere e superare i problemi tipici della comunicazione di questo tema (Descrittore di Dublino: 3 e 4)

Parte I
1. Introduzione ai cambiamenti climatici: scale temporali e spaziali, il ruolo dell'IPCC
2. Emissioni di gas serra: fonti e metodologie di stima.
3. Il bilancio del carbonio e gli inventari delle emissioni di gas serra a diverse scale territoriali.
4. Dati osservativi sui cambiamenti climatici: gas serra in atmosfera, temperature, precipitazioni, consistenza dei ghiacci, livello del mare
5. Fenomenologia dell’effetto serra e principali fenomeni di feedback.
6. I modelli e le proiezioni climatiche: tipologie di modelli e di scenari emissivi, recenti proiezioni
7. Impatti dei cambiamenti climatici e misure di adattamento, in diversi settori
Parte II
8. Opzioni per la mitigazione. Risparmio energetico ed efficienza energetica. Energie rinnovabili (eolico, fotovoltaico, idroelettrico, geotermico, biomasse). Energia nucleare. Stoccaggio dell'energia; produzione di idrogeno e biocombustibili. Carbon Capture and Storage (CCS) e Carbon Capture and Utilisation (CCU). Scenari tecnologici e potenziali di riduzioni in diversi settori (energia, trasporti, agricoltura).
9. Opzioni per la rimozione della CO2 atmosferica. La necessità delle emissioni negative. Imboschimento e rimboschimento, sequestro del carbonio nel suolo, biochar, bioenergia con cattura e stoccaggio del carbonio (BECCS), cattura diretta di CO2 dall'aria e stoccaggio (DACCS), alcalinizzazione degli oceani (ocean liming), enhanced rock weathering.
10. Scenari di decarbonizzazione (cenni)
11. Il negoziato sul clima: Dalla Convenzione UNFCCC all'Accordo di Parigi. Analisi degli NDC di diversi Stati.
12. Il mercato del carbonio: i meccanismi flessibili del protocollo di Kyoto: ETS, JI, CDM e i nuovi strumenti dell’art. 6 dell’Accordo di Parigi. Il sistema europeo di Emission Trading. I crediti del mercato volontario
13. Clima e comunicazione (cenni)
Esercitazioni e laboratori: Stima delle emissioni di gas serra per sorgenti di combustione. Stima della carbon footprint personale. Elaborazione dati di emissioni e temperature. Kaya Identity e decomposizione delle emissioni per diverse nazioni. Scenari tecnologici di riduzione delle emissioni: i cunei di riduzione. Analisi e confronto fra le opzioni tecnologiche per emissioni negative. Confronto degli NDC di diversi paesi.
Saranno previsti seminari ad invito e visite tecniche, da definire

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
L'esame si svolge in forma di prova scritta, è composta da 15 domande chiuse (scelta fra opzioni), da 2 domande aperte e da 2 esercizi sui temi delle esercitazioni.
Concorreranno alla definizione del voto finale anche attività pratiche facoltative svolte nel corso del semestre, che verranno presentate agli studenti all'inizio delle lezioni, e saranno definite in dettaglio di anno in anno.
In aggiunta allo scritto è prevista anche la possibilità di richiedere un esame orale facoltativo (massima variazione +/- 2 punti).

IPCC, Climate Change 2022: Mitigation of Climate Change - Summary for policymakers, Editore: IPCC, Anno edizione: 2022 https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar6/wg3/downloads/report/IPCC_AR6_WGIII_SPM.pdf
M. Giusti, L'urgenza di agire. Perché e come abbandonare rapidamente le fonti fossili, Editore: LuCe Edizioni, Anno edizione: 2024, ISBN: 978-88-97556-49-7 https://luce-edizioni.it/prodotto/l-urgenza-di-agire/
S. Caserini, Il clima è (già) cambiato. 9 buone notizie sui cambiamenti climatici, Editore: Edizioni Ambiente, Anno edizione: 2019, ISBN: 978-88-6627-272-4 https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar6/wg3/downloads/report/IPCC_AR6_WGIII_SPM.pdf
Eelco J. Rohling, Oceani. Una storia profonda, Editore: Edizioni Ambiente, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 9788866273189
Mann M, Le nuove guerre del clima, Editore: Edizioni Ambiente, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9788866273301
Hansen J., Tempeste, Editore: Edizioni Ambiente, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 9788896238677

The course aims at describing the physical principles of energy conversion processes, with particular focus on the photovoltaic and the thermoelectric energy conversion effects, and the properties of materials of interest for such applications, with particular attention to new nanostructured materials and systems. Specific lectures will be focused on the principles and nanomaterials-related aspects of other direct energy conversion technologies.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:

• know the physical principles needed for a microscopic description of electrical and heat transport phenomena in materials, with particular focus on semiconductors in non-equilibrium conditions and under illumination, and the physical principles underlying the photovoltaic effect, the thermoelectric effects and other energy conversion effects/devices (e.g. photocatalysis, fuel cells); (DdD1)
• know the working principles, the materials-related aspects and the architecture of the most important classes of photovoltaic and thermoelectric devices, including those employing nanomaterials and nanostructures; (DdD1)
• know the current research trends in the application of nanotechnologies and nanomaterials for the development of novel energy conversion devices; (DdD1)
• be able to apply the above knowledge to a critical description and discussion of the devices and the related materials properties, limitations and developments, with a quantitative approach, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way. (DdD2)

• Introduction to direct energy conversion technologies
• Properties of solar radiation
• Introduction to irreversible thermodynamics for the description of transport phenomena; kinetic coefficients and Onsager theorem
• Review of semiconductor physics and properties
• Microscopic description of charge and heat transport in solids: Boltzmann equation; derivation of electrical conductivity for metals and semiconductors
• The photovoltaic effect; p-n junction under illumination, I-V characteristic of solar cells, definition of power conversion efficiency and quantum efficiency; limits for the efficiency (detailed balance limit, thermodynamic limit)
• Crystalline Si solar cells (1st generation)
• Thin film solar cells (2nd generation)
• Excitonic solar cells: organic (bulk heterojunction) and hybrid solar cells, dye-sensitized and perovskite solar cells
• New concepts for 3rd generation solar cells (tandem or multijunction cells, intermediate band cells, multiple exciton generation, hot carrier cells, up- and down-conversion, concentration)
• Nanostructured materials for 3rd generation solar cells (e.g. QD-based solar cells)
• Phenomenology of thermoelectric effects (Seebeck, Peltier, Thomson);
• Irreversible thermodynamics description of thermoelectric effects: relationship between thermoelectric coefficients and kinetic coefficients
• Efficiency and figure of merit of thermoelectric systems (refrigeration and power generation)
• Boltzmann equation: derivation of thermal conductivity and thermoelectric coefficients for metals and semiconductors
• Conventional and advanced thermoelectric materials; the phonon glass-electron crystal concept, the substructure approach; Bi2Te3 and related compounds, skutterudites, clathrates, complex oxides
• Nanostructured thermoelectric materials, examples (superlattices, nanowires, nanocrystalline or nanocomposite materials)
  During the course specific seminar lectures will be organized, to discuss recent developments in other energy conversion technologies involving nanomaterials (e.g. fuel cells, solar water splitting, batteries).
  See bibliography for suggested books (covering more than the programme of the course). Additional documents or lecture notes will be made available by the lecturer.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination is an oral discussion about the course topics, chosen by the examiner (typically one topic related to photovoltaic physics, materials and devices, and one topic related to thermoelectricity and thermoelectric materials and devices).
The student must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the topics, with the related hypotheses, the critical points, the physical meaning, the mathematical approach (complete derivations are not strictly required, but of course their knowledge may contribute to the final mark; however understanding the physics underlying the mathematical approach is considered the fundamental aspect), the materials properties, the device architecture and properties. The student should also know the value or order of magnitude of the main important quantities involved in the discussion, and may be asked to apply the theoretical knowledge to specific examples, with a quantitative approach.

J. Nelson, The Physics of Solar Cells, Editore: Imperial College Press, Anno edizione: 2003
H.J. Goldsmid, Introduction to Thermoelectricity, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2009

Nature Based Solutions or NBS refers to nature-inspired environmental management and intervention solutions. It is a relatively recent concept, used by the European Commission to identify strategies, actions, technologies and interventions, which provide environmental services and socio-economic benefits that can increase environmental resilience. Today there is great attention to these solutions and to the development and enhancement of innovative technological solutions based on the example of natural systems. Examples of NBS are the so-called "green infrastructures" used to control stormwater runoff in urban areas, constructed wetlands and the modern "vertical gardens". In the proposed course, the different types of NBS will be illustrated, the main design parameters will be indicated and the basics to quantify their ability to provide ecosystem services will be provided.
The course is held by two teachers:
Arianna Azzellino, main expertise: ecosystems quality, environmental risk, and impact assessment
Grazia Concilio, main expertise: urbanization challenges and policy making for sustainability transition

After taking the course,
D1. knowledge and understanding: a) the student knows the fundamental principles underlying nature-based solutions; b) knows and understands the environmental issues that NBS may help to solve; c) understands the principles of available NBS technologies; d) knows the data and tools needed to build the assessment scenario for designing NBS
D2. Applying knowledge and understanding: the student is able to apply the knowledge acquired to case studies
D3. Making judgements: a) the student is able to evaluate the feasibility and potential benefits of an NBS intervention in a specific context; b) is able to provide an evaluation of NBS, even if not strictly related to those evaluated in the course;
D4. Communication skills: the student is able to explain what he/she has learnt and the reasons for his/her own evaluations in a clear and convincing way
D5. Learning skills: the student has acquired the skills needed to pursue further study independently.

1. Principles of Nature-Based Solutions for enhancing resilience to climate change.
2. The concept of ecosystem services
3. Human activities interrelations with ecological systems and main tools and approaches for applying Nature-Based Solutions to reducing climate risks.
4. Green infrastructures as aviable complement to grey engineered protection structures for reducing impacts of disaster events.
5. Main design parameters of the different types of NBS and their ability to provide ecosystem services
6. Environmental factors of interest for designing NBS
7. Practical guided examples on how to apply Nature-Based Solutions for reducing risks of natural hazards by investing in restoration and protection. (The students will work in teams and will provide a preliminary evaluation of an NBS application scenario. GIS tools will be used)

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of two evaluation parts: the first part is an individual test with open / closed questions to be answered on the topics covered during the course and accounts for 90% of the grade; the second part refers to a Lab proejct group that is not mandatory and accounts for 10% of the final grade.
The final examination aims to evaluate not only the students' knowledge of Nature-based Solutions (NbS), but also their ability to apply the concepts discussed during the course to simple real-world situations.
The assessment is based on the following criteria:
Understanding of the fundamental concepts related to Nature-based Solutions and ecosystem services.
Ability to identify and explain the ecosystem services provided by different Nature-based Solutions.
Capacity to interpret simple scenarios and apply the acquired knowledge to support decision-making.
Critical thinking, including the recognition of multifunctionality, synergies and potential trade-offs among alternative Nature-based Solutions.
Quality and clarity of reasoning, particularly when explaining assumptions and justifying answers.
Appropriate use of scientific terminology and effectiveness of communication.

course slides and handouts

The aim of this course is to provide the specific tools for thermo-mechanical analysis and design assessment of nuclear reactor structural components. This goal is achieved by taking into account the irradiation effects occurring in the materials selected for fission reactors, and for controlled thermo-nuclear fusion applications as well. On this basis, and in the light of the key neutronics features and the figures of merit concerning both the reactor and the fuel cycle, the course allows acquiring the main criteria of the "design-by-analysis" methodology adopted in the nuclear field. In particular, it develops - both from the conceptual and the quantitative point of view - an "engineering approach" to design and verification, with reference to thermal-hydraulic and thermo-mechanical modelling of reactor components under irradiation, to their technological limits and mutual compatibility requirements, to the main manufacturing and operational issues, and to nuclear regulatory specifications as well. To this end, a significant project of "design-by-analysis" is assigned every year to the class, in the frame of Project Lab activities (in-presence) aimed at the preliminary mechanical sizing and verification of a typical nuclear component.

The student knows and understands:
selection principles, technological limits, failure mechanisms, and mutual compatibility requirements of primary materials in a nuclear reactor; thermal-hydraulic and thermo-mechanical modelling tools for the analysis and design assessment of a structural component, according to ASME verification criteria.
The student is able:
to make a critical choice of primary materials and assessment of technological issues, design data and figures of merit for current/Gen IV fission reactors; to evaluate stress and strain fields in a structural component under static loading conditions, including neutron irradiation effects on material behaviour; to tackle issues concerning fuel rod performance under irradiation.
The Project Lab will allow students:
to apply their knowledge and understanding of the "design-by-analysis" approach to a structural component, for its preliminary mechanical sizing and verification of thermo-mechanical limits; to develop team-working attitude, autonomous capabilities in terms of engineering-related cognitive competencies (modelling skills), practical abilities (problem solving), learning and communication skills (continuous in-presence interaction with dedicated teaching assistants is planned along the Project Lab).

The course is organized in the following topics, intended as pillars to build a framework of knowledge useful for the development of design-by-analysis skills, in close connection with the Project Lab activity, which plays a central role:
Overview of nuclear reactor technologies. Primary materials of a nuclear reactor: functional requirements, selection principles, technological limits, mutual compatibility criteria, and their implications at level of plant and fuel cycle. Critical review of technological issues, design data and figures of merit in the different types of current/Gen IV fission reactors. Overview of materials adopted as fuel and cladding, and for pressure vessels.
Structural analysis and material constitutive relations. Recalls of continuum mechanics with notes on Cosserat theory of elasticity. Engineering stress-strain curve, Charpy impact test and failure analysis diagram, ideal material models. Generalized equations for Hooke's law, Lamé relations, elastic compliance matrix, thermo-elastic effect. General approach (both in terms of displacements and stresses) for solving a thermo-elastic problem. Axial-symmetric problems, Euler equation for the thermo-elastic behaviour. Thermal stresses under static and transient conditions. Plasticity and creep (Prandtl-Reuss flow laws, Soderberg equations).
Strength of materials and failure assessment criteria. Recalls of multi-axial strength theories and their application. Ductile and brittle failure mechanisms. "Design-by-analysis" of structural components, general considerations on safety. Primary, secondary and peak stresses and verification criteria. Technological and design issues for pressure retaining members. Design criteria for protection against brittle fracture. Notes on cyclic response of materials and limit analysis theorems. Ashby maps and creep master curves.
Thermo-mechanics for nuclear reactor components. Neutron irradiation effects at engineering scale in structural materials (general principles, atomic displacements, embrittlement, induced activity, swelling, growth, irradiation creep), failure mechanisms of the main structural components of a nuclear reactor. Notes on nuclear safety, quality, regulation (ASME III code) and design.
Thermal-hydraulics of reactor core power channels. Notes on: thermo-hydraulic modelling and analysis of fission reactor core power channels. Main phenomena occurring in the fuel (e.g., relocation, restructuring, plutonium redistribution, densification, swelling, thermal conductivity degradation, high burnup structure, fission gas release, melting, pellet-cladding interaction) during operating/accidental conditions. Notes on fuel rod performance, design and verification.
Selected case studies, among: Thin and thick cylindrical and spherical shells subject to temperature gradient, internal, and external pressure. Preliminary thickness sizing for vessel and piping design. Shrink-fit stresses in built-up cylinders, fully plastic pressure, autofrettage. Discontinuity stresses at vessel junctures. Interaction domains of membrane and bending stresses. Buckling and resistance verification of cylindrical shells under external pressure. Thermal creep verification based on Larson-Miller approach, design limits for creep. Thermo-mechanical modelling and analysis of the fuel rod behaviour under irradiation.
The course includes a Project Lab focused on analysis, design and verification activities, targeting the application of the “design-by-analysis” methodology adopted in the nuclear field. In particular, the Project Lab concerns the preliminary mechanical sizing and verification of a significant structural component of a fission reactor (e.g., fuel rod, fuel element, pressure vessel and thermal shielding, steam generator), chosen each year among those adopted in current/Gen IV fission reactors. The development of the Project Lab allows the students to apply both their background knowledge and the contents of the present course, highlighting connections among the different pillars of knowledge covered during the lectures. The topic of the Project Lab is going to be assigned at the very beginning of the course, to allow the students to work on it for proper amount of time. Dedicated classroom activities are going to be organized, targeting the progressive (self)-evaluation of the knowledge acquired and its application in the Project Lab activities. Students are going to be divided in small groups to work on the activities related to the Project Lab and supported by dedicated teaching assistants. Part of the course hours dedicated to the Project Lab is meant as flipped classroom, with the required material provided digitally to the students in advance and classroom time devoted to practical design-by-analysis activities. Dedicated parallel sessions of mentoring/review to the single groups of students are planned, given by the teaching assistants.
N.B. Depending on the specific subject of the Project Lab assigned to students in a given year, the focus on the aforementioned topics of the program will be different, and the selection of case studies will be different as well.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists in an oral examination, aimed at verifying deep knowledge and understanding of the course topics, and estimation skills as well. Admission to the oral examination is allowed based on the result of a written brief multiple-choice test.
The ability of making autonomous judgements to handle (through appropriate modelling and solving) thermo-mechanical problems not strictly related to the "case studies" (selected and illustrated to the class in the exercise sessions during the course) is addressed as well. To this end, simple and short written tests (to be set and solved pen-on-paper by the student) are assigned at the time of the oral examination.
Every year, a specific item of nuclear design and technology is thoroughly studied, and a project of "design-by-analysis" concerning a nuclear component is assigned to the class (divided in groups of four-to-six students), in the frame of Project Lab activities performed during the semester, which include activities performed with teaching assistants consisting of: (i) support for the explanation of the selected project; (ii) classroom assistance to elaborate the excel sheets and the solution report assigned to class groups as homework (students who cannot take the Project Lab during the semester can work at the project on their own).
The project objective is allowing students to apply the approaches and principles taught in classroom, and to develop autonomous learning skills as well. To this regard, the students should be able to: (i) independently, identify missing pieces of information necessary to complete the project tasks; (ii) independently, find this information in literature sources; (iii) critically, assess and use contents of references to reach the project objectives; (iv) formulate, set up, and implement in excel sheets the thermo-mechanical analyses required by the assigned project; (v) summarize and properly discuss in a brief technical report the achieved results.
The Project Lab outcomes (i.e., the brief report, prepared by each group) are expected to be delivered at a deadline fixed at the end of the course. These deliverables are going to be a topic of discussion during the oral examination, to ascertain that the student is able in autonomy to make, discuss and communicate in a professional manner (i.e., with correct use of language and clarity of exposure) the analyses of the proposed project. No specific fraction of the examination final mark is assigned a priori to the Project Lab, since it is a group activity.

L. Luzzi, Thermomechanics, Editore: (on line), Anno edizione: 2016
Note: In: C. Lombardi, Nuclear Plants, Chap. 4 (Part II)
S. Glasstone, A. Sesonske, Nuclear Reactor Engineering, Editore: Chapmann & Hall, New York, Anno edizione: 1994
Note: Chap. 7 (Vol. I)
J.F. Harvey, Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels, Editore: Van Nostrand Reinhold Company Inc. New York, Anno edizione: 1985
Note: Chap. 1, 2, 8
J. Weisman, Elements of Nuclear Reactor Design, Editore: Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company, Amsterdam, Anno edizione: 1977
Note: Chap. 5, 7, 8, 9, 10
J.J. Duderstadt, L.J. Hamilton, Nuclear Reactor Analysis, Editore: John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, Anno edizione: 1976
Note: Chap. 12

Il Corso "Personalità Teambuilding e Leadership" introduce lo studente alla conoscenza delle strutture di personalità che orientano l'immagine di Sé, l'atteggiarsi, l'agire, il pensare, l'interagire, il comunicare e il cooperare: per lo studio, il lavoro e le relazioni interpersonali e con particolare riferimento allo sviluppo di competenze per il teambuilding e la leadership. Porta lo studente: - a valorizzare le proprie risorse e migliorare il proprio rendimento nell'acquisizione di nuove abilità e competenze; - a conoscere e ad affrontare meglio situazioni difficili a livello personale o di gruppo; - a prepararsi alla cooperazione e alla leadership; - ad affrontare al meglio le prime esperienze di inserimento lavorativo. Il corso offre laboratori esperienziali per lo sviluppo di soft skill nelle aree trattate, presenta i principi e modelli (di area costruttivista e relazionale) che guidano le esperienze di laboratorio e che possono essere adottati nella futura vita professionale e personale.

The course aims at providing the students with a critical understanding of the philosophical foundations of science and technology. But what is the relation between philosophy and science? On the one hand, the discoveries by scientists are often inspired by philosophical ideas. On the other hand, scientific achievements and technological advancements pose deep conceptual questions to philosophers. The connection between these disciplines is thus so tied that it becomes difficult to even draw a border between them. This course explores such a connection through the study of important episodes in the history of science. Outstanding issues of philosophy of science and technology, such as scientific progress, the method of science and the confirmation of theories and laws, will be addressed. Moreover, a particular focus will be devoted to philosophical questions concerning the nature of space as they emerge in the foundations of science, especially in relation to the famous debate between Leibniz and Newton.

The course aims at providing the students with a critical understanding of the philosophical foundations of science and technology.
But what is the relation between philosophy and science? On the one hand, the discoveries by scientists are often inspired by philosophical ideas. On the other hand, scientific achievements and technological advancements pose deep conceptual questions to philosophers. The connection between these disciplines is thus so tied that it becomes difficult to even draw a border between them. This course explores such a connection through the study of important episodes in the history of science. Outstanding issues of philosophy of science and technology, such as scientific progress, the method of science and the confirmation of theories and laws, will be addressed. Moreover, a particular focus will be devoted to philosophical questions concerning the nature of space as they emerge in the foundations of science, especially in relation to the famous debate between Leibniz and Newton. Finally, in the context of philosophy of technology, we will explore epistemic tools that are used to draw scientifically-informed inferences, such as computer simulations and thought experiments.
Here's below a list of the main topics:

• Method of science
• Demarcation between science and pseudo-science
• Confirmation
• Scientific Progress
• Philosophy of Space: Absolutism vs Relationism
• Scientific Reasoning
• Philosophy of Technology

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Altro
Final written exam based on general questions about the topics of the lectures: specifically, the students are assigned to write several essays, which have to be emailed directly to the instructors at the following address: [email protected]. There are also individual class presentations scheduled during the term

Alan Chalmers, What is This Thing Called Science?, Editore: Hackett Pub Co Inc
Nick Huggett, Space from Zeno to Einstein: Classic Readings With a Contemporary Commentary, Editore: Bradford Books

The course Physics of Disordered Materials is a 5-CFU course. The present detailed program defines aims, educational outcomes and the syllabus of the course.
Physics of disordered materials aims at introducing the physics of structurally disordered condensed matter, with attention to irradiation effects. After introducing the concepts of order, disorder, and order parameters (long range), the basic mechanisms of structural modification upon irradiation of a crystal with energetic particles are addressed, referring to the elastic collision regime. The phenomenology of the glass transition, including the interplay between thermodynamics and kinetics is studied before offering a robust overview over the main techniques of experimental investigation of structural disorder. Attention is then focused to the structure of clusters, taken as the constitutive bricks of disordered materials, to the synthesis of nanocrystalline and nanoglassy materials, discussing a selection of their peculiar properties, to quasicrystals, studying their relation to crystals and the features of the quasicrystalline-amorphous state transition. The Anderson-Mott localization is introduced.

After attending the course and after a positive evaluation, it is expected that the students:
1. know and are able to describe the effect of energetic particle irradiation (elastic collision regime) on the disordering and the structural stability of a target (DdD1)
2. know and are able to describe the phenomenology of the glass transition for different classes of non-polymeric materials, considering the interplay between thermodynamic and kinetic aspects of the transition (DdD1)
3. know and are able to choose (in principle) among the main experimental techniques to study structural disorder, depending on the kind of information each of them provides, in pareticular concerning the investigation of short and medium range order in a structurally disordered material (DdD1)
4. know and are able to describe the basics of the physics of atomic clusters (inert gases and simple metals) and of quasicrystals in relation to their structure, as well as the essentials of transport in heavily disordered materials and the pertinent modeling (Anderson-Mott localization) (DdD1)

structural order; kinds of disorder; ordering rules; long range order parameters
phenomenology of the glass transition; thermodynamic and kinetic concepts; glass forming ability (GFA) criteria
physical mechanisms of structural modification upon energetic particle bombardment:
electrons: replacement collision sequence (RCS)
ions (elastic regime): linear versus dense collision cascade
microscopic analysis of the space-time evolution of a collision cascade
GFA in irradiated materials: interpretative and predictive criteria
experimental techniques for the analysis of structural disorder: (a), elements of scattering theory; scattering from structurally disordered materials; (b), X-ray absorption spectroscopies: EXAFS; XANES; (c), vibrational spectroscopies: IR absorption and Raman scattering
(a), short range order, chemical (CSRO), topological (TSRO); (b), medium range order (MRO); (c), atomic clusters; fullerene; fullerite; hollow diamonds
(*) nanocrystalline materials; structure and role of the interfaces; nanoglasses; synthesis of nanostructured materials via irradiation; nanostructured material response to irradiation
(*) quasicrystals: discovery, definition, aperiodic and quasi-periodic lattices; real quasicrystals; nano-quasicrystals; quasicrystal-amorphous and the reverse transition
(*) transport in heavily disordered materials: the Anderson-Mott localization; historical introduction; conducting vs localized electrons; the metal-insulator transition; localization of light: from ballistic to diffusive transport to Anderson localization; localization and enhanced transport in quasicrystals
Every year will be selected either section 6*, or section 7*, or section 8*.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Valutazione continua condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The evaluation consists in an oral examination that points at verifying the knowledge of the course topics, with particular reference to the ability in interpreting the physical bases of the different topics. The student will be able to demonstrate that he knows, has understood, and is able to describe, using the appropriate language and mathematical formalism, the course content. In particular the exam aims at verifying that the candidate:
1. knows and is able to discuss the effect of energetic particle irradiation (elastic collision regime) on the structural stability of a target, analysing the degree of structural order by using an appropriate order parameter
2. knows and is able to discuss the phenomenology of the glass transition for different classes of (non-polymeric) materials and the interplay between thermodynamic and kinetic aspects of the transition
3. knows and is able to conceptually select the most appropriate among the main experimental techniques introduced to study structural disorder. The choice will rest on the critical knowledge of the kind of information that each technique offers to analyse short and medium-range order in structurally disordered materials of different kind
4. knows and is able to discuss.
a. the basics of the physics of atomic clusters and the models for their structural evolution and stability
b. the basics of the physics of quasicystals and the models for their structural evolution and stability
c. the basics of transport in heavily disordered materials and its modeling

K.E. Sickafus, E.A. Kotomin, B.P. Uberuaga (Eds.), Radiation Effects in Solids, Editore: Springer, Dordrecht, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 1-4020-5294-4
K. Binder, W. Kob, Glassy materials and disordered solids, Editore: World Scientific, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-981-4350-17-4
P. M. Ossi, Disordered Materials - An Introduction, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2024, ISBN: 978-3-662-68426-9

The course aims at presenting a detailed quanto-mechanical description of the behavior of electrons and phonons in nanoscale materials and devices. The occurrence of peculiar quantum phenomena is demonstrated by means of analytical models focusing on confinement effects and their correspondent characteristic length scales (to answer the question: ‘ why does it happen and under which conditions? ’). The discussion of the effects arising from electron and phonon confinement in low dimensional structures (2-D, 1-D and 0-D) is accompanied by seminal examples of real nanostructures, experimental techniques and possible applications in novel devices taken form the recent literature (to answer the question: ‘ how to observe it and/or how to use it? ’). The physical models used to describe the properties are critically discussed to outline the premises, the underlying assumptions and the related limitations (to answer the question: ‘ to what extent is it valid? ’).

At the end of the course the student
Knows the behaviour of electrons and phonons in nanostructures and confined systems and the how they can be experimentally measured (DdD1)
Knows how to use the tools of quantum mechanics to properly describe the change in the electronic and phononic properties by model systems and understands the limits of the adopted physical models (DdD1).
Is able to apply analytical models to critically discuss the exploitation of quantum behavior in novel devices and the related length scales (DdD2)
Is able to apply the models presented in the course to critically discuss the electronic and vibrational properties of carbon nanostructures outlining the differences with respect to conventional materials (DdD2).

Introduction and preliminary concepts: what's the critical length for a metal nanocrystal to become an insulator: the Kubo Gap
Transport in nanostructures: Fundamental length scales. Transport regimes, parallel and perpendicular transport. Resonant Tunneling diode (RTD). Ballistic transport in nanowires. Quantum Interefrence Transistor (QUIT), Single electron transistor (SET) and Coulomb Blockade.
Phonons in nanostructures: Surface phonons and localized vibrations in confined systems. Acoustic waves in low dimensional structures and phonon density of states (PDOS). Raman spectroscopy in solids: from crystals to nanostructures.
Electrons in nanostructures: Effective mass approximation and the envelope function. Electron states and DOS of semiconductor heterostructures, wires, dots and artificial structures. STM and STS to measure electronic properties in nanostructures.
Carbon nanostructures: fabrication and properteis of graphene, derivation of graphene bandstructure, Dirac’s cones and massless Dirac fermions; e lectrons and phonons in single wall nanotubes (the zone folding approximation), derivation of the metallicity condition and size dependent gap in semiconducting tubes; Raman of carbon: from graphite to graphene and nanotubes. 2-D materials beyond graphene. Carbon atomic wires.
Thematic Seminars: some seminars will be given on specific topics by researchers working in the field of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology.
Laboratory visits: laboratory visits are aimed at showing STM and Raman measurements of nanostructures including semiconductors, oxides and carbon-based systems (graphene, nanotubes, cluster-assembled carbon). Lab visits will be scheduled according to the number of particpants.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination will consist in an oral discussion (about 30-45 minutes) of the topics presented in the course. The examination will verify that the student:

• knows the topics with the related hypotheses, the critical points, the mathematical approach and the physical constrains and consequences. Understanding the physics underlying the mathematical approach is considered a fundamental aspect.
• knows the value or order of magnitude of the main important quantities used to describe nanostructures (universal constants, fundamental length scales, typical size and energy values).
• is able to apply the tools of quantum mechanics to describe and critically discuss the electron and phonon states in confined systems and particularly in carbon nanostructures
• is able to use analytical models to describe the working of a quantum device

V.V. Mitin, V.A. Kochelap, M.A. Strocscio, Quantum Heterostructures, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1999, ISBN: 0521636353
Note: Additional material is available in the course website on the BeeP portal
Vladimir V. Mitin, Viatcheslav A. Kochelap, Michael A. Stroscio, Introduction to Nanoelectronics: Science, Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 0521881722
Note: Additional material is available in the course website on the BeeP portal
H.-S. Philip Wong and Deji Akinwande, Carbon Nanotube and Graphene Device Physics, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-0521519052
Note: Additional material is available in the course website on the BeeP portal

FISICA DEI MATERIALI NUCLEARI + SPERIMENTAZIONI DI CINETICA DEL REATTORE NUCLEARE
La prima parte del corso si focalizza sul comportamento dei materiali soggetti a irraggiamento. Obiettivi del corso sono l'analisi delle proprietà fisiche dei materiali di impiego in campo nucleare, l'analisi degli effetti dell'irraggiamento, e la loro interpretazione in termini di meccanismi microscopici e di evoluzione della microstruttura. L'attenzione è in particolare focalizzata sull'irraggiamento neutronico di metalli e di ceramici, quale avviene negli impianti nucleari.
Per quanto riguarda la seconda parte del corso (di carattere teorico-pratico), si propone di svolgere attività sperimentale nell'ambito della cinetica dei reattori nucleari utilizzando l'impianto di ricerca TRIGA Mark II. Calibrazione fine di una barra di controllo mediante il metodo del periodo stabile del reattore. Misura del coefficiente di temperatura pronto e isotermo del combustibile TRIGA. Modellazione e analisi dei transitori del reattore con e senza gli effetti di potenza.

"Il corso si propone di fornire le conoscenze di base necessarie per la comprensione dei meccanismi di generazione di impulsi laser a femtosecondi, della loro propagazione in mezzi lineari e non lineari, delle loro tecniche di caratterizzazione. Mira inoltre a fornire esempi di applicazioni nel mondo reale di impulsi ultrabrevi alla microscopia non lineare e alla micro/nanostrutturazione di materiali. Saranno trattati i seguenti argomenti:
1. Proprietà degli impulsi laser ultracorti
equazione di propagazione lineare per impulsi ultrabrevi; dispersione e tecniche per la sua compensazione;
propagazione non lineare dell'impulso ultrabreve in mezzi del secondo ordine; equazioni accoppiate a tre campi; generazione di seconda armonica, generazione di frequenza somma e differenza; amplificatori ottici parametrici;
propagazione non lineare dell'impulso ultrabreve in mezzi del terzo ordine; effetto Kerr, equazione di Schrödinger non lineare, solitoni, automodulazione di fase;
tecniche di caratterizzazione dell'impulso ultrabreve: autocorrelazione non collineare e interferometrica, FROG, SPIDER
2. Tecniche di generazione di impulsi ultrabrevi
mode-locking dei laser e tecniche di mode-locking passivo;
amplificazione degli impulsi ultrabrevi, tecnica di chirped.pulse amplification "

The course is offered as a 10-CFU course (Plasma Physics I+II), jointly taught with two 5-CFU courses (Plasma Physics I and Plasma Physics II) and one 8-CFU course (Plasma Physics). The present detailed programme defines the goals, expected learning outcomes and topics for all jointly offered courses.
Across the different versions, the course is organised around the main theoretical frameworks of plasma physics. Electrically charged particles and electromagnetic fields are always treated as parts of a single, self-consistent physical system: electromagnetism is therefore not introduced as an external tool used only in selected topics, but as an intrinsic component of every plasma description. Starting from single-particle dynamics, the course develops kinetic, multifluid and magnetohydrodynamic descriptions, with explicit attention to the physical assumptions, characteristic scales, applicability and limitations of each model. Selected topics from contemporary plasma research are considered and exploited to illustrate how these theoretical frameworks support the interpretation of analytical models, numerical simulations and experimental observations.
PLASMA PHYSICS I (5 ECTS)
The aim of this course is to provide a fundamental understanding of the plasma state, with special emphasis on strongly ionised, high-temperature plasmas. The subject is first framed within classical electrodynamics and particularly the electrodynamics of continuous media. This is not treated as an external preliminary topic, but as the common framework required to describe the self-consistent interaction between charged particles and electromagnetic fields. After introducing the main physical properties and characteristic quantities of the plasma state, the main theoretical descriptions are derived from first principles and related to one another. They are used to investigate single-particle dynamics, collective modes and the propagation and absorption of electromagnetic radiation in plasmas. The course concludes with a brief introduction to controlled thermonuclear fusion as a first example of a complex research field in which several plasma descriptions must be adopted and combined.
PLASMA PHYSICS II (5 ECTS)
The course deepens selected aspects of the physics of matter in the plasma state and represents a logical continuation of Plasma Physics I. It extends the analysis of collective phenomena to kinetic, nonlinear and relativistic regimes and addresses the emission of electromagnetic radiation, magnetically confined plasmas, collisions, intense laser-plasma interaction and controlled thermonuclear fusion, in both magnetic and inertial confinement approaches. These topics are selected both to provide a more complete development and understanding of plasma behaviour and to show how fundamental plasma physics is used in major areas of engineering applications and current research. Attention is paid to the complementary roles of theoretical modelling, numerical simulation and experimental observation.
Also, within the POLIMI Interdisciplinary Programme in Green Technologies, the introduction to nuclear fusion is intended to adequately place its potential long-term contribution to future energy systems in the context of the present scientific and technological status of the field and of the broader sustainable energy transition. Visits to research centres (ISTP-CNR Milano, ENEA Frascati and LNF-INFN Frascati) may be planned at the end of the course, subject to organisational availability and students’ interest.

COMMON LEARNING OUTCOMES.
At the end of the relevant course, the student is expected to be able to:
recognise a plasma as a self-consistent system of charged particles and electromagnetic fields, and explain how this feature enters the different theoretical descriptions;
identify the characteristic spatial, temporal and energy scales of a plasma problem; state the assumptions underlying a model; and assess its domain of validity and limitations;
select and justify an appropriate theoretical framework for the interpretation of a plasma phenomenon, explaining which information is retained or discarded when moving among single-particle, kinetic, multifluid and magnetohydrodynamic descriptions;
interpret the physical meaning of the mathematical methods used, perform simple derivations and order-of-magnitude estimates, and relate theoretical results to numerical simulations and experimental observations.
PLASMA PHYSICS I. The student:
knows the main mathematical and physical methods required to develop theoretical plasma physics;
knows the main quantities defining the plasma state and the theoretical models suitable for its description, with particular reference to classical, quasi-ideal plasmas;
is able to describe the main properties that distinguish plasmas occurring in nature and in the laboratory, and to estimate the principal quantities characterising them;
is able to use the theoretical plasma models to describe small-amplitude electromagnetic waves and collective modes, including the physical interpretation of resonant wave-particle interaction and Landau damping.
PLASMA PHYSICS II. The student:
knows the theoretical models required to describe kinetic, nonlinear and relativistic plasma dynamics;
knows the main physical properties of magnetically confined plasmas, with particular reference to particle dynamics, equilibrium and stability in idealised and realistic geometries, and to the role of plasma edge regions;
is able to apply plasma theory to describe nonlinear waves, intense laser-plasma interaction, radiation emission;
is able to integrate the physical results developed in the course to understand the main aspects of thermonuclear fusion research, including the properties of thermonuclear plasmas, the conceptual scheme and energy balance of a fusion power plant, and the magnetic and inertial confinement approaches. The student is also able to discuss critically the potential long-term role of nuclear fusion in climate-change mitigation and the sustainable energy transition, distinguishing established physical results, current research objectives and main challenges.

The topics are organised to make explicit the progression from the electrodynamic and single-particle foundations to kinetic, multifluid and magnetohydrodynamic descriptions. They are not intended as independent chapters or as a hierarchy of increasingly accurate models: each description is discussed with reference to the information it retains, the assumptions on which it relies and its range of validity. Selected research contexts are used to show how the same fundamental tools contribute to analytical modelling, numerical simulation and experimental interpretation.
PLASMA PHYSICS I.
Mathematical and electromagnetic framework. Role of tensor fields in physics; fundamental vector and tensor operations in general coordinates. Microscopic Maxwell equations and Lorentz force. Electrodynamic potentials, gauge invariance, Lorenz and Coulomb gauges. Systems of units in electromagnetism: SI and Gaussian units. Selected mathematical and electromagnetic topics are also developed through flipped-learning activities using the EVOLI learning tool.
Electrodynamics of continuous media. Poynting's theorem and conservation of electromagnetic energy in linear dispersive media. Anti-Hermitian component of the dielectric tensor and absorption of electromagnetic energy. Conservation of energy in the presence of temporal and spatial dispersion. Propagation of electromagnetic waves in uniform dispersive media: linear theory.
Introduction to the plasma state. Fundamental plasma parameters and characteristic scales. Electric-charge shielding and the Debye length. Thermodynamic properties of a classical plasma. Plasma oscillations and plasma frequency. Electrical conductivity. Physical conditions for collective plasma behaviour.
Single-particle dynamics and guiding-centre theory. Dynamics of charged particles in constant, uniform external electric and magnetic fields. Motion in slowly varying fields and the guiding-centre approximation. Drift motions and magnetic mirror effect.
Theoretical descriptions of plasmas. Microscopic and statistical descriptions: Klimontovich equation, kinetic theory and Vlasov equation. Macroscopic descriptions: moment equations and multi-fluid models. Single-fluid approach: magnetohydrodynamics (MHD). Relations among the different descriptions, closure assumptions and limits of validity.
Collective modes and waves in a plasma I. Macroscopic approach: collective modes and waves in cold and warm plasmas. Waves in the presence of an external magnetic field. Kinetic approach: collisionless absorption of electrostatic waves and Landau damping. Physical interpretation of resonant wave-particle interaction and comparison between macroscopic and kinetic descriptions.
Introduction to controlled thermonuclear fusion. Nuclear fusion reactions and thermonuclear plasmas.
PLASMA PHYSICS II.
Waves in a plasma II. General aspects of the kinetic study of collective modes. Kinetic description of waves in the presence of an external magnetic field: cyclotron resonances, their physical interpretation and main properties.
Nonlinear and relativistic plasma dynamics. Introduction to the mathematical description of special relativity; selected topics are also developed through flipped-learning activities using the EVOLI learning tool. Relativistic plasma models and propagation of large-amplitude waves in the cold-plasma approximation.
Laser-plasma interaction. Interaction of electromagnetic waves with underdense and overdense plasmas. Ponderomotive force, excitation of plasma waves and wave breaking. Parametric instabilities. Selected applications of superintense laser-plasma interaction, used to connect fundamental models with current experimental and numerical research.
Emission of electromagnetic radiation by plasmas. Main results of the general theory of radiation emitted by moving charged particles. Cyclotron and bremsstrahlung emission in plasmas.
Physics of magnetically confined plasmas. Dynamics of charged particles in toroidal and tokamak magnetic configurations and consequences for the physical behaviour of the system. One-dimensional MHD equilibrium and stability: theta pinch, Z pinch and screw pinch. Two-dimensional MHD equilibria and stability: balance of toroidal forces, Grad-Shafranov equation, Solov'ev equilibria and stability criteria. Fundamental properties of plasma edge regions in magnetically confined systems: limiters, divertors and scrape-off layer.
*Collisions in plasmas. General properties of the collisional term in kinetic descriptions. Coulomb collisions and characteristic collision times. Collisional energy exchange between electrons and ions. Alternative descriptions of the collision integral: Balescu-Lenard, Landau and Fokker-Planck equations.
Controlled thermonuclear fusion. Lawson criteria and ignition conditions. Magnetic (MCF) and inertial (ICF) confinement approaches. General scheme and energy balance of a fusion power plant. Fundamental physical properties of magnetically and inertially confined thermonuclear plasmas. Main challenges of fusion systems. Environmental aspects and potential long-term contribution to the sustainable energy transition. Current state of research in MCF and ICF.
For the 8-CFU course Plasma Physics, the selection of topics will be agreed with the enrolled students at the beginning of the course, taking their academic background and interests into account while preserving the overall conceptual coherence of the programme.

• Topic covered depending on available time and the interests and academic background of the enrolled students.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Assessment consists of an oral examination, normally lasting 20-30 minutes. For the 8-CFU course, the examination covers the selection of topics agreed within the end of the course.
The examination verifies knowledge of the course topics and, in particular, the ability to interpret the physical meaning of the mathematical methods used; identify the characteristic scales and assumptions underlying a model; assess its range of validity; connect single-particle, kinetic, multifluid and MHD descriptions; and select and justify an appropriate theoretical framework for a given plasma problem. For Plasma Physics I, the main focus is on plasma parameters and characteristic scales, theoretical plasma descriptions, single-particle dynamics, small-amplitude collective modes and electromagnetic-wave propagation. For Plasma Physics II, the main focus is on kinetic, nonlinear and relativistic collective phenomena, intense laser-plasma interaction, radiation emission, magnetically confined plasmas, collisional processes when included in the programme, and controlled thermonuclear fusion.
Knowledge of electromagnetic systems of units and representative values of fundamental plasma quantities, together with the ability to develop simple derivations, limiting-case arguments and order-of-magnitude estimates, is also assessed.
After the oral examination, students are required to undertake a self-assessment exercise. Its purpose is to provide feedback on their ability to identify the objective elements that emerged during the examination and to relate them to the corresponding quantitative grade. This phase has no effect on the official assessment; it is intended as an opportunity to test the level of awareness achieved and to use the feedback from the examination more effectively.

G. Pucella, S.E. Segre, Fisica dei plasmi, Editore: Zanichelli, Anno edizione: 2010
R. Pozzoli, Fisica del plasma termonucleare e astrofisico, Editore: CLUED, Anno edizione: 1984
T.J.M. Boyd, J.J. Sanderson, The Physics of Plasmas, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2003
A. I. Akhiezer et al., Plasma Electrodynamics Vol 1: linear theory, Editore: Pergamon Press, Anno edizione: 1975
A. I. Akhiezer et al., Plasma Electrodynamics Vol 2: Non-linear theory, Editore: Pergamon Press, Anno edizione: 1975
L. D. Landau, E.M. Lifshitz, Physical kinetics, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 1981
N.G. Van Kampen, B.U. Felderhof, Theoretical methods in plasma physics, Editore: North Holland, Anno edizione: 1967
L. D. Landau, E.M. Lifshitz, Electrodynamics of continuous media, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 1984
W.K. Kruer, The Physics of Laser Plasma Interactions, Editore: Westview Press, Anno edizione: 2003
J. Freidberg, Plasma physics and fusion energy, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2007

To increase the transdisciplinary basic knowledge and understanding of the key facts regarding the pollution phenomena casused by plastic disposal, mostly in aquatic environments, locally and globally.
Main course contents: disposal/fate/recovery of plastic and bioplastic, standard to define bioplastic biodegradabiity, bacterial production of VFA, PHA and EPS, the environmental problems related to the often incorrect use of plastics, including micro and nanoplastic and possible solutions.

Knowledge and understanding
The student will gain an overall knowledge and understanding of of the fate/disposal and recovery route of plastic and bioplastics in the environment; of the environmental problems/impacts and solution approaches.
Application of knowledge and understanding
The student will have to apply the knowledge acquired to perform multidisciplinary projects/case studies and lab activities on actual and emerging problems. These activities will enhance the cultural level and capability of students to confront with the challenges and opportunities coming from plastic and bioplastic in the environment and in different economical sectors.
Autonomy of judgment
The student will carry out autonomous choices and interpretations with respect to case studies and lab activities supplied, being able to debate and explain the pros/cons/uncertainties of the solutions proposed or results obtained

1. Introduction to macroplastic pollution in aquatic environment, evolution, impacts, modelling, solutions
2. Biodegradation of plastics: fundamentals and standards. Fate of biodegradable plastics in the environment and in wastewater/biosolids tretament plant
3. Methods to recover and produce biopolymers from liquid and solid organic waste.
4. Microplastics: origin, fate, impacts, solutions

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The written exam is composed by 2 questions and 2 calculation exercises. The candidate shall answer to 1 question and 1 exercise.
The evaluation/mark depends on:
question: breadth and accuracy of the content reported, level of argumentation and understanding of the question as a whole
exercise: correctness of the solution methods applied and the results obtained

This course deals with power systems analyzed from ethical and social perspectives. It is intended to give students a chance to reflect on the ethical, social, and cultural impacts of power systems by focusing on the issues faced by and brought about by electrical engineers.
This integrated course includes lectures by two instructors with complementary expertise, covering the issues of power systems at the intersection of technical and socio-ethical issues, and invited lecturers, covering specific topics at the forefront of research in the socio-technical management of power systems.
Class participation is expected, as classes will be organized as short workshop sessions in which experiences, and individual and group reflections are punctuated by Socratic discussions or microlectures.

Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of power systems;
Be acquainted with normative ethics and normative argumentation;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent in development, control, and design of power systems;
Be able to understand how technical problems are inherently connected to a social dimension within a socio-technical perspective.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in clarifying and ethically analyzing case-studies involving power systems;
Be able to apply ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by smart grids;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for solving or diminishing existing and emerging ethical and social problems of smart grids.
Making judgements
Students will be able:

• To autonomously analyze the ethical issues of a technology and to develop a critical analysis on that;
• To evaluate and select the appropriate knowledge in the effort of elaborating and justifying a philosophical argument on a topic autonomously selected.
  Communication
  Students will learn to:
• Work in small groups;
• Present in an effective way the results of their independent research, being able to justify their choices.
  Lifelong learning skills
  Students will:
  Be better prepared to their future professional life in an ethically and socially responsible way;
  Be able to analyze problems through an ethical lens.

The course will cover different topics from both a theoretical and a more practical point of view.
The following topics will be presented within the context of power systems development and technologies:
Privacy and privacy-preserving analysis of energy data: infrastructure components and consumer devices as data acquiring network devices.
Security both at the individual and national level: power disruption causing loss of infrastructure, endangering public safety and jeopardizing national security.
Equity: equitable pricing and affordability of access; fair distribution of costs and benefits; energy management burden on uniformed consumer; managing consumer behavior.
Environmental sustainability: future affordability of energy; intergenerational justice; possible conflict between reliability and environmental sustainability.
AI/ML techniques and Big Data analytics for the smart grid: their increasing role and critical issues (e.g., fair algorithmic decision making).
Social acceptance issues: effects of moral values on the acceptance of smart grid technologies; ethics of technology and technology acceptance models.
Professional codes of conduct: benefits and limits; how codes face innovation such as the smart grid.
Students will be supervised in the development of the final project (class presentation) in order to achieve the required standards.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Foreword: The program is the same for the both versions of the course (i.e, 5 ECTS, and 6 ECTS).
Grading will be on the following basis.
5 ECTS: 50% final project (team presentation in class); 50% written test on the course topics.
6 ECTS: 50% final project (team presentation in class + individual assignment); 50% written test on the course topics. The additional ECTS is accounted for by the individual assignment, which will be announced and agreed upon at the beginning of the course.

L'ingegneria industriale richiede un approccio sistematico alla progettazione e gestione dei sistemi complessi basato sul rischio (risk-informed). Con un focus particolare sui settori energetico e nucleare, il corso illustra gli algoritmi di intelligenza artificiale necessari per far evolvere la pratica dell'Analisi Probabilistica di Sicurezza (PSA), fondamentale per la gestione e il controllo dei rischi in sistemi ingegneristici complessi. A tal fine, vengono discussi: Artificial Neural Networks, Recurrent Neural Networks, Evolutionary Optimization algorithms, Clustering methods, Self Organizing Maps, Natural Language Processing.

L'ingegneria industriale richiede un approccio sistematico alla progettazione e gestione dei sistemi complessi basato sul rischio (risk-informed). Con un focus particolare sui settori energetico e nucleare, il corso illustra i metodi di analisi di sistema e le tecniche computazionali necessari per condurre l'Analisi Probabilistica di Sicurezza (PSA), fondamentale per la gestione e il controllo dei rischi in sistemi ingegneristici complessi. A tal fine, vengono discussi: Failure Mode and Criticality Analysis, Hazard Operability Analysis, Event Trees, Fault Trees, GoalTree-SuccessTree, Bow-tie, Bayesian Belief Networks, Importance Measures, Sensitivity Analysis.

This course provides an introductory overview on the basic principles of quantum optics, their use to understand the fundamental mechanisms of light-matter interaction and the possibility to exploit these concepts to manipulate information in a completely new way as in quantum communication and quantum computation protocols. The course is conceived as a starting point for more advanced studies.

Knowledge and understanding (DD1)
Attending the lectures and passing the exam will allow the student to:

• U nderstand the physical basis of quantum optical phenomena;
• Learn the fundamental mechanisms governing light-matter interaction;
• Learn the principles and the main protocols of quantum information.
  Apply knowledge and understanding (DD2)
  The student will be able to apply the basic knowledge described above to:
• explain the operating principles of some prototypal optical devices developed for quantum information;
• deepen the understanding of physical phenomena encountered in other courses with a new perspective;
  Communication skills (DD4)
  The exam requests the students to communicate clearly what they have learnt, with rigorous argumentation.

Prelude to Quantum Optics
1. Introduction: theoretical and experimental foundations for the quantization of the electromagnetic field
2. Photodetection statistics: semiclassical model, violation of the semiclassical model by sub-Poissonian light
3. Formalism of quantum mechanics: axioms, bra-ket notation, matrix notation, Schroedinger and Heisenberg pictures
Quantization of the electromagnetic field
4. Quantization of the electromagnetic field: normal modes and normal variables for the classical electromagnetic field, postulate of the Hamiltonian of the field, Fock states and their properties
5. Quasi-classical states of the radiation field: definition and decomposition in the Fock basis, Glauber displacement operator, properties of quasi-classical states
Quantum interferometry
6. Quantum description of the beam splitter and simple notions of quantum interferometry
7. Squeezed states: definition and properties, the homodyne detection technique
Atoms and photons
8. The Jaynes-Cummings model for the interaction of a two-level atom with a quantized field: analysis of the uncoupled Hamiltonian, dressed states of the full Hamiltonian
9. Rabi oscillations induced by n photons, collapse and revival of Rabi oscillations induced by a coherent field
10. Single photon sources: single photon purity, indistinguishability, brightness; qualitative discussion of different types of single-photon sources
Quantum information
11. Single-qubit states and transformations, observables in the qubit space, no-cloning theorem
12. Quantum cryptography: elements of classical cryptography, the BB84 protocol for quantum key distribution
13. Entanglement and Bell states, Bell inequalities, the quantum teleportation protocol
14. Fundamentals of quantum computing: two qubit gates, quantum function evaluation, examples of quantum algorithms (Deutsch, Grover,...)

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The exam is in written form, and typically consists of 3 open questions, each on a different topic. An optional oral exam, requested by the student or by the teacher, may complete the evaluation.
The aim of the exam is to ascertain:

• the understanding of the physical basis of quantum optics and information (DD1);
• the knowledge of the definitions, theorems and general concepts related to quantum optics and quantum information (DD1);
• the capability to present and discuss in writings, both qualitatively and quantitatively, the quantum physical models and protocols relevant for the course, with clear and rigorous argumentations (DD2, DD4).

Chirstopher Gerry and Peter Knight, Introductory quantum optics, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 978-0-521-52735-4
Serge Haroche, Jean-Michel Raimond, Exploring the Quantum: Atoms, Cavities, and Photons, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 9780198509141
Giuliano Benenti, Giulio Casati, Davide Rossini, Giuliano Strini, Principles of Quantum Computation and Information, Editore: World Scientific, Anno edizione: 2019, ISBN: 9789813279995
Mark Fox, Quantum optics: an introduction, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-0-19-856673-1

The aim of the course is to introduce the study of fundamental structural, morphologic and electronic properties of surfaces and interfaces of crystalline solids. The latter represent examples of low-dimensional systems, where the symmetry reduction may induce novel and exotic properties with respect to those that can be observed inside the bulk of a solid, and that can be understood only with the help of Quantum Physics.
Module I describes the main principles generally used in the analysis of low-dimensional systems. Elements of crystallography, surface thermodynamic potentials, elements of tight-binding and density functional theory, examples of confined systems in metal and semiconductor systems, hetero-junctions, hybrid structures, quantum wires and quantum dots, etc. represent some of the main topics discussed in this module.
Module II will be focusing on the experimental approaches that are needed to study the physical mechanisms and quantum effects acting at the low-dimensional scales. Some of the most widely employed methods will be presented in details.

-Knowledge and understanding (DD1)
The student will be able to implement concepts and theories learned in fundamental Physics courses (classical physics, quantum mechanics and solid state physics) to derive and discuss theories describing the physical properties and quantum phenomena of low-dimensional systems.
-Applying knowledge and understanding (DD2)
The student will be able to learn the working principles of state-of-the-art instrumentation suitable for the study of low-dimensional systems.
The student will be able to analyze and discuss the results of experimental measurements related to the discussed techniques.
-Making judgements (DD3)
The student will be able to identify the surface sensitive technique best suited to investigate the structural, morphologic and electronic properties of low-dimensional solid systems.
-Learning skills (DD5)
The student will be able to access the state-of-the-art scientific literature of the reference topics, in terms of understanding the employed experimental methodologies and the related scientific results.
The student will be able to analyze and discuss the results of experimental measurements related to the discussed techniques.

Real and ideal surfaces
Surface vs bulk.
2D crystallography
Advanced surface crystallography
Wood construction
Brillouin zones
Surface thermodynamics
Surface thermodynamic potentials
Equilibrium shapes of crystals
Surface energy and morphology
Surface bands
tight-binding.
Dangling bonds
Energy at surface
Bond braking and charge transfer
Metallic bonds
Confined systems
p - and Seiwatz chains
Dimers bridging groups
Adatoms and adclusters
Two particle elementary excitations.
Optical spectroscopy
Polarization function: excitons
Phonons
Excitations in reduced dimension
Defects.
Defects on surface
Vacances and impurities
Line defects: steps
Planar defects, stacking faults

Prova orale obbligatoria
Oral evaluation, aimed to probe the student preparation with respect to the objectives outlined above.

H. Lüth, Solid surfaces, Interfaces and Thin Films, ISBN: 978-3-319-10756-1
N. W. Ashcroft, N. D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, ISBN: 978-0030839931
S. Hüfner, Photoelectron spectroscopy: principles and applications, ISBN: 978-3-662-09280-4
H. Ibach, Physics of Surfaces and Interfaces, ISBN: 978-3-540-34710-1
J. C. Vickerman, I. S. Gilmore (editors), Surface analysis: the principal techniques, ISBN: 978-0-470-01764-7
K. Wandelt (ed.), Surface and Interface Science, Volume 1 - Concepts and Methods, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-3-527-41156-6
Moore, John H.; Davis, Christopher C.; Coplan, Michael A., Building Scientific Apparatus, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2009, ISBN: 9780521878586

The course gives the opportunity to enter the world of radiation detection systems, a key topic in scientific research as well as in industrial applications with an increasing demand of experts in the field. The course covers the physical principles of semiconductor detectors aiming at the measurement of diverse properties (e.g. energy, time, position, imaging) of the incident radiation (X and gamma rays, visible photons, charged particles, etc.), the main architectures of the readout electronics and the basic tools for their design and optimization. The program reviews basic and advanced detection systems currently in use in a variety of scientific and technological fields (e.g. space, experiments at synchrotrons/particle accelerators, non-destructive analysis, forensics) and the more recent challenges and developments.
The course includes in-depth analysis of selected case studies and several laboratory sessions with real detection systems.

• knowledge of the main topics in the field of radiation detection systems. E.g. i) main types of radiation interaction with matter, ii) principle of operation of different semiconductor detector topologies for imaging and spectroscopy, iii) mechanisms of signal formation, iv) low noise readout architectures and v) experimental setups of practical detection systems (DD1).
• analysis of the main parameters governing the interaction of X-ray photons with a sample or with a detector, use of public cross-section databases, computation of detected signal shapes in specific detector topologies, analysis of the noise performance of a radiation detection system, optimization of the frontend electronics for specific cases (DD2).
• ability to communicate the knowledge acquired in specific activities (e.g. laboratory sessions, topical seminars or scientific papers) on cases of real detection systems using the appropriate scientific terminology and the descriptors of the main concepts in the field (DD1 and DD4).

Interaction of radiation with matter: photons and charged particles, mean creation energy, statistical fluctuations.
Semiconductors as radiation detectors: pn junction, charge transport, generation-recombination, charge multiplication mechanisms, trapping, entrance window.
Semiconductor detectors for energy and position measurement of X-rays, gamma-rays, charged particles: microstrip detectors, pixel detectors, semiconductor drift detectors for spectroscopy and position-sensing, non-silicon detectors.
Readout electronics: low-noise architectures and processing techniques.
Signal formation in radiation detectors: Shockley-Ramo's theorem, computation of induced current shapes in relevant case studies.
Imaging pixel sensors: Charge Coupled Devices (CCD), CMOS monolithic active pixel sensors.
Advanced detector-amplification structures.
Examples of detection systems for frontier applications: synchrotron light experiments, astrophysics, diagnostic imaging, high energy physics experiments, elemental analysis, etc.
Laboratory activities
Laboratory activities aim at making students more familiar with the main instrumental facilities of a detector laboratory and with the operation of a detection system from an experimental standpoint. Students will work in groups with assigned tasks, e.g. analyze realistic detection systems, conduct specific experiments with X-rays and perform data analysis, evaluate main performance figures of a low-noise detector-electronic system. At the end, the groups will report their results to the class.
Other activities
Topical seminars from experts in the field and/or assignment of topical papers and/or a visit to an international scientific center will be possibly organized during the semester on a year by year basis in order to introduce cases of real detection systems and/or advanced topics.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation is in the form of an oral interview. The interview is intended to evaluate and assess:

• the level of understanding of the main topics in the field of semiconductor radiation detectors, e.g. the main types of radiation interaction with matter, the fundamental detector topologies for imaging and spectroscopy, the formation of the electrical signals in detectors, the low noise architectures mainly used for the readout (Dublin Descriptor 1).
• the level of understanding of the principle operation of the different detector topologies and of the techniques to analyse the shape and properties of detected signals.(Dublin Descriptor 1 and 2).
• the analysis of the noise performance of a radiation detection system coupled with its frontend electronics.(Dublin Descriptor 1 and 2).
• the application of the knowledge in the field to choose the most suited topology of detector for a given application and the ability to make numerical estimates and derivations.(Dublin Descriptor 2).
• ability to communicate the knowledge of real cases of detection systems acquired in specific course activities with a critical approach in the discussion. (Dublin Descriptor 1 and 4).

Gerhardt Lutz, Semiconductor Radiation Detectors, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 9783540716792
Glenn F. Knoll, Radiation Detection and Measurement, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2010
Additional teaching material https://webeep.polimi.it/
Note: Suggested readings will be made available during the course
J. Ohta, Smart CMOS image sensors and applications, Editore: CRC Press
Note: E-book available at www.biblio.polimi.it

Interazione radiazione-materia (richiami). Assorbimento di energia a livello microscopico e a livello di traccia. Grandezze fisiche di interesse radiobiologico (Dose, LET , grandezze microdosimetriche) . Aspetti chimici dell'assorbimento di energia, la radiolisi dell'acqua .
Introduzione alla biologia cellulare e ai meccanismi di proliferazione cellulare. Effetti delle radiazioni sul DNA e meccanismi di riparazione del danno radioindotto. Aberrazioni cromosomiche. Inattivazione della capacità proliferativa cellulare. Teorie e modelli della sopravvivenza cellulare. Apoptosi.Mutazioni e trasformazione neoplastica da radiazione. Instabilità genomica. Effetti " bystander " e adattativi .
Fattori che modificano la risposta cellulare alla radiazione
Effetti di ciclo. Effetto ossigeno, sostanze radioprotettive e radiosensibilizzanti . Effetti della distribuzione temporale della dose. Effetti di LET della radiazione.
Effetti dell'esposizione a radiazione di tessuti, organi e dell'intero organismo .
Effetti acuti: radiosensibilità di tessuti ed organi. Sindromi da panirradiazione. Effetti a livello prenatale.
Effetti a lungo termine: Effetti non stocastici in tessuti ed organi. Effetti stocastici: radiocancerogenesi in sistemi animali sperimentali e in popolazioni umane ( dati epidemiologici per sorgenti di radiazione naturali o artificiali ) , effetti genetici.
Radiobiologia in radioterapia
Crescita cellulare in tessuti normali e tumorali. Modelli sperimentali. Curve dose-risposta in radioterapia. Effetti del frazionamento e dell'intensità di dose in radioterapia, calcolo delle relazioni isoeffetto. Ruolo dell'ossigeno nella risposta dei tessuti tumorali. Altri fattori che modulano la risposta del tumore alla radioterapia: dimensioni, ripopolamento, radiosensibilità intrinseca. Probabilità di controllo del tumore e degli effetti nei tessuti sani circostanti.
Basi fisiche e radiobiologiche dell'adroterapia.
Radiobiologia nella radioprotezione spaziale
Insegnamento erogato dall'Università degli Studi di Milano. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare il sito di UNIMI al seguente link: https://www.unimi.it/it/corsi/insegnamenti-dei-corsi-di-laurea

Argomenti propedeutici di chimica e radiochimica per applicazioni tecnologiche. Proprietà nucleari e intorno chimico. Radionuclidi. Impieghi di radiotraccianti. Metodi radiochimici di analisi. Sorgenti per l'irraggiamento. Radiolisi. Dosimetria chimica. Irraggiamento industriale.

Argomenti propedeutici di chimica e radiochimica per il Ciclo del combustibile, in particolare per il ritrattamento. Partitioning-Transmutation-Confinement. Processi idrometallurgici. Cenni a processi alternativi. Metodi per l'analisi, il trattamento ed il confinamento di Waste Nucleare.

L'ingegneria industriale richiede un approccio sistematico alla progettazione e gestione dei sistemi complessi. Con un focus particolare sui settori energetico e nucleare, il corso illustra metodi analitici e tecniche computazionali che servono a un duplice scopo: valutare l'Affidabilità, Disponibilità e Manutenibilità (Reliability, Availability and Maintainability - RAM) dei sistemi e supportare il raggiungimento di questi obiettivi prestazionali durante la loro progettazione. Questi obiettivi sono perseguiti attraverso Metodi Probabilistici, Processi di Markov e Simulazione Monte Carlo.

L'ingegneria industriale richiede un approccio sistematico alla progettazione e gestione dei sistemi complessi. Con un focus particolare sui settori energetico e nucleare, il corso illustra gli algoritmi di intelligenza artificiale per il raggiungimento degli obiettivi di affidabilità, disponibilità e manutenibilità durante la progettazione, l'operatività e la manutenzione (correttiva, programmata, su condizione, predittiva e prescrittiva) attraverso il rilevamento, la diagnosi e la prognosi dei guasti. A tal fine, vengono illustrati: Principal Component Analysis, Auto-Associative Kernel Regression, Neural Networks, Deep Learning, Convolutional Neural Networks, Reinforcement Learning, Particle Filtering.

The course introduces students to the application of materials science and related technologies for the study, monitoring, and conservation of Cultural Heritage. It provides a multidisciplinary framework for understanding the value of Cultural Heritage and the fundamental principles of its preservation, with particular emphasis on the relationship between material properties, manufacturing techniques, deterioration processes, and conservation strategies.
Students will become familiar with the main categories of tangible cultural heritage, including architectural heritage and sculpture, mural and easel paintings, polychrome artworks, metal artifacts, paper-based objects such as drawings and manuscripts, and modern and contemporary artworks made from polymeric materials and design objects. The specific case studies examined each year may vary according to opportunities for site visits, museum activities, and direct observation of artworks.
The course presents the materials, technologies, and execution techniques that characterize different classes of artifacts, highlighting how their knowledge is essential for conservation and monitoring activities. Particular attention is devoted to the mechanisms of deterioration resulting from environmental exposure and atmospheric pollution, as well as to the principles of preventive conservation and the materials and methods used in conservation interventions. Examples and applications will focus especially on the conservation of architectural surfaces and other outdoor cultural heritage assets.

1 Knowledge and understanding (DdD1)
After attending the course and after the final examination, the student:
knows the main concepts of Cultural Heritage, deterioration, safeguard and conservation, monitoring.
knows the main characteristics of different Cultural Heritage items such as historic buildings and sculptures, paintings and mural paintings, modern and contemporary artworks, bronzes; is able to read and classify artifacts according to material science profile;
is able to draft the main durability and conservation issues of the different Cultural Heritage items;
2 Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2)
After attending the course and after the final examination, the student:
is able to understand and draft a diagnostic and conservation work;
is able to summarize the results of a bibliographic research in the field of Heritage Science
3. Communication skills (DdD4)
The attending student will be able to present and communicate a selected and complex case study in Heritage Science.
These outcomes are expected to provide the student basic knowledge tools necessary for their involvement in the field of research in Heritage science, but at the same time it offers the opportunity to deepen the knowledge of some investigation techniques, in lab and onsite, and materials technologies.

Main topics:
What is Cultural Heritage: concept and legislation, What are the main international Entities for the preservation of Cultural Heritage
What are preservation and conservation, What is Heritage Science
Built Heritage: deterioration and conservation processes of stone materials and ceramics
Innovative materials and nanomaterials for the conservation
Mural Paintings: an introduction to material characteristics from pre-historic rock art to XXth century murals. Main deterioration and conservation problems. Street Art.
Painting on panel and canvas: painting materials and techniques over the ages. Pigments and binders and their deterioration.
Additional topics according to the case studies and visits
Metallic artifacts, bronzes: properties and deterioration problems, corrosion and conservation.
Street Art and contemporary muralism: properties and major deterioration problems.
Early polymeric materials used in objects and works of art. The challenges of conserving plastics in museum environmental conditions.
Paper, books and manuscripts: properties and deterioration phenomena.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
For attending Students. The exam consists of a 20 min. oral presentation about a topic selected and agreed with the Teacher and based on a bibliographic research done by the Student in the current scientific literature available at https://www.biblio.polimi.it/; the colloquium will be completed by some questions about the general background on the same topic. The exam will be sufficient after a presentation characterized by sufficient clarity, synthesis and respect of assigned time. The Student should also demonstrate to be able to discuss similar arguments connected to those of the presentation and possess a general overview of the argument.
For not-attending Students. The exam consists of a written multiple choice test about the whole Program. The program is available on WeBeep, together with slides and other texts and documents, at the end of the semester. The test is composed by a number of multiple choice questions and 2 open questions. The Student should get a sufficient evaluation or higher (>18/30).

M. Matteini, R. Mazzeo, A. Moles, Chemistry for Restoration, Editore: Nardini Editore, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-88-404-4450-5
Bastidas, D. M., & Cano, E. (Eds.), Advanced Characterization Techniques, Diagnostic Tools and Evaluation Methods in Heritage Science, Editore: Berlin: Springer., Anno edizione: 2018
Siegfried Siegesmund and Rolf Snethlage, Stone in Architecture: Properties, Durability, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2014
David A. Scott, Gerhard Eggert, Iron and Steel: Corrosion, Colorants, Conservation, Editore: Archetype Books, Anno edizione: 2009
David A. Scott, Copper and Bronze in Art: Corrosion, Colorants, Conservation, Editore: Getty Trust Publications: Getty Conservation Institute, Anno edizione: 2002
Yvonne Shashoua, Conservation of Plastics: Materials science, degradation and preservation, Editore: Butterworth-Heinemann, Anno edizione: 2008
Baglioni, Piero, Chelazzi, David, Giorgi, Rodorico, Nanotechnologies in the Conservation of Cultural Heritage A compendium of materials and techniques, Editore: Springer Netherlands, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-94-017-9302-5

The course is aimed to deepen the concepts of dynamic modelling and simulation, and to explain the architecture of the most popular relevant software tools. To be more specific, the course is aimed to provide students with the skills needed to address problems of modeling and simulation of complex engineering systems. The first part will be dedicated to illustrate the causal approach to modeling. The second part of the course will be devoted to introducing the acausal approach, based on object-oriented programming concepts, languages and tools. In particular, in this second part, the characteristics of the modeling language Modelica will be illustrated, now standard "de facto" for the modular, multi domain modelling. The characteristics of the object-oriented modelling and simulation environments will be illustrated in reference to some application cases in a computer laboratory. These application cases will include examples of multidomain engineering and control systems.

Lectures will allow students to:
Understand the theory of numerical methods for the solution of systems of ordinary differential equations (ODE) (DdD 1).
Model and numerically solve hybrid dynamic models (events) (DdD 2).
Understand the basic theory of differential-algebraic equations systems (DAE) (DdD 1).
Use an object-oriented modelling language (Modelica) to model complex engineering systems (DdD 2).
Understand symbolic manipulation techniques applied to DAE system in order to derive efficient simulation codes (DdD 1).
Exercises will allow students to:
Build simulation models of complex systems in acausal (OpenModelica) object-oriented modelling environments (DdD 2).
Describe and numerically solve hybrid dynamical systems (DdD 2).
Select solver parameters and interpret the results of the simulations in terms of accuracy and computational efficiency (DdD 2).
After passing the exam, requiring the development of a simulation model, students will be able to:
Make design choices when building a simulation model (DdD 3) (DdD 5).
Justify design choices when building a simulation model (DdD 4).
Communicate the results of the work (DdD 4).

Lectures
1 Introduction.
1.1 System, experiment, model, simulation.
2 Causal approach.
2.1 Causal models and ODE.
2.2 From models to simulations.
2.3 IVP (Initial Value Problem)
2.3.1 Theorem of global existence and uniqueness of an IVP: hypothesis.
2.3.2 Theorem of global existence and uniqueness of an IVP: thesis.
2.3.3 Stability of an IVP.
2.3.4 Stability of the problem and numerical integration.
2.3.5 Numerical integration and stability of the solution of an IVP.
2.4 Elementary methods.
2.4.1 Forward Euler method.
2.4.2 Local truncation error and difference operator.
2.4.3 Consistency and convergence.
2.4.4 0-stability.
2.4.5 Fundamental convergence theorem.
2.4.6 0-stability of the forward Euler method.
2.4.7 Absolute stability.
2.4.8 Region of absolute stability.
2.4.9 Stiffness.
2.4.10 Backward Euler method.
2.4.11 Newton's method.
2.4.12 Modified Newton's iteration.
2.4.13 Trapezoidal method.
2.4.14 Midpoint methods.
2.5 Managing discontinuities.
2.6 Local error and tolerances.
2.7 Methods of step size selection.
2.7.1 Local error estimation: step doubling.
2.7.2 Local error estimation: embedded methods.
2.8 Higher order methods.
2.8.1 General formulation of Runge Kutta methods.
2.8.2 Accuracy, 0-stability and absolute stability regions of Runge-Kutta methods.
2.8.3 Embedded methods.
2.8.4 Implicit Runge-Kutta methods.
2.8.5 Linear multistep methods.
2.8.6 Adams-Bashforth methods.
2.8.7 Adams-Moulton methods.
2.8.8 BDF methods.
2.8.9 0-stability of multistep methods.
2.8.10 Absolute stability of multistep methods.
2.8.11 Predictor-corrector methods.
2.8.12 Milne's estimate.
3 Acausal approach.
4 Introduction to the Modelica language.
4.1 Classes, equations, parameters, constants.
4.2 Records, annotations, types.
4.3 Connectors.
4.4 Inheritance and partial models.
4.5 Events.
4.5.1 Synchronous data-flow principle.
4.5.2 Conditional models.
4.5.3 noEvent().
4.5.4 Discrete event models.
4.5.5 Events synchronization.
4.6 Stream variables and connectors.
4.7 Packages.
4.8 Components and (sub)systems.
4.8.1 Architecture driven approach.
4.9 Expandable connector.
5 DAE systems.
5.1 Examples.
5.2 Differentiation index.
5.3 Initial conditions and constraints.
5.4 Linear constant coefficient DAE systems.
5.5 Kronecker canonical form.
5.6 Algebraic index.
5.7 Index and numerical integration.
5.8 Dummy derivatives method.
5.9 Numerical methods for DAE systems.
5.9.1 Direct discretization methods: backward Euler, BDF, Radau.
6 Modelica code translation.
6.1 Hybrid DAE system.
6.2 Structural analysis.
6.2.1 Bipartite graphs.
6.2.2 Duff Algorithm.
6.2.3 Pantelides theorem.
6.2.4 BLT reordering.
6.2.4 The tearing problem.
Exercises
All exercises will be carried out in a computer laboratory
1. Model of a brushless motor in Modelica.
2. Discrete event models: event iteration.
3. Stream connectors. Control of a mixer.
4. Digital control systems in Modelica. Conditional connectors.
5. Discontinuous friction model. Stick-slip and hunting motions.
6. Conditional components: modelling and simulation of a mechanical stop.
7. Multiphysics modelling: model of an hydraulic piston.
9. Multibody package.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation test will be both practical and oral and it will be divided into two parts:
In a first part the student will be asked to develop "from scratch" and simulate the model of a freely chosen dynamic system, in an acausal object-oriented modelling environment (either OpenModelica or Dymola). The complexity of the model, the mastery of the modeling tool and the ability to interpret the results will constitute elements of judgment (DdD 1 - DdD 2 - DdD 3 - DdD 4 - DdD 5).
In the second part the student will be asked to show his/her knowledge of the theoretical contents of the course, answering theoretical questions or solving simple exercises. Examples of possible questions can be found in the texts of written exams assigned in the past, available on the course's WeBeeP page (DdD 1 - DdD 2).

U. M. Ascher, L. R. Petzold, Computer Methods for Ordinary Differential Equations and Differential-Algebraic Equations, Editore: SIAM, Anno edizione: 1998, ISBN: 978-0-89871-412-8
Modelica by Examples https://mbe.modelica.university/
Modelica Tutorial https://openmodelica.org/images/M_images/250204-ModelicaTutorial-PeterFritzson-AdrianPop-MODPROD-2025.pdf
F. E. Cellier, E. Kofman, Continuous System Simulation, Editore: Springer US, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-1-4419-3863-3

This course aims to provide students with an overview and a critical perspective on the history of technologies with a focus on communication, digital media, and digital infrastructures. Starting from a critical analysis of some key case studies, the course will focus on the role played by historical accounts, narratives, and imaginaries in conceptualizing, developing, and spreading communication technologies and infrastructures in contemporary society. Thanks to the collaboration with the Museo della Scienza e della Tecnologia Leonardo Da Vinci, students will also have the opportunity to observe and study historical objects, sources and artifacts from the museum's collections and archives. At the end of the course, attending students will research and write a final essay on the social history of a selected topic related to a technological trajectory.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the social and cultural aspects lying behind the conceptualization, the social impact, and the spread (or the failures) of communication technologies and infrastructures;
Deepen their understanding of how the history of technologies impacts contemporary innovations also embedding cultural and social values, political and economic strategies, and ideas of the future;
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to understand how the history - but also the narratives and imaginaries - about technological artifacts can impact the creation, conceptualization, and integration of technology in everyday life.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To analyze the historical path of a technology;
To recognize recurring pattern and topoi in the narratives of contemporary technological innovations.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Present in an effective way the results of their research and participate to peer-to-peer discussion;
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be aware of how their work contribute not only to technological advancements but also to historiography and future narratives of the past
Be able to analyze the social dimension surrounding technological innovation.

The course will be divided into two parts. During the first part, the course will deal with some essential theoretical and empirical aspects related to the social history of technology. In this phase, special attention will be paid to the social history of information and communication technologies (ICT, e.g., the history of computing and Internet infrastructures).
During the second part of the course, the class will visit (with the help of the instructor and a curator) the Museo Nazionale della Scienza e della Tecnologia Leonardo da Vinci of Milan, the largest science and technology museum in Italy. Then, case studies on specific technological objects/sources will be discussed in a series of lectures and interactive sessions with the instructor and with invited lecturers. During the last lectures, students will discuss and share their research for the final essay (individual or group presentations/discussions will be organized according to the number of attending students)

Prova scritta condizionata (a scelta del docente), senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Attending students (min. 60% of attendance to lectures in presence)
Grading for attending students will be based (100%) on a final essay dealing with the social history of a selected object (e.g., a specific device, component, document, or source related to the topics of the course), starting from the seleciton of primary historical sources and put into dialogue with the theoretical framework addressed during lectures. In the last part of the course, students will be encouraged to share and debate critical issues and contents related to the case studies for the final essay. Attending students for the 3CFU course will deliver a shorter essay. There are no compulsory readings for attending students, suggested readings/slide for each lecture will be provided on Webeep.
Non attending students
Non attending students should pass a written exam. This is a closed book, combined multiple choice and short answer test concerning concepts from the compulsory readings listed on this page.
Non attending students for the 3CFU course should study the first 2 readings of the bibliography (Marx 2010; Mosco 2005)
Non attending students for the 5CFU course should study all the readings of the bibliography (Marx 2010, Mosco 2005, Bory 2020)

Leo Marx, Technology: The emergence of a hazardous concept/Technology and culture, Editore: Johns Hopkins University Press, Anno edizione: 2010, Fascicolo: 51/3
Vincent Mosco, The digital sublime. Myth, power and cyberspace, Editore: MIT Press, Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 9780262280266
Paolo Bory, The Internet Myth From the Internet Imaginary to Network Ideologies, Editore: University of Westminster Press, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 978-1-912656-76-9 https://www.fulcrum.org/concern/monographs/tq57nt98c

Il corso affronta le principali questioni teoriche sulle dimensioni sociali dell'ambiente (i limiti dello sviluppo e la modernizzazione ecologica, il conservazionismo, l'ecologia politica, la transizione ecologica e la giustizia ambientale) mostrando come cambia la definizione di natura in rapporto alle visioni, i valori e gli interessi di società e attori sociali diversi. Analizza come le definizioni della questione ambientale e del rapporto uomo-natura si sono manifestate 'in azione' con l'emergere di controversie ecologiche (il nucleare, gli organismi geneticamente modificati, la crisi climatica). Affronterà anche il legame che le questioni ambientali hanno in rapporto con il mutato ruolo sociale della scienza e della tecnologia.

The course aims at giving students the fundamentals of electronic properties of solids starting from a microscopic quantum approach. The main topics are: phenomenological properties and definition of solid materials; crystals and their symmetry; the Schroedinger equation for a crystal: Born-Oppenheimer and mean-field approximations; electronic states: free electron model, periodic potential and Bloch theorem, band structure, quasi-free electrons, tight binding approximation; accelerated motion of electrons and holes.

The course aims at giving students the fundamentals of vibrational, optic and transport properties of solids starting from a microscopic quantum approach. The main topics are. Adiabatic theorem and vibrational motions. Lattice dynamics. Lattice specific heat. Linear chain with two atoms per cell: acoustic modes and optical modes. Simple 1D crystal: acoustic phonons and elastic waves. 3D Lattice dynamics. Optical properties. Kramers and Kronig relations. Interband optical transitions: direct and indirect transitions. Intraband transitions and plasmons. Transport phenomena. Phenomenology. Kinetic theory. Electrical conductivity. Electronic thermal conductivity. Lattice thermal conductivity of insulators

The course provides specialized knowledge in space propulsion systems and related topics.
Two tracks are planned in this course:

• the 6-credit track is dedicated to students belonging to the M.Sc. of Aeronautical Engineering and focuses on high thrust chemical propulsion.
• the 10-credit track is dedicated to students belonging to the M.Sc. of Space Engineering and extends the previous track with additional lectures on electric propulsion, nuclear propulsion, monopropellants for in-space propulsion. This course is also offered to students of the M.Sc. of Nuclear Engineering.
  The course will:
• revise the concepts of thermodynamics, gas dynamics, and chemistry, specializing them for rocket propulsion;
• introduce to electrostatic, electromagnetic and nuclear propulsion (10-credit track only);
• analyze the details of the different propulsion technologies and related apparatuses;
• analyze case studies of propulsion systems and their applications;
• present models and methods for ideal and non-ideal propulsion analysis;
• propose methods for the conceptual design of propulsion systems (mainly thermochemical);
• train teamworking and reporting capability of students through collaborative project activities.

At the end of the course the students are expected to:
know the state-of-the-art of rocket propulsion units as well as their subsystems;
understand the driving factors of rocket propulsion system performance;
compute ideal and estimate real performance of a rocket motor;
classify and compare different propulsion choices and select the best option for a specific mission or application;
perform the preliminary design of a rocket engine and its subsystems, following mission specifications;
support design choices with proper justifications;
document and support design choices.

A wide range of propulsion configurations (both chemical and non-chemical) will be explored, referring to both high-thrust rocket motors for access to space and space navigation systems (10-credits track only).
The course will be conducted with lectures and exercise sessions.
The following subjects will be discussed during the course:
Propulsive missions and space vehicles
Gas dynamics of propulsive nozzles
Aerothermochemistry of propulsive nozzles
Thermochemical propulsion (solid, liquid, chemical-hybrid)
The 10-credit course track will also comprise:
Monopropellants
Electric propulsion
Nuclear propulsion
The course is complemented by:
two flipped class activity where students will face the analysis of rocket performance analysis and conceptual design; students can deliver a report on a volunteer basis which will concur to the final score.
a project where teams of students are requested to develop a rocket motor, according to given specifications; the activity will be evaluated and can concur to the definition of the final score, at student's choice; the project activity is not mandatory.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The final exam consists of two parts:
Test #1: a closed-book test for theory assessment (12 questions, 12 points, minimum to pass 7 points, 1 hour-duration)
In this part the student should know the general theory, the meaining and trends of main formulas, the performance trends explained in class, the derivation of the simplest physical laws ruling rocket propulsion. The student has also to demonstrate the capacity of doing simple calculations on performance parameters and the understanding of the results.
Test #2: open-book written design test (1 exercise, 32 points, minimum to pass 18, 2 hour-duration)
In this part the student should demonstrate his/her propulsion design abilities, producing the complete design of a rocket motor.
Both tests are hold in the same day.
The result of the exam is obtained by:

• scaling the 7-12 point interval to a 18-32 points score range for the first part;
• taking the result of the second part as is;
• averaging the two scores with identical weight.
  The students must pass each part and score a minimum of 18 points in total.
  At student's choice, the Test#2 can be replaced by the evaluation of the final workshop described hereabove.
  In the project, the student is evaluated for his/her technical skills and team-work ability.
  The project scores 30 points. Two more points are attributed through peer evaluation by teammates.
  The evaluation of the project work will be valid for the entire academic year. After one year, the evaluation expires and the student will need to take the full exam.
  The teacher retains the right to integrate the written exam with an oral discussion, at his personal decision.

G.P. Sutton and O. Biblarz, Rocket Propulsion Elements, Editore: Wiley https://www.proquest.com/legacydocview/EBC/7104030?accountid=28385
Note: Main reference textbook
P.M. Sforza, Theory of Aerospace Propulsion https://www.proquest.com/legacydocview/EBC/787252?accountid=28385
Note: The content of the book can help to revise or build the background knowledge needed by the course.
P.G. Hill and C.R. Peterson, Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion, Editore: Pearson

Main aim of this course is providing, by means of statistical and probabilistic methods, a rationale for the thermodynamic description and a bottom-up description of the structural and dynamic properties of materials. These concepts are then applied to the description of systems of specific interest in engineering applications, such as liquids, plasmas, disordered solids (glasses and gels) and magnetic materials, and to investigate physical problems of technological relevance such as phase transitions, superfluidity and superconductivity.

At the end of the course, students should
Know and master the fundamental ideas of statistical physics and the basic tools, such as statistical ensembles and partition functions, which allow to relate the microscopic world to the macroscopic realm of thermodynamics;
Manage to apply the former general concepts to topics in condensed matter and material science of interest for their specific course of studies.
Be capable of conveying the knowledge they have acquired with plainness but also with accuracy and the ability to synthetize the argument (even for an audience that may not be as learned in the field as their teacher).

1. Review of probability and statistics. Probability distributions of interest in physics. Statistical entropy. Brownian motion as a paradigm of stochastic processes in physics.
2. From the macroworld to the microworld. Review of thermodynamics. Physical description of classical and quantum many-particle systems. Phase space and Liouville theorem. Density of quantum microstates and its dependence on total energy.
3. Foundations of statistical mechanics. Boltzmann fundamental postulate. Microcanonical distribution and thermodynamics. Gibbs paradox and Maxwell-Boltzmann (MB) approximation.
4. Closed systems and canonical distribution. Partition function and free Energy. Average value and fluctuations of internal variables. Canonical distribution for independent particles and system of indistinguishable particles. Classical monatomic gas. Polyatomic gases. Einstein and Debye models for the specific heat of solids. Phonons in solids. Paramagnetism and diamagnetism. Bohr-van Leewen theorem.
5. Mean field theories. Van der Waals model of the liquid-gas transition. Ferromagnetism and Curie-Weiss theory. Plasmas in the Debye-Hückel approximation.
6. Open systems and gran-canonical distribution. Chemical potential. Langmuir adsorption isotherm. Inhomogeneous systems and local chemical potential. Colloidal dispersions. Quantum statistics. Weakly-degenerate gases. Fermi gas and Sommerfeld theory for electrons in metals. Degenerate Bose gas and Bose-Einstein (BE) condensation. Laser cooling and BE condensation in dilute gases confined by magneto-optical traps.
7. Highly correlated systems. Liquid structure. Density correlations and structure factor. Superfluidity in 4 He and Landau-Tisza phenomenological model. Superconductivity (hints).

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation consists in an oral examination, structured so to ascertain whether and to what extent the goals of the course have been reached. Specifically, the student is first asked to give a concise introduction to one of the general subjects discussed in the course, so to check her/his skills in summarizing and framing an argument. Practical mastering of the acquired knowledge is then verified by asking the student to explicitly derive some of the main results related to that topic (namely, the student should be able to combine synthetic with analytic skills), focusing on a specific application of the discussed subject to the main subject of his/her studies. For the overall evaluation, a yardstick of the student’s performance, besides the clarity and effectiveness of the exposition, will also be the skill in using an appropriate scientific language and the readiness in finding connections between different topics. The final assessment will also take into account the degree of incremental knowledge acquired by student with respect to her/his starting level.

Roberto Piazza, Statistical Physics: A prelude and fugue for engineers, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-3-319-44536-6
Note: This is the official textbook of the course, which can be FREELY DOWNLOADED by all the students from
https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-3-319-44537-3
using their PoliMi credentials

Il corso intende introdurre lo studente al tema dello sviluppo sostenibile e al ruolo della tecnologia nella complessità delle sfide globali. Lo sviluppo sostenibile mira a identificare modelli innovativi per la Prosperità economica compatibili con il rispetto del Pianeta e l'inclusione sociale di tutte le Persone. In questa prospettiva il razionale e le logiche che sottendono a tale paradigma dello deve essere analizzate e compreso dalle generazioni di ingegneri che lavoreranno in contesti sempre più globali e inserito come elemento caratterizzante per una professione che inevitabilmente è in continua evoluzione. L'interesse per questi temi è evidente e ben esplicitato nell'Agenda 2030 delle Nazioni Unite e nei 17 obiettivi di Sviluppo Sostenibile, nella visione di una Europa della conoscenza e nell'interdipendenza globale marcata dagli effetti diretti e indiretti delle crisi economiche e sociali mondiali sui sistemi tecnologici e economici

The course focusses on the analysis of nonlinear dynamical systems, that is, the set of techniques that can be used to understand and classify the behaviour of a nonlinear model, be it a nonlinear control system, a mechanical, electrical, environmental, social model, or any other set of nonlinear differential equations.
The goal of the course is to provide an introduction to nonlinear systems theory with particular focus on bifurcation analysis. We will use common tools to classify the behavior of a system, and learn to explain how its behaviour changes as a consequence of changes in parameters or control variables. The main bifurcations occurring in nonlinear systems will be discussed in detail: they will be first illustrated on simple examples, and then on case studies with the help of software tools.

Referring to the Dublin descriptors lectures and exercise sessions will allow the students to:
•(DdD 1) know and understand the basic results of nonlinear systems theory for the characterization of a system’s solutions;
•(DdD 2) apply the basic results of nonlinear systems theory to the characterization of a system’s sensitivity to model and control parameters;
The computer laboratory will allow students to:
•(DdD 2) use the Matlab toolbox Matcont to numerically analyze and characterize the nonlinear behavior of some relatively complex real-world case studies;

Introduction to nonlinear dynamical systems
Stability and phase portrait near equilibria and fixed points
Changes of variables and topological equivalence
Nonstationary asymptotic behavior of nonlinear dynamical systems: cycles, tori, chaos, multi-stability
Parameterized systems and structural stability
Bifurcations of equilibria and cycles, robustness analysis
Transitions from periodic to aperiodic oscillations.
Introduction to numerical bifurcation analysis and continuation methods.
The course is organized into: lectures, in which the theoretical notions are presented and illustrated with the help of simple examples; exercises, in which the theoretical notions are applied; computer labs, in which the students will be introduced to the Matlab toolbox Matcont and will work in small groups analyze a relatively complex nonlinear model.
All activities will be integral part of the course program.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
A written exam at the end of the course, in which students will be asked to:

• solve simple numerical and analytical problems regarding the solutions of a given system and their sensitivity to model and control parameters (DdD1,DdD2);
• answer theoretical questions on all topics of the course (DdD1);
• answer practical questions on the computer labs (DdD2).

The course provides fundamental notions aimed at building solid awareness of the responsibilities arising from technical activities.
Specifically, the course is oriented towards providing a general overview of the rights and duties of technical experts, along with the identification of tools and procedures for legal protection (such as insurance, contractual clauses). Furthermore, the course aims to illustrate the rules protecting inventions - copyrights, and patents - granting the student immediate access to reference sources and applicable regulations, also through the analysis of practical cases.
The last part of the course offers an analysis of the legislation related to artificial intelligence and its evolution.

Caratteristiche e principi di funzionamento dei sensori per strumentazione clinica. Tecnologie a semiconduttore. Sensori di forza, pressione, movimento, accelerazione, temperatura, umidità, concentrazione di gas, radiazione elettromagnetica. Misure ottiche (fotodiodi, LED, CCD, CMOS). Sensori piezoelettrici, piroelettrici ed elettrochimici FET. Sensori a fibra ottica. Condizionamento dei sensori.
Sistemi per la diagnosi basata su immagini (endoscopia, radiografia computerizzata, tomografia computerizzata, risonanza magnetica, medicina nucleare, ecografia ed ultrasonografia). Sistemi per il monitoraggio emodinamico e respiratorio. Metodi e strumenti per laboratorio di analisi clinica (spettrometria, analisi elettrochimica ed elettroforesi). Microscopia. Strumenti per la chirurgia e la terapia.

Obiettivi formativi
Il principale obiettivo dell'insegnamento è fornire una accurata presentazione di tecniche importanti per lo studio di sistemi a molti corpi in materia condensata, meccanica statistica, fisica nucleare (è un insegnamento di teoria dei campi non relativistica, a bassa energia, ma con molte particelle). Le tecniche sono: la seconda quantizzazione, le equazioni di Hartree-Fock, il teorema di Gell-Mann e Low, il teorema di Wick, le funzioni di Green T-ordinate e ritardate, lo sviluppo diagrammatico, le equazioni di Dyson e la risommazione di contributi Hartree e RPA, cenni alle equazioni di Hedin, la teoria della risposta lineare, le quasiparticelle. La teoria è illustrata da applicazioni al gas elettronico omogeneo.
Insegnamento erogato dall'Università degli Studi di Milano. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare il sito di UNIMI al seguente link: https://www.unimi.it/it/corsi/insegnamenti-dei-corsi-di-laurea

Technology is one of the most pervasive features of modern society and the impact of technology on society has been a topic of longstanding concern. This course cultivates a critical approach to technology that highlights how technological objects, both old and new, are shaped by the social and cultural contexts in which they are designed, manufactured, and used.
Students are introduced to a corpus of studies that looks at how social relations and society shape technology and get ‘inside technology’, which highlights how the very design of technology (including the artifacts themselves) embodies important social, cultural, ethical, and political assumptions that inform how we use, value, or reject technology. Readings will examine some of the recent work by sociologists, anthropologists, historians, philosophers as well as feminist and postcolonial scholars who have provided new insights into our understanding of the development and dissemination of technology. Throughout we will look at studies of various technologies, such as bridges, the bicycle, the microwave, birth control, financial markets, and the internet.
Students will apply the conceptual and methodological tools from the discussed literature in a case study of a contemporary or emerging technology. This will allow for a more in-depth exploration of the conceptual frameworks provided during this course through the examination of the particular issues and concerns related to a specific technology. Students will critically examine how their selected technology shapes and is shaped by the social context in which it is produced and consumed, and what the implications are of these processes. Throughout the course, students are expected to play an interactive, collaborative, and participatory role by engaging in class discussions, writing exercises, presentations, and peer review.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad critical perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of technology;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent to old and emerging technologies;
Be able to understand how technical problems are informed by the socio-cultural contexts in which they occur.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in identifying and analyzing technological case studies;
Be able to apply sociological theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by technologies;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for addressing social problems generated by technologies.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To independently analyze the social impact of a technology and the social processes that inform technological development and use;
To evaluate and select the appropriate critical approaches to understanding and addressing social problems generated by technology.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Exercise and improve their scholarly writing skills;
Present the results of their independent research in an effective manner;
Justify their arguments clearly and coherently.
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be better prepared for their future professional life as a critical thinker and communicator;
Be better able to engage critically with issues that affect the society they live in;
Be better able to analyze problems through a theoretical lens.

The course consists of a series of interactive lectures dealing with major topics in social studies of technology. Students are required to come to class prepared and expected to actively participate.
Lectures will discuss a number of approaches central to a critical examination of technology, such as the Social Construction of Technology (SCOT), Feminist and Postcolonial studies of Technology, and Disability Studies. Students will also be introduced to several key conceptual and methodological approaches to technology studies, such as the role of technoscientific controversies, accidents and disasters; studies of maintenance and repair; technological determinism; social constructivism; the agency of artifacts; scripts and affordances; sociomateriality, and cyborg embodiment. During the lectures, students will also be introduced to case studies of contemporary and emerging technologies.
For the final essay, students are expected to focus on the social, ethical, and political dimensions of a topic or case of their choosing, rather the technical aspects of a certain technology. Students are also expected to give a final (group) presentation on a topic of their collective choosing. This topic can be, but need not necessarily be, related to the invidual papers of each student in a group. If students cannot present, they need to submit an additional (shorter) essay.
Students who take the course for 3 CFU instead of 5 CFU can submit a shorter essay.

Altro
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Collective presentations
Develop an argument in which the presented claims are justified by use of relevant literature and sociological argumentation and evidence;
To present this argument in an oral presentation in class in front of the instructor and their fellow students.
1, 3
4, 5
Individual written essay
The individual final essay demonstrates that a student has the capacity to read and engage with the relevant literature, and the ability to apply relevant concept and methods to a case study;
The individual final essay demonstrates an ability to conduct a thorough sociological analysis of a technology, and to communicate the results of this analysis in a clear and comprehensible manner;
The individual final essay discusses the social dynamics that are associated with their chosen case study of a contemporary or emerging technology, and critically reflect on this technology’s social impact and implications.
1, 2
3, 4, 5

H.M. Collins & T. Pinch, The Golem at Large: What you should know about technology
Ron Kline, Technological Determinism
Note: in International Encyclopedia of the Social & Behavioral Sciences, 2001 (pp. 15495-15498)
Leo Marx, Does Improved Technology Mean Progress?
Note: (1987) Technology Review, 71, 33-41.
Kline, R. & Pinch, T (1996)., Users as Agents of Technological Change: The Social Construction of the Automobile in the Rural United States.
Note: Technology and Culture, 37(4), 763-795.
David, P.A., Clio and the Economics of QWERTY
Note: (1985). The American Economic Review, 75(2), 332-337.
Judy Wajcman, Feminist Theories of Technology
Note: (2010). Cambridge Journal of Economics, 34, 143-152.
Nakamura, L., Indigenous Circuits: Navajo Women and the Racialization of Early Electronic Manufacture
Note: (2014). American Quarterly 66(4), 919-941
Audre Lorde, The Master's Tools Will Never Dismantle the Master's House.
Note: 1983
David Edgerton, The Shock of the Old: Technology and Global History Since 1900
Note: 2007
Couldry, N., Mejias, The Costs of Connection: How Data is Colonizing Human Life and Appropriating It for Capitalism
Note: (2019). Stanford University Press
Noortje Marres, The Costs of Public Involvement: Everyday devices of carbon accounting and the materialization of participation.
Note: (2011). Economy and Society, 40(4), 510-533.
Langdon Winner, Do Artifacts Have Politics?
Note: 1986
David F Noble, Social Choice in Machine Design: The Case of Automatically Controlled Machine Tools
Judy Wajcman, Technofeminism
Note: 2004

LAVORO DI TESI E PROVA FINALE

L'insegnamento si propone di
descrivere alcune strutture algebriche elementari con relative proprietà;
introdurre alcune delle idee alla base dello studio delle proprietà di uno spazio topologico mediante strumenti algebrici;
illustrare i temi principali dell'omologia simpliciale;
spiegare come utilizzare tali strumenti per lo studio di proprietà topologiche sia in ambito teorico che applicato;
introdurre le principali tecniche topologiche di analisi dati utili per il Machine Learning con i relativi strumenti informatici.

Al termine dell'insegnamento, chi supererà l'esame
(DdD1) conoscerà e comprenderà
le definizioni e proprietà basilari riguardanti i complessi simpliciali e l'omologia simpliciale;
le idee e gli strumenti fondamentali dell'omologia persistente e alcune sue possibili applicazioni nell'ambito della topological data analysis e del machine learning;
i principali algoritmi per il calcolo esplicito degli oggetti studiati;
(DdD2) sarà in grado di
applicare quanto appreso in situazioni specifiche, per studiare proprietà di spazi topologici al fine di costruirne approssimazioni e/o distinguerli e classificarli;
applicare gli strumenti studiati nell'analisi di dati provenienti da situazioni reali anche integrandoli in processi di Machine Learning;
(DdD3) sarà in grado di
interpretare i risultati di analisi di dati condotte con l'utilizzo dei principali software dedicati (R e/o Python).

Elementi di algebra e topologia. Relazioni di equivalenza e insiemi quoziente. Gruppi abeliani liberi e campi finiti. Topologia di un insieme, topologia quoziente, continuità di funzioni tra spazi topologici.
Omologia simpliciale. Simplessi e complessi simpliciali geometrici e astratti. Simplessi orientati. Catene e operatore bordo. Gruppi di omologia. Omologia ridotta. Calcolo dei gruppi di omologia. Prime applicazioni dell’omologia.
Omologia persistente. Filtrazione di un complesso simpliciale. Complessi di Čech, complessi di Vietoris-Rips, complessi alpha. Filtrazioni associate ad un point cloud. Omologia persistente e diagrammi di persistenza. Distanze tra diagrammi di persistenza e stabilità.
Topological data analysis e machine learning. Studio della forma dei dati: esempi di estrazione di features topologiche da dati multi-dimensionali. Applicazione in una pipeline di ML (clustering, classificazione, riduzione della dimensione,...). Discussione della versatilità e della robustezza. Comprensione della forma di un modello: aggiunta di un termine topologico nella funzione di loss di un processo di ML, analisi topologica di una rete neurale.
Nella seconda parte del corso verranno presentati numerosi esempi concreti mediante l’utilizzo di pacchetti software dedicati (R e/o Python).

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
L'esame consiste nello sviluppo di un progetto concordato con il docente riguardante l'applicazioni di metodi topologici in un contesto di analisi dati e/o machine learning. Le metodologie da utilizzare saranno quelle discusse durante il corso (o loro estensioni/generalizzazioni). Il docente cercherà di proporre ad ogni partecipante un caso di studio e una tipologia di dato da analizzare coerenti con il persorso di laurea magistrale del singolo.
Una volta completato il progetto, ogni studente preparerà una presentazione del lavoro e la discuterà oralmente in presenza del docente e degli altri partecipant al corso. Al termine della presentazione, il docente formulerà alcune domande inerenti sia al progetto che al contenuto dell'insegnamento.

James R. Munkres, Elements of Algebraic Topology, Editore: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Anno edizione: 1984, ISBN: 0-201-04586-9
Herbert Edelsbrunner, John L. Harer, Computational Topology - an introduction, Editore: American Mathematical Society, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-0-8218-4925-5
Hal Schenck, Algebraic Foundations for Applied Topology and Data Analysis, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 978-3-031-06666-5
Allen Hatcher, Algebraic Topology, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 0-521-79160-X

TRASPORTO DI CONTAMINANTI RADIOATTIVI
Obiettivi: Apprendimento dei principi e dei metodi per l'analisi e la modellazione del trasporto di contaminanti radioattivi nei mezzi porosi artificiali, nel suolo, nelle acque sotterranee e nell'atmosfera.
Contenuti: Processi di fuoriuscita di radionuclidi da depositi superficiali e sotterranei. Principali processi di trasporto di radionuclidi in soluzione acquosa nei mezzi porosi e fratturati. Equazione di Advezione Dispersione. Modelli deterministici e stocastici. Utilizzo di codici. Esperimenti in laboratorio. Modelli di trasporto di radionuclidi in atmosfera.